OS/2 Shareware BBS: 8 Other/08-Other.zip/nw411os2.zip/NWADMIN.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1993-10-23 | 479KB | 19,294 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Contents


 The lists commands and procedures for the NetWare Administrator. Use the
 scroll  bar to see more entries. To learn how to use Help, press <F1> or
 choose "How to  Use Help" from the "Help" menu.
 Commands

    Object Menu commands
    View Menu commands
    Options Menu commands
    Tools Menu commands
    Window Menu commands
    Help Menu commands
 How to work with...

    Addresses.
    Attributes and Rights
    Creating Objects
    Directories and Files
    Logging In
    Login Scripts
    Navigation
    Objects
    Partition
    Passwords
    Printing
    Search
    Security
    Trustees
    Users and Groups


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Addresses ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Addresses


    Change an Object's E-mail Address
    Change an AFP Server's Network Address
    Change a Computer's Network Address
    Change a NetWare Server's Network Address
    Change a Print Server's Network Address
    Change a Printer's Network Address
    Change a User's Network Address
    Change an Object's Postal Address



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. View or Change an Organizational Role's E-mail Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change an Object's E-mail Address


 To add an address

 1. Select the object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. Type the E-mail address in the "E-mail Address" box.
 5. (Optional) To add more than one E-mail address:
    5a.Choose the "More" button.
    5b.Choose "Add."
    5c.Enter the address in the "E-mail Address" box.
    Repeat Steps 5a through 5c for each address that you want to add.
 6. Choose "OK."
 To change an address

 1. Select the object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. Select the address you want to change in the "E-mail Address" box.
    If the address you want to change isn't shown, choose the arrows next to
    this box until the address appears.
 5. Choose "OK." To delete an address

 1. Select the object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. In the "E-mail Address" box, delete the address you want.
    If the address you want to delete isn't shown, choose the arrows next to
    the  box until the address appears.
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. View or Change an AFP Server's Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change an AFP Server's Network Address


 To add or change an address

 Note: To change an AFP Server's address, you must first delete the address;
 then enter a new address.
 1. Select the AFP Server object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Network Addresses" page button.
 4. Choose a network protocol from the "Network Protocol" field.
 5. Choose "Add."
 6. Type the address in the "Network" field.
 7. Choose "OK."
 To delete an address

 1. Select the AFP Server.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Network Addresses" page button.
 4. Select the address you want to delete.
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. View or change a Computer's Network Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a Computer's Network Address


 To add or change an address

 Note: To change a Computer's address, you must first delete the address; then
 enter a new address.
 1. Select the Computer object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Network Addresses" page button.
 4. Choose the network protocol from the "Network Protocol" field.
 5. Choose "Add."
 6. Type the address in the "Network "field."
 7. Choose "OK."
 To delete a network address

 1. Select the Computer object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Network Addresses" page button.
 4. Select the address you want to delete.
 5. Choose "Delete."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. View or Change a NetWare Server's Network Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a NetWare Server's Network Address


 To add or change an address

 Note: To change a NetWare Server's address, you must first delete the address;
 then enter a new address.
 1. Select the NetWare Server.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Network Addresses" page button.
 4. Choose the network protocol from the "Network Protocol" field.
 5. Choose "Add."
 6. Enter the address in the "Address" box.
 7. Choose "OK."
 To delete an address

 1. Select the NetWare Server.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Network Addresses" page button.
 4. Select the addess you want to delete.
 5. Choose "Delete."



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. View or Change a Print Server's Network Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a Print Server's Network Address


 To add an address

 1. Select the Print Server object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. Type the address in the "Network Address" box.
 5. (Optional) To add more than one address:
    5a.Choose the "More" button.
    5b.Choose "Add."
    5c.Enter the network address.
    5d.Choose "OK."
    Repeat Steps 5a through 5d for each address you want to add.
 6. Choose "OK."
 To change an address

 1. Select the Print Server object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. Select the address you want to change in the "Network Address" box.
    If the address you want to change isn't shown, choose the arrows next to
    the  box until the address appears.
 5. Type the address.
    Use the <Backspace> or <Delete> keys to delete the old address.
 6. Choose "OK."
 To delete an address

 1. Select the Print Server object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. Delete the address in the "Network Address" box.
    If the address you want to delete isn't shown, choose the arrows next to
    the  box until the address appears.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. View or Change a Printer's Network Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a Printer's Network Address


 To add an address

 1. Select the Printer object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. Type the address in the "Network Address" box.
 5. (Optional) To add more than one address:
    5a.Choose the "More" button.
    5b.Choose "Add."
    5c.Type the network address.
    5d.Choose "OK."
    Repeat Steps 5a through 5d for each address you want to add.
 6. Choose "OK."
 To change an address

 1. Select the Printer object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. Select the address in the "Network Address" box.
    If the address you want to change isn't shown, choose the arrows next to
    the  box until the address appears.
 5. Type the address.
    Use the <Backspace> or <Delete> keys to delete the old address.
 6. Choose "OK."
 To delete an address

 1. Select the Printer object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Identification" page button.
 4. Delete the address in the "Network Address" box.
    If the address you want to delete isn't shown, choose the arrows next to
    the  box until the address appears.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. View or Change a User's Network Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a User's Network Address


 To add an address

 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Environment" page button.
 4. Type the address in the "Network Address" box.
 5. (Optional) To add more than one address,
    5a.Choose the "More" button.
    5b.Choose "Add."
    5c.Enter the network address.
    5d.Choose "OK."
    Repeat Steps 5a through 5d for each address you want to add.
 6. Choose "OK."
 To change an address

 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Environment" page button.
 4. Select the address in the "Network Address" box.
    If the address you want to change isn't shown, choose the arrows next to
    the  box until the address appears.
 5. Type the address.
    Use the <Backspace> or <Delete> keys to delete the old address.
 6. Choose "OK."
 To delete a network address

 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Environment" page button.
 4. Delete the address in the "Network Address" box.
    If the address you want to delete isn't shown, choose the arrows next to
    the  box until the address appears.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. View or Change an Object's Postal Address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a User Object's Postal Address


 To add or change an address

 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 2. Choose the "Postal Address" page button.
 3. Type the appropriate information.
 4. (Optional) If you want the postal address information to automatically
    appear in the "Mailing Label" field, choose "Set Address."
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Attributes and Rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Attributes and Rights


    Change the Attributes of a Directory or File
    Change the IRF of a File or Directory
    View an Object's Effective Property Rights to another Object
    View an Object's Effective Rights to another Object
    View an Object's Effective Rights to a Directory or File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Change the attributes of a directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Attributes of a Directory or File


 To change the attributes of a directory

 1. Select a directory.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Attributes" page.
 4. Select check boxes for attributes that you want to set for this directory.
 5. Choose "OK."
 To change the attributes of a file

 1. Select a file.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Attributes" page.
 4. Select check boxes for attributes that you want to set for this file.
 5. Choose "OK."



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Change the Inherited Rights Filter of a file or directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the IRF of a Directory or File


 To change the IRF of a directory

 1. Select a directory.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Trustees of this Directory" page button.
 4. In the "Inheritance Filter" field, select check boxes for rights that you
    want to allow to be inherited for that directory.
    Rights that are not checked cannot be inherited.
 5. Choose "OK.
 To change the IRF of a file

 1. Select a file.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Trustees of this File" page button.
 4. In the "Inheritance Filter" field, select check boxes for rights that you
    want to allow to be inherited for that file.
    Rights that are not checked cannot be inherited.
 5. Choose "OK.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. View a user's or groups' effective property rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View an Object's Effective Property Rights to another Object


 1. Select the object that you want to see another object's property rights to.
    Example: If you want to see the property rights User ANDREW has to Printer
    LASER, choose LASER in this step.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Effective Rights" button.
 4. Choose the "Select object" icon.
 5. Select the object whose effective property rights to the object you
    selected  in Step 1 you want to see.
 6. Choose "OK" in the "Select Object" dialog.
    The effective rights of the selected object to all properties are shown in
    bold.
 7. To see the effective property rights for a specific property, select the
    "Selected Properties" button; then choose a property from the list.
    The effective property rights for that individual property are bold.
 7. Choose "Close" in the "Effective Rights" dialog.
 8. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. View a user's or groups' effective object rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View an Object's Effective Rights to another Object


 1. Select the object that you want to see another object's effective rights
    to.
    Example: If you want to see the effective rights User ANDREW has to Printer
    LASER, choose LASER in this step.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Effective Rights" button.
 4. Choose the "Select object" icon.
 5. Choose the object whose effective rights to the object you selected in Step
    1 you want to see.
 6. Choose "OK" in the "Select Object" dialog.
    The effective rights of the selected object are shown in bold.
 7. Choose "Close" in the "Effective Rights" dialog.
 8. Choose "OK" in the Trustees dialog.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. View a user's or groups' effective access rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View an Object's Effective Rights to a Directory or File


 To view an object's effective access rights to a directory

 1. Select a directory.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Trustees of this Directory" page button.
 4. Choose the "Effective Rights" button.
 5. Choose the "Select object" icon.
 6. Select the object whose effective rights to this directory you want to see.
 7. Choose "OK" in the "Select Object" dialog.
 8. Choose "OK."
 To view an object's effective access rights to a file

 1. Select a file.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Trustees of this File" page button.
 4. Choose the "Effective Rights" button.
 5. Choose the "Select object" icon.
 6. Select the object whose effective rights to this file you want to see.
 7. Choose "OK" in the "Select Object" dialog.
 8. Choose "OK."



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Creating Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating Objects


    Create an AFP Server Object
    Create an Alias Object
    Create a Computer Object
    Create a Country Object
    Create a Directory Map Object
    Create a Group Object
    Create a NetWare Server ObjectDH_dialogncp_server
    Create an Organization Object
    Create an Organizational Role Object
    Create an Organizational Unit Object
    Create a Profile Object
    Create a User Object
    Create a Volume Object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Directories and Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directories and Files


    Add or Delete a Trustee
    Change the Attributes of a File or Directory
    Change the Current Context
    Change the IRF of a File or Directory
    Change the Owner of a Directory or File
    Create a Directory
    Purge a File
    Salvage a File
    Set the Preferred Name Space
    View an Object's Effective Rights to a Directory or File
    View Information about a Directory
    View Information about a File



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Change a directory or file's owner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Owner of a Directory or File


 1. Select a directory or file.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Facts" page button.
    The owner is listed on the "Facts" page.
 4. Choose the "Select Object" icon.
 5. Choose the object that you want to be the new owner of this directory or
    file.
 6. When the correct object is displayed in the "Object name" field, choose
    "OK."
    The new owner appears in the "Owner" field
 7. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. Create subdirectories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Directory


 1. Choose the directory or volume that will be the parent of the directory you
    want to create.
 2. Choose "Create" from the "Object" menu.
 3. From the list of objects, select "Directory."
 4. Choose "OK."
 5. In the "Directory name" box, type the name for the new directory.
 6. (Optional) To define additional information about this directory right now,
    select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create Another Directory."
 7. (Optional) To create another directory immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Directory."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 8. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the directory object dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create Another Directory," this dialog appears again.
 9. Choose "Create."
    The new directory is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. Purge a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purge a File


 1. Select the directory that contains the file that you want to purge.
    If the directory containing the file was also deleted, select any
    directory.
 2. Choose "Salvage" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Select the file that you want to permanently delete.
    If the file was in a directory that was deleted, choose "Deleted
    Directories" in the "Source Option" field. If the file does not appear,
    check  that the "Include" field includes the file's pattern in its file
    specification.
 4. Choose "Purge."
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. Recover (salvage) files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage a File


 1. Select the directory that contained the file that you want to salvage.
    If the directory containing the file was also deleted, select any
    directory.
 2. Choose "Salvage" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Select the file that you want to salvage.
    If the file was in a directory that was deleted, choose "Deleted Directory"
    in the "Source Option" field. If the file does not appear, check that the
    "Include" field includes the file's pattern in its file specification.
 4. Choose "Salvage."
    The file will now appear in regular directory searches and can be used by
    applications.
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. See details of a directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View Information about a Directory


 1. Select a directory.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the page button for the information you want to see about this
    directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. See details of a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View Information about a File


 1. Select a file.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the page button for the information you want to see about this file.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. Logging In ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Logging In


    Create or Change a Profile Login Script
    Create or Change a System Login Script
    Create or Change a User Login Script
    Prevent a User from Logging In
    Set Login Restrictions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. Login Script ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Login Scripts


    Create or Change a Profile Login Script
    Create or Change a System Login Script
    Create or Change a User Login Script


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. Change a user profile script ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create or Change a Profile Login Script


 1. Select the Profile object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Login Script" page button.
 4. Type the login script commands you want.
 Note: When you have made all necessary changes to the pages of this dialog,
 choose "OK."



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. Create or change an organizational unti login script ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create or Change a System Login Script


 1. Select the Organizational Unit.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Login Script" page button.
 3. Type the login script commands you want.
 Note: When you have made all necessary changes to the pages of this dialog,
 choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. Create or change a user login script ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create or Change a User Login Script


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the"Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Login Script" page button.
 4. Type the login script commands you want.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Objects


 To perform a task on an object, choose that object. The object dialog will
 appear. You can do most tasks in the object dialog. For help while using the
 object dialog, choose "Help."
    Add or Delete a Trustee of an Object
    Change an Object's IRF
    Create an Object
    Find Objects Associated with an Object
    Include Certain Object Classes in the Browser
    Rename an Object



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. Change an object's Inherited Rights Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change an Object's IRF


 1. Select an object.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Inherited Rights Filter" page button.
 4. Select check boxes for rights that you want to allow to be inherited.
    If the check box by a right is not marked, the right cannot be inherited.
    To  change the Inherited Rights Filter for specific property rights, you
    must also  choose "Specific Property" and select a property from the
    "Properties" list.
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. Find objects affiliated with a user ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Find Objects Associated with an Object


 1. Select the object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "See Also" page button.
 3. Choose "Add . . ."
 4. Choose the object you want associated with the object you selected in Step
    1.
 5. Choose "OK" to close the "Select Object" dialog.
 6. Choose OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. Rename an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rename an Object


 1. Select the object you want to rename.
 2. Choose "Rename" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Type the new name for the object.
 4. (Optional) To save the old name in the "Other name" field, select "Save old
    name."
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. Navigation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Navigation


    Move up a level in the Browser
    Move down a level in the Browser
    Open additional Browser windows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. Partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Partition


    Create a Partition
    Merge Partitions
    Synchronize Replicas
    View or Edit a Replica


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. Create a partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Partition


 1. Choose "Partition Manager" from the "Tools" menu.
 2. Select the container object that you want to be the root object of the new
    partition.
 3. Choose "Create a new partition."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. Merge partitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Merge Partitions


 1. Choose "Partition Manager" from the "Tools" menu.
 2. Select the container object that is the root of the partition that you want
    to merge with its parent.
    You must select a container that has a partition icon to the left. The
    [Root] partition cannot be merged, because it is the top partition.
 3. Choose "Merge partition."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. Synchronize replicas ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Update Other Replicas


 1. Choose "Partition Manager" from the "Tools" menu.
 2. Select the container that is the root object of the partition that you want
    to fix.
 3. Choose "Replicas..."
 4. Choose "Update Other Replicas."
 5. Choose "Yes" to confirm that you wish to update other replicas."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. View or edit replicas ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Edit a Replica


 1. Choose "Partition Manager" from the "Tools" menu.
 2. Select the container that is the root object of the partition whose
    replicas  you want to see.
 3. Choose "Replicas."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. Passwords ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Passwords


    Allow Users to Change Passwords
    Create or Change a Password
    Set Password Restrictions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. Allow users to change passwords ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Allow Users to Change Passwords


 1. Select a User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Password Restrictions" page button.
 4. Select the "Allow user to change password" check box.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. Change or create password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create or Change a Password


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Password Restrictions" page button.
 4. Choose "Change Password."
 5. Type the old password in the "Old Password" box.
 6. Type the new password in the "New Password" box.
 7. Type the new password again in the "Retype Password" box.
 8. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. Set password restrictions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Password Restrictions


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Password Restrictions" page button.
 4. Set the restrictions you want.
    Note: For more information, choose the dialog's Help button.
 5. Choose OK.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printing


    Assign Printers to Print Servers
    Assign Queues to Printers
    Create a Print Queue
    Create a Print Server
    Create a Printer
    Control a Printer
    Monitor Print Job Status


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. Assign printers to print servers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Assign Printers to Print Servers


 1. Select a Printer.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Assignments" page.
 4. When you have finished, choose OK to return to the  Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. Assign queues to printers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Assign Queues to Printers


 1. Select a Printer object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Assignments" page.
 4. When you have finished, choose OK to return to the  Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. Monitor print job status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Monitor Print Job Status


 1. Select a Printer object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Printer Status" button.
 4. When completed viewing, choose OK to return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. Control printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Control a Printer


 1. Select a Printer object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Printer Status" button.
 4. When you have finished, choose OK to return to the  Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. Create a print queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Print Queue


 1. Select a context from the Browser.
 2. Choose "Create" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose "Print Queue" from the "Object class" list.
 4. Choose "OK."
 5. When you have finished, choose OK to return to the  Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. Create a print server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Print Server


 1. Select a context from the Browser.
 2. Choose "Create" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose "Print Server" from the "Object class" list.
 4. Choose "OK."
 5. When you have modified everything you want, choose OK to return to the
    Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. Create a printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Printer


 1. Select a context from the Browser.
 2. Choose "Create" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose "Printer" from the "Object class" list.
 4. Choose "OK."
 5. When you have modified everything you want, choose OK to return to the
    Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Search


    Search for an Object or Property
    Search Object Classes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. Security ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Security


    Allow Users to Change Passwords
    Change the IRF of a Directory or File
    Change the Attributes of a Directory or File
    Create or Change a Password
    Limit the Number of Workstations a User Can Log Into
    Prevent a User's from Logging In
    Set Login Restrictions
    Set Password Restrictions
    View an Intruder's Address


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. See an intruder's address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View an Intruder's Address


 If a User's account is locked because an intruder attempted to access it, you
 can see the address of the intruder.
 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 2. Choose the Intruder Lockout page button.
    The information is in the "Intruder Address" field.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. Lock a user account ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Prevent a User from Logging In


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Login Restrictions" page button.
 3. Check the "Account Disabled" box.
 4. Choose "OK."
    The User won't be able to log in again until you reset the "Account
    Disabled" box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. Trustees ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trustees


    Add or Delete a Trustee of a File or Directory
    Add or Delete a Trustee of an Object
    Modify a Trustee's Rights to a File or Directory
    Modify the Object Rights of a Trustee
    Modify the Property Rights of a Trustee


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. Add or delete a trustee of a Directory or File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add or Delete a Trustee of a File or Directory


 To add a trustee

 1. Select the directory or file that you want to grant access to.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose "Add Trustee."
 4. Select an object to be the trustee.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The object that you chose is added as a trustee.
 6. Grant rights to the new trustee by selecting the check boxes below the
    "Trustee" list.
    Rights with a check in front of them are granted to the trustee.
 To delete a trustee

 1. Select the directory or file whose trustees you want to view.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Select the trustee you want to delete.
 4. Choose "Delete Trustee."
    This trustee no longer has explicit rights to this object.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. Add or delete a trustee of an object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add or Delete a Trustee of an Object


 To add a trustee

 1. Select the object that you want to give another object rights to.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose "Add Trustee."
 4. Select the object you want to add as a trustee.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The trustee appears in the "Trustees" list.
 6. Select check boxes for the rights you want to grant to that object.
 7. Choose "OK."
 To delete a trustee

 1. Select the object for which you want to delete a trustee.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Select the trustee you want to delete.
 4. Choose "Delete Trustee."
    The deleted trustee no longer has explicit rights to this object.
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. Modify a trustee's rights to a file or directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a Trustee's Rights to a File or Directory


 To change a trustee's rights to a file

 1. Select the file for which you want to change a trustee's rights.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose "Trustees of This File."
 4. Select the trustee whose rights you want to change from the "Trustees"
    list.
 4. To grant or revoke rights for this trustee, select the check boxes in the
    "Access Rights" field.
    Boxes that are checked show rights that this trustee has to this file.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The new rights you assigned to the trustee now take effect.
 To change a trustee's rights to a directory

 1. Select the directory for which you want to change a trustee's rights.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose "Trustees of This Directory."
 4. Select the trustee whose rights you want to change from the "Trustees"
    list.
 4. To grant or revoke rights for this trustee, select the check boxes in the
    "Access Rights" field.
    Boxes that are checked show rights that this trustee has to this directory.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The new rights you assigned to the trustee now take effect.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. Modify a trustee's object rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify the Object Rights of a Trustee


 1. Select the object for which you want to change the trustee's rights.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Select the trustee whose rights you want to change from the "Trustees"
    list.
 4. To grant or revoke rights for this trustee, select the check boxes in the
    "Object Rights" field.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The new rights you assigned to the trustee now take effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. Modify a trustee's property rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify the Property Rights of a Trustee


 1. Select the object for which you want to change the trustee's rights.
 2. Choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object" me nu.
 3. Select the trustee whose rights you want to change from the "Trustees"
    list.
 4. To grant or revoke rights for this trustee, select the check boxes in the
    "Property Rights" field.
    To change specific property rights of a trustee, choose the "Specific
    Property" button and then select a property from the "Properties" list.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The new rights you assigned to the trustee now take effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. Users and groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Users and Groups


    Change a User's Account Balance
    Change a User's Network Address
    Create or Modify a User's Login Script
    Prevent a User From Logging In
    Find Objects Affiliated with a User
    Limit the Number of Workstations a User Can Log Into
    Add a User to a Groups
    Delete a User from a Group
    Manage a User's Account
    Set an Expiration for a User Account
    Set Login Restrictions
    Create a User Template



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. Change a user account balance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a User's Account Balance


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Account Balance" page.
    You may need to scroll through the page buttons to find the "Account
    Balance" page button.
 3. Enter information to change the account balance.
    Note: For more information, choose the dialog's Help button.
 4. Choose OK.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. Create multiple users ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create User Defaults


 You can create a user template in an Organization or Organizational Unit
 container object
 1. Select the container object under which users will be created
 2. Choose "User Template" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Select "User" from the list of objects.
 4. Choose "OK."
 5. Complete the information that you want to apply to all users subsequently
    created in this container.
 4. Choose "OK."
    To apply this information to a User that you create in this container,
    select "Use User Template" in the "Create User" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. Limit where users can log in ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Limit the Number of Workstations A User Can Log Into


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Login Restrictions" page button.
 3. Select "Limit Concurrent Connections."
 4. Enter the number of workstations that a user can log in to simultaneously
    in  "Maximum Connections."
 5. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. List groups a user is a member of  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a User to a Group


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Group Membership" page.
 4. Choose "Add. . ."
 5. Select the Group that you want to add this user to.
 6. Choose "OK" to close the "Select Object" dialog.
 7. Choose OK.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. Delete a User from a Group  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a User From a Group


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Group Membership" page button.
 4. Select the Group from which you want to delete this User.
 5. Choose "Delete."
 6. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. Manage user accounts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Manage a User's Account


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Account Balance" page button.
 3. To change the account balance, ;enter a new number in the "Account Balance"
    box.
 4. To allow the User unlimited credit, select "Allow Unlimited Credit."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. Set a User's login restrictions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Login Restrictions


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Login Restrictions" page button.
 4. To prevent a User from logging in, select "Account Disabled."
 5. To make the account expire at a certain time, select "Account Has
    Expiration  Date."
    5a.To change the day the account expires, highlight the month, day, or
       year,  then use the arrows next to the field to change that part of the
       date.
    5b.To change the time the account expires, highlight the hour, minute, or
       second, then use the arrows next to the field to change that part of the
       time.
 6. To limit the number of workstations a User can log in to simultaneously,
    select "Limit Maximum Connections," then enter the number in the "Maximum
    Connections" box.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. Set expiration for user account ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Expiration for User Account


 1. Select the User object.
 2. Choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Choose the "Login Restrictions" page button.
 4. Select "Account has expiration date."
 5. To change the day the account expires, highlight the month, day, or year,
    then use the arrows next to the field to change that part of the date.
 5. To change the time the account expires, highlight the hour, minute, or
    second, then use the arrows next to the field to change that part of the
    time.
 6. Choose OK.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. Using Partition Manager ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using Partition Manager


 Partition Manager allows you to manage your partitions, and their replicas The
 main window here is similar to a Browser window. Only containers and NetWare
 Server objects are shown. Container objects that are the root of a separate
 partition are red and have the partition icon to the left. NetWare Server
 objects are blue. Different buttons will be active when different objects are
 selected in the main window.

 Procedures
    Create a New Partition
    Merge Partitions
    View or Modify Replicas
    Repair Damaged Replicas
    View Partitions on a Server
    Delete a NetWare Server Object
    Abort Partition Operation

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Context" shows you your current context in the Directory tree..

    "Partitions" lists partitions in the current context and allows you to
       browse the  Directory tree to view other partitions. Objects that are
       partition roots are  marked with the partition icon.

    "Create as New Partition" divides an existing partition to create a new
       partition. The selected object becomes the root of the new partition,
       and a  master replica of it is created on the server where the master
       replica of its  parent partition is located.

    "Merge partitions" merges a partition with its parent partition, leaving a
       single partition. All replicas are merged as well. You must select a
       partition  below the [Root] of the tree to choose this option.

    "Replicas" allows you to add, delete, view, or modify the existing replica
       types for  the selected partition.

    "Server Partitions" lists replicas stored on the selected NetWare Server.
       You  must select a NetWare Server object before this option is
       available.

    "Abort Partition Operation" stops the operation you have begun (you have
       either begun to create a new partition or merge a partition with its
       parent partition.

    "Delete Server" deletes a Server object and all its associated information,
       including its partitions and replicas.

    "Close" closes this dialog and returns to the main window of the NetWare
       Administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. Create a Partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a New Partition


 When you create a new partition, you are dividing an existing single partition
 into two separate partitions. No object in the tree can be a part of more than
 one partition at the same time.
 To create a new partition

 1. Select a container object that is not already a partition root (shows no
    icon to the left) from the list box.
 2. Choose "Create as New Partition."
    The container object is now the root object of a new partition and is
    marked  with the partition icon. A master replica of the new partition is
    created and  stored on the same server as the master replica of the parent
    partiion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. View or modify Replicas ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Modify Replicas


 This dialog box allows you to view existing replicas of the selected
 partition.  You can change the type of any replica, add new replicas on other
 NetWare  Servers, or delete replicas.

 Procedures
    Add a Replica
    Delete a Replica
    Change the Type of an Existing Replica
    Rebuild Replicas
    Send Updates
    Receive Updates

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Partition" lists the current partition whose replicas you are viewing. If
       you are  viewing replicas of the [Root] partition, no object is
       displayed here.

    "Master Replica" lists the NetWare Server object where the master replica
       of this  partition is stored.

    "Server" lists the other NetWare Servers where replicas of this partition
       are  stored.

    "Types" lists the replica type of each of the existing replicas of this
       partition.

    "Add Replica" allows you to add a replica of this partition, storing it on
       a  NetWare Server that does not already have a replica of this
       partition.

    "Delete Replica" deletes the selected replica. You cannot delete the
       replica that  is of type "Master."

    "Change Type" changes the replica type of the selected replica.

    "Rebuild Replicas" replaces data in a corrupted master replica with data in
       another replica that you specify.

    "Send Updates" sends updated information from your current partition to all
       the other replicas of the partition.

    "Receive Updates" allows your current replica to receive updated
       information from all the replicas of the partition.

    "Close" saves changes and returns to the list of partitions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. Add a replica ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a replica


 1. Choose "Add replica."
    The Add Replica dialog appears.
 2. Select the NetWare Server object that you want this replica to be stored
    on.
    Only NetWare Servers that do not have a replica of this partition will be
    listed to choose from.
 3. Select a Replica Type.
    For most replicas, Read Write should be used. Read Write replicas can be
    written to. They send out information for synchronization when a change has
    been made. Read Only replicas cannot be written to. They are, however,
    updated  when the replicas synchronize.
 4. Choose "OK."
    The new replica is created and you return to the list of replicas of this
    partition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. Change the replica type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the replica type


 1. Select the replica whose type you want to change.
    Note: You cannot change the type of the Master replica. To specify a new
    Master replica, change the type of an existing Read Write replica to
    Master,  and the Master replica will automatically be changed to Read
    Write.
 2. Choose "Change Type."
    The "Change Replica Type" dialog appears.
 3. Select a Replica Type.
    For most replicas, Read Write should be used. Read Write replicas can be
    written to. They send out information for synchronization when a change has
    been made. Read Only replicas cannot be written to. They are, however,
    updated  when the replicas synchronize.
 4. Choose "OK."
    The replica type is changed as you specified. You return to the list of
    replicas of this partition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. Delete a Replica ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Replica


 Deleting a replica deletes a copy of part of the Directory database. The
 database can still be accessed on other servers in the network, and the server
 that the replica was on still functions in Directory Services.
 Deleting a server, on the other hand, deletes the replicas that were on that
 server, but also removes the server from Directory Services so that users
 cannot use the server or its volumes.
 1. Select the replica that you want to delete.
    You cannot delete the Master replica; that would be like deleting part of
    the Directory database. If you need to delete the Master replica because it
    is  corrupted, first make a different replica the Master replica by
    selecting it  and changing its type to Master. The Master replica will
    automatically be  changed to Read Write.
 2. Choose "Delete Replica."
    The selected replica is deleted from the NetWare Server where it was
    stored.  Users who are attached to that server and need information from
    objects in this  partition will now have to cross the network to another
    server that contains a  replica of this partition.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the list of partitions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. Merge a Partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Merge a Partition


 When you merge a partition, the selected partition is combined with its parent
 partition. No object in the tree can be a part of more than one partition at
 the same time.
 You do not delete partitions. That would be like deleting objects from the
 Directory tree. You only merge and create partitions to define how the
 Directory tree is split into parts.
 To merge a partition

 1. Select the partition you want to merge with its parent.
    You must select a container object that has the partition icon to the left
    and is red. [Root] cannot be merged because it is the top partition; it has
    no  parent to merge with.
 2. Choose "Merge Partitions."
    All existing replicas of the selected partition are merged with the
    existing  replicas of the parent partition. The selected container is no
    longer the root  of a separate partition. This action make take a few
    minutes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. View Server Partitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View Server Partitions


 This dialog displays which partitions have replicas stored on the selected
 server. Each partition is specified by the complete name of its root object.
 This information allows you to see how many of this server's resources are
 used  by partition replicas, and how far across the network users might need
 to go to  find certain parts of the Directory database.
 The data in this dialog cannot be changed; you change replicas by selecting a
 partition in the previous dialog, and then choosing "Replicas."
 You cannot see the type of each replica from this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. Delete a Server Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Server Object


 Use this option to delete NetWare Server objects from the Directory tree.
 You must use the partition manager to delete NetWare Server objects so that
 you  can avoid deleting a server where the only replica of a part of the
 Directory  tree is stored.
 A NetWare Server must be down or you cannot delete its object. If you delete a
 NetWare Server, the only way to get it back is to reinstall it using the
 INSTALL.NLM program at the server console, or create the object again using
 the  menus after bringing the server back up.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. Clone best replica data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rebuild Replicas


 This option allows you to repair lost or corrupted information in a master
 replica with correct information in a Read Write replica. Normally, Directory
 Services considers the Master replica to be the source of the most correct and
 latest information.
 1. Select a partition.
 2. Choose "Replicas."
 3. Select a Read Write replica from the list of replicas for this partition.
 4. Choose "Rebuild Replicas."
    The Master replica is updated from the selected Read Write replica.
 5. Choose "OK."
    You return to the list of partitions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. Abort Partition Operation  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Abort Partition Operation


 u are merging a partition with its parent partition, it will become a separate
 partition again.
  If you select No, the operation you have begun (you have either begun to
 create a new partition or merge a partition with its parent partition) will
 remain intact and you will be returned to the Partition Management menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. Send Updates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Send Updates


 If you select Yes, your current partition will send updated information to all
 the other replicas of the partition.
 You would want to select Yes if, for example, one or more of the other
 replicas had become corrupt or lost information, or if you had updated your
 current partition and wanted to transfer that information to all the other
 replicas.
 Note: This operation may create a lot of network traffic, so it is best to run
 this operation during a period of light network traffic.
 If you select No, your current replica will not send updated information to
 all the replicas of the partition and you will be returned to the Replica
 Management menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. Receive Updates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Receive Updates


  an extended period of time.
 Note: This operation may create a lot of network traffic, so it is best to run
 this operation during a period of light network traffic.
 If you select No, your current replica will not receive updated information
 from all the replicas of the partition and you will be returned to the Replica
 Management menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. Dialog Index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Dialog Index


 Menu Items

    Browser
    Partition Manager
    Salvage
    Search
 Object dialogs

    User Details
    File Details
    NetWare Server Details
    Volume Details
    Profile Details
    Directory Map Details
    Alias Details
    Directory Details
    Computer Details
    Organizational Role Details
    Group Details
    Country Details
 Create

    Create User
    Create Volume
    Create NetWare Server
    Create Directory Map
    Create Alias
    Create Profile
    Create Directory
    Create Computer
    Create Organization
    Create Organizational Role
    Create Organizational Unit
    Create Group
    Create Country
 Access Control (Trustees)

    Trustees of container Objects
    Trustees of leaf objects
    Rights to Other Objects
    Trustees of Files and Directories


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. Trustees of a Container Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change Trustees of this Object


 The "Trustees of this Object" option lists trustees of this container object
 and their rights. When you select a trustee from the list, that trustee's
 rights to this object appear below the list.
 Note: The "Trustees" list does not list users inherit rights to this object.
 To  check for those objects, choose "Effective Rights."
 To close the "Trustees of this Object" dialog and save changes, choose "OK."
 To close the "Trustees of this Object" dialog without saving changes, choose
 "Cancel."

 Procedures
    Add a Trustee
    Delete a Trustee
    See the Effective Rights of an Object
    View or Change the Inherited Rights Filter
    Change the Object Rights of a Trustee
    Change the Property Rights of a Trustee

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Trustees" lists all trustees of this object.

    "Effective rights" are the actual rights that any object has to this
       object.

    "Add trustee..." adds a new trustee to the "Trustees" list.

    "Delete trustee" deletes a trustee from the "Trustees" list.

    "Object Rights" lets you view or change a trustee's object rights.

    "Property Rights" lets you view or change a trustee's property rights.

    "Clear" resets all rights in the list to undefined for the selected
       trustee.

    "Inherited Rights Filter" lets you view or change this object's Inherited
       Rights  Filter

    "OK" saves changes and closes the dialog.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without saving changes.

 Related Topics

    Trustees of this Object and Rights to Other Objects
    Trustees of the Root Object in the Directory Tree



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. Trustees of Leaf Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change Trustees of this Object


 The "Trustees of this Object" option lists trustees of this object and their
 rights. When you select a trustee from the list, that trustee's rights to this
 object appear below the list.
 Note: The "Trustees" list does not list users who inherit rights to this
 object. To check for those objects, choose "Effective Rights."
 To close the "Trustees of this Object" dialog and save changes, choose "OK."
 To close the "Trustees of this Object" dialog without saving changes, choose
 "Cancel."

 Procedures
    Add a Trustee
    Delete a Trustee
    See the Effective Rights of an Object
    View or Change the Inherited Rights Filter
    Change the Object Rights of a Trustee
    Change the Property Rights of a Trustee

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Trustees" lists all trustees of the object.

    "Effective rights" are the actual rights that any object has to this
       object.

    "Add trustee..." adds a new trustee to the "Trustees" list.

    "Delete trustee" deletes a trustee from the "Trustees" list.

    "Object Rights" lets you see or change a trustee's object rights.

    "Property Rights" lets you see or change a trustee's property rights.

    "Clear" resets all rights in the list to undefined for the selected
       trustee.

    "Inherited Rights Filter" lets you view or change this object's Inherited
       Rights  Filter

    "OK" saves changes and closes the dialog.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without saving changes.

 Related topics

    Trustees of this Object and Rights to Other Objects

    Trustees of the Root Object in the Directory Tree


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. Add an Object Trustee Procedure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Trustee to this Object


 1. Choose "Add trustee...."
    You need the Write property right to the ACL property of an object to add
    trustees.
 2. Select the objects you want to add to the list of trustees for this object.
    If you have only the Add Self property right to the ACL property, your User
    object will be added as a trustee; the "Select Object" dialog will not
    appear.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The objects that you selected are added to the "Trustees" list.
 Note: To grant rights to the trustee to work with this object, select the
 check boxes below the "Trustees" list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 88. Delete an Object Trustee Procedure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Trustee of this Object


 1. Select the trustee that you want to delete from the "Trustees" list.
 2. Choose "Delete trustee."
    You need the Write property right to the ACL property of an object to
    delete  trustees.
    If you have only the Add Self property right to the ACL property of this
    object, "Delete trustee" will only be available when your User object is
    selected from the list of trustees.
 3. Choose "Yes."
    The user that you deleted from the "Trustees" list will have rights to this
    object only by inheriting them from other objects that are trustees, such
    as by  membership in a group that is a trustee of this object.
 You cannot delete a trustee from the list if
 -  It is the only trustee of this object with Supervisor object right, and
 -  The object's Inherited Rights Filter blocks the Supervisor object right.
 You must first grant another trustee the Supervisor object right, or make sure
 the Inherited Rights Filter doesn't block the Supervisor object right. This
 attempts to prevent you from cutting off Supervisor-level access to part of
 the  Directory tree.
 Note: You can delete the User object that is the only trustee listed as
 supervisor for an area. This will effectively cut off Supervisor-level access
 to that part of the Directory tree. Be careful when deleting User objects!


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 89. Modify Container Object Inherited Rights Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change the Inherited Rights Filter of this Object


 1. To change the Inherited Rights Filter for certain properties only, select
    "Selected Properties" and then the individual property to modify.
    You need the Write property right to the ACL property of an object to
    change  its Inherited Rights Filter.
 2. To remove the Inherited Rights Filter so that all rights can be inherited,
    Choose "Clear."
 3. To change the Inherited Rights Filter for all properties of this container
    object, select "All Properties."
    You can also set an IRF for a specific property. Properties in the list
    that  have an IRF set are black; others are gray.
 4. Select the check box next to any object right or property right that you
    want to change.
    If the boxes are grey, no Inherited Rights Filter exists for this object or
       the  selected set of property rights. All rights can be inherited by any
       trustee.
    If a box is white (not checked), that right cannot be inherited by a
       trustee  with a trustee assignment above this point.
    If a box is marked (X), that right can be inherited.
    Note: You cannot leave the Supervisor object right unmarked unless a
    trustee  of this object has the Supervisor right.
 5. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Trustees of this Object" dialog.
 More about the Inherited Rights Filter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 90. Modify Leaf Object Inherited Rights Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change the Inherited Rights Filter of this Object


 1. To change the Inherited Rights Filter for certain properties only, select
    "Selected Properties" and then the individual property to modify.
    You must have at least the Write property right to the ACL property of an
    object to change its Inherited Rights Filter.
 2. To change the Inherited Rights Filter for all properties of this object,
    select "All Properties."
    You can also set an IRF for a specific property. Properties in the list
    that  have an IRF set are black; others are gray.
 3. To remove the Inherited Rights Filter so that all rights can be inherited,
    Choose "Clear Filter."
 4. Select the check box next to any object or property right that you want to
    change.
    If the boxes are grey, no Inherited Rights Filter exists for this object or
       the  selected set of property rights. All rights can be inherited by any
       trustee.
    If a box is white (not checked), that right cannot be inherited by a
       trustee  with a trustee assignment above this point.
    If a box is marked (X), that right can be inherited.
    Note: You cannot leave the Supervisor object right unmarked unless a
    trustee  of this object has the Supervisor right.
 5. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Trustees of this Object" dialog.
 More about the Inherited Rights Filter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 91. See an Object's Effective Rights to a Container Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See Another Object's Effective Rights to this Object


 For another object that is a trustee of this container object

 1. From the "Trustees" list, select one trustee.
 2. Choose "Effective rights..."
    The effective rights of the trustee are shown below the "Object name"
    field.  Effective rights are bold. Non-effective rights are grayed.
 3. (Optional) To see effective rights to specific properties, choose "Selected
    Properties" and select a property from the list.
 4. Choose "Close."
    You return to the "Trustees of this Object" dialog.
 For another object that is not a trustee of this container object

 1. Choose "Effective rights..."
 2. Choose the "Browser" icon.
 3. Select an object.
    Note: To see a user's effective rights to this object, you must manage that
    user (have rights to that user's ACL property.)
    The effective rights of the object you selected are shown below the "Object
    name" field. Effective rights are bold. Non-effective rights are grayed.
 4. (Optional) To see effective rights to specific properties, choose "Selected
    Properties" and select a property from the list.
 5. Choose "Close."
    You return to the "Trustees of this Object" dialog.

 Note: If you make changes to the "Trustees of this Object" dialog, they will
 not be reflected in "Effective Rights" until you have exited the "Trustees of
 this Object" dialog with "OK." When you return to the "Trustees of this
 Object"  dialog, any previous changes are reflected in "Effective Rights."

 More about Effective Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 92. See an Object's Effective Rights to a Leaf Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See another Object's Effective Rights to this Object


 For another object that is a trustee of this leaf object

 1. Select a trustee in the "Trustees" list.
 2. Choose "Effective rights..."
    The effective rights of the trustee are shown below the "Object name"
    field.  Effective rights are bold. Non-effective rights are grayed.
 3. (Optional) To see effective rights to specific properties, choose "Selected
    Properties" and select a property from the list.
 4. Choose "Close."
    You return to the "Trustees of this Object" dialog.
 For another object that is not a trustee of this leaf object

 1. Choose "Effective rights..."
    The  "Effective Rights" dialog appears.
 2. Choose the "Browser" icon.
 3. Select an object.
    Note: To see a user's effective rights to this object, you must manage that
    user (have rights to that user's Access Control List property.)
    The effective rights of the object you selected are shown below the "Object
    name" field. Effective rights are bold. Non-effective rights are grayed.
 4. (Optional) To see effective rights to specific properties, choose "Selected
    Properties" and select a property from the list.
 5. Choose "Close."
    You return to the "Trustees of this Object" dialog.

 Note: If you make changes to the "Trustees of this Object" dialog, they will
 not be reflected in "Effective Rights" until you have exited the "Trustees of
 this Object" dialog with "OK." When you return to the "Trustees of this
 Object"  dialog, any previous changes are reflected in "Effective Rights."
 More about Effective Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 93. Change Object Rights of a Trustee to a Container Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change A Trustee's Object Rights to this Object


 1. Select a trustee from the "Trustees" list.
    Note: You can select multiple trustees by holding down the <Ctrl> or
    <Shift>  keys; any rights that you change will affect all selected
    trustees.
    Object Rights with a checkmark (X) denote rights that are granted to the
    trustee.
 2. Select the check box next to any object right that you want to change.
    If a box is grey, see possible reasons below.
    If a box is not checked, that right is not granted to the selected trustee.
    If a box is marked (X), that right is granted to the selected trustee.
    Note: If this trustee has the Supervisor object right, you cannot remove it
    unless another trustee also has the Supervisor object right to this object,
    or  the Inherited Rights Filter allows other objects to inherit the
    Supervisor  object right.
 3.    To reset all object rights to undefined (not granted), choose "Clear."
    If you clear these rights, and no other rights are granted, the selected
    trustee is deleted from the list of trustees.
    Note: No rights in the list are granted, but they can be inherited if the
    Inherited Rights Filter allows them.
 4. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.
 If a check box is grayed, one of the following conditions exists:
 -  No trustee is selected. Select a trustee from the list.
 -  Rights are undefined. No rights are granted.
 -  Two or more trustees with different rights have been selected. Select only
    one trustee or change the check box to change that right for all selected
    trustees.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 94. Change Object Rights of a Trustee to a Leaf Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change A Trustee's Object Rights to this Object


 1. Select a trustee from the "Trustees" list.
    Note: You can select multiple trustees by holding down the <Ctrl> or
    <Shift>  keys; any rights that you change will affect all selected
    trustees.
    Object Rights with a checkmark (X) denote rights that are granted to the
    trustee.
 2. Select the check box next to any object right that you want to change.
    If a box is grey, see possible reasons below.
    If a box is not checked, that right is not granted to the selected trustee.
    If a box is marked (X), that right is granted to the selected trustee.
    Note: If this trustee has the Supervisor object right, you cannot remove it
    unless another trustee also has the Supervisor object right to this object,
    or  the Inherited Rights Filter allows other objects to inherit the
    Supervisor  object right.
 3.    To reset all object rights to undefined, choose "Clear."
    If you clear these rights, and no other rights are granted, the selected
    trustee is deleted from the list of trustees.
    Note: No rights in the list are granted, but they can be inherited if the
    Inherited Rights Filter allows them.
 4. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.
 If a check box is grayed, one of the following conditions exists:
 -  No trustee is selected. Select a trustee from the list.
 -  Rights are undefined. No rights are granted.
 -  Two or more trustees with different rights have been selected. Select only
    one trustee or change the check box to change that right for all selected
    trustees.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 95. Change Property Rights of a Trustee ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change A Trustee's Property Rights to this Object


 You can define property rights for a trustee in two ways:
 All Property rights define rights for this trustee that are the same for every
 property of this object. These rights control all properties unless rights are
 granted for a specific property as well.
 Specific Property rights define rights for this trustee for one property of an
 object. These rights, if assigned, override the "All Property" rights of the
 trustee for only that specific property.
 Example: All the properties of a Printer object are Read only, but users need
 to update the Cartridges property. To allow users to update the Cartridges
 property, select "Selected Properties;" then grant the Read right and the
 Write  right for the Cartridges property.
 Property rights

    Supervisor
    Compare
    Read
    Write
    Add (or Delete) Self


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 96. Change the All Property Rights of a Trustee ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change A Trustee's All Property Rights to this Object


 1. Select a trustee from the "Trustees" list.
    Note: You can select multiple trustees by holding down the <Ctrl> or
    <Shift>  keys.
    Property Rights with a checkmark (X) denote rights that are granted to the
    trustee.
 2. Choose "All Properties."
    The properties listed in the "Properties" list box become grayed.
    The rights you choose apply to all properties that do not have specific
    rights defined
    (see Change Specific Property Rights).
 3. Select the check box next to any property right that you want to change.
    These rights apply to every property of this object that does not have
    specific rights defined.
    If a box is grey, see possible reasons below.
    If a box is not checked, that right is not granted to the selected trustee.
    If a box is marked (X), that right is granted to the selected trustee.
 4. To reset All Property rights to undefined, choose "Clear."
    No  rights in the list are granted, but they can be inherited if the
    Inherited Rights Filter allows them.
    If you clear these rights, and no other rights are granted, the selected
    trustee is deleted from the list of trustees.
 5. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.

 Note: In most cases, a trustee will be granted the Read right to all
 properties. This allows the trustee to see the values in all properties of an
 object.
 If a check box is grayed, one of the following conditions exists:
 -  No trustee is selected. Select a trustee from the list.
 -  Rights_rights are undefined. No rights are granted.
 -  Two or more trustees with different rights have been selected. Select only
    one trustee or change the check box to change that right for all selected
    trustees.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 97. Change the Selected Property Rights of a Trustee ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a Trustee's Specific Property Rights to this Object


 1. Select a trustee from the "Trustees" list.
    Note: You can select multiple trustees by holding down the <Ctrl> or
    <Shift>  key.
 2. Choose "Selected Properties."
 3. Select a property from the "Properties" box.
    Properties in the list that have rights granted are black; others are gray.
    The Property Rights show rights granted to the selected trustee for this
    property.
 4. Select the check box next to a property right that you want to change.
    If a box is grey, see possible reasons below.
    If a box is not checked, that right is not granted to the selected trustee.
    If a box is marked (X), that right is granted to the selected trustee.
 5. To reset Selected Property rights for the selected property to undefined,
    choose "Clear."
    Rights will not be granted to the specific property that you have selected;
    the "All Properties" rights of this trustee will apply to the selected
    property.
    If you clear these rights, and no other rights are granted, the selected
    trustee is deleted from the list of trustees.
 6. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.
 Example: A user has Read rights to all properties of a Directory Map object
 that points to an application. The user needs to change the location of the
 application in the Directory Map, so the User is also granted the Supervisor
 property right to the Path property of the Directory Map.
 If a check box is grayed, one of the following conditions exists:
 -  No property is selected. Select a property from the list.
 -  Rights are undefined. No rights are granted.
 -  Two or more properties with different rights have been selected. Select
    only  one property or change the check box to change that right for all
    selected  properties.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 98. Trustees List box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trustees List box


 Lists all trustees that have rights granted to this object.
 Objects that are not listed in the "Trustees" list can still have effective
 rights to this object through
 -  Inheritance
 -  Equivalence to another object
 -  Membership in a Group that is a trustee of this object.
 You see what rights make up a trustee's trustee assignment by selecting that
 trustee in the list. You can select the check boxes to change that trustee's
 rights.
 If an object does not have a trustee with the Supervisor object right listed
 in  the Trustees list, that object's Inherited Rights Filter cannot block the
 Supervisor object right.
 Note: You can select multiple trustees by holding down the <Ctrl> or <Shift>
 key. Changes you make affect all selected trustees.
 More about Effective Rights
 More about the Inherited Rights Filter

 Example: Organizational Units SALES and RESEARCH are subordinate to
 Organization BOSTON. SALES is a trustee of BOSTON and has Browse and Create
 object rights to BOSTON. SALES inherits these rights for every object below
 BOSTON, including RESEARCH.
 RESEARCH doesn't want anyone to create objects in their part of the Directory
 tree. RESEARCH adds an Inherited Rights Filter that includes only the Browse
 right. This means that no one (including SALES) can inherit the Create right
 in  RESEARCH, but SALES still inherits the Browse right.
 User ANDREW is a trustee of server CentralStation under RESEARCH and has the
 Supervisor right. This trustee assignment bypasses the Inherited Rights Filter
 and gives ANDREW the Create right.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 99. Add Object Trustees button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add Trustee button


 Adds a new trustee to the "Trustees" list for this object. The new trustee is
 chosen from the Select Object dialog and given specific rights that override
 the Inherited Rights Filter.
 Note: If you have only the Add Self property right to the ACL property, your
 User object will be added as a trustee when you choose "Add Trustee"; the
 "Select Object" dialog will not appear.
 You can add as many trustees as you need. You must have at least the Write
 property right on the object's ACL property to add trustees to it.
 Define trustees as high as possible in the Directory tree. The fewer trustee
 assignments you use, the easier it is to determine where an object's inherited
 rights came from.
 Example: Users in the SEATTLE Organizational Unit need rights to a Profile.
 Rather than make each user a trustee of the Profile, make SEATTLE a trustee of
 the Profile. Each user will have the same rights as SEATTLE. (If a user needs
 more rights to manage the Profile, that user can be listed as a separate
 trustee of the Profile.)
 To grant a set of rights to a group of users who don't share a common
 container, use a Group object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 100. Delete Object Trustee button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete Trustee Button


 Deletes a trustee from the "Trustees" list.You must have at least the Write
 property right on the object's ACL property to delete its trustees.
 An object that does not appear in the "Trustees" list will only have rights to
 this object by inheriting them from objects higher in the Directory tree, by
 security equivalence (for user objects only), or by membership in a Group
 object that is a trustee of this object.
 Note: If you have only the Add Self property right to the ACL property of this
 object, "Delete trustee" will only be available when your User object is
 selected from the list of trustees.
 If a trustee is the only trustee of this object with the Supervisor object
 right and the Inherited Rights Filter blocks the Supervisor object right, the
 trustee cannot be deleted. This attempts to prevent cutting off
 supervisor-level access to part of the Directory tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 101. Object Rights of a Container Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Rights of a Container Object


 Object rights determine what a trustee can do to an object. They affect the
 object as a whole in the Browser. They do not grant any rights to see or
 change  the properties of the object.
 Example: With the Delete Object right, a user can remove an object from the
 Directory database so that it no longer exists.
 Object rights of container objects

    Supervisor
    Browse
    Create
    Delete
    Rename


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 102. Object Rights of a Leaf Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Rights of a Leaf Object


 Object rights determine what a trustee can do to an object. They affect the
 object as a whole in the Browser. They do not grant any rights to see or
 change  the properties of the object.
 Note: The Create object right is not used for leaf objects because you cannot
 create an object under a leaf object.
 Example: With the Delete object right, a user can remove an object from the
 Directory database so that it no longer exists.
 Object rights of leaf objects

    Supervisor
    Browse
    Delete
    Rename


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 103. Property Rights list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Property rights


 Property rights determine what a trustee can do with the properties of an
 object.
 There are two ways to assign property rights:
 All Properties rights define rights for this trustee that are the same for
 every property of the selected object. These rights control all properties
 unless rights are granted for a specific property as well.
 Selected Property rights define rights for this trustee for one property of an
 object. These rights, if assigned, override the "All Properties" rights of the
 object for only that specific property.
 Example: A User has the Read right to all properties of a Directory Map object
 that points to an application. The User needs to change the location of the
 application in the Directory Map. Therefore the User is granted the Supervisor
 property right to the Path property of the Directory Map.
 Property rights

    Supervisor
    Compare
    Read
    Write
    Add (or Delete) Self


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 104. Trustees of Files and Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trustees of this File or Directory


 The "Trustees of this File" and "Trustees of this Directory" pages list
 trustees of this file or directory and their rights. When you select a trustee
 from the list, that trustee's rights to this file or directory appear below.
 Note: The "Trustees" list does not list objects who are trustees of
 directories  above this point who inherit rights to this file or directory. To
 check for  those objects, choose "Effective Rights."
 To close the "Trustees of this File [Directory]" dialog and save changes,
 choose "OK."
 To close the "Trustees of this File [Directory]" dialog without saving
 changes,  choose "Cancel."

 Procedures
    Add a Trustee
    Delete a Trustee
    View or Change the File and Directory Rights of a Trustee
    See the Effective Rights of a Trustee
    View or Change the Inherited Rights Filter

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Trustees" lists all trustees for the file or directory.

    "Add Trustee..."  allows you to add a new trustee.

    "Delete Trustee" deletes the selected trustee.

    "Access rights" allows you to see and change a trustee's access rights.

    "Effective rights..." shows the rights that any object can use to access
       this file  or directory.

    "Inherited Rights Filter" allows you to see and change the Inherited Rights
       Filter  of this file or directory.

    "OK" saves changes and closes the dialog.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without saving changes.

 Related topic

    Trustees of this Object and Rights to Other Objects




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 105. Trustees Page for Files and Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trustees of this File or Directory


 The "Trustees of this File" and "Trustees of this Directory" pages show
 trustees of the file or directory you selected. You can
 -  See who is a trustee of this file or directory
 -  Change a trustee's rights to this file or directory
 Note: The "Trustees" list does not show Users who are trustees of directories
 above this point who inherit rights to this file or directory. To check for
 those objects, choose "Effective Rights."
 Do not choose "Cancel" unless you want to loss all changes to every page of
 the  dialog.

 Procedures
    Using this Dialog
    Add a Trustee
    Delete a Trustee
    View or Change the File and Directory Rights of a Trustee
    See the Effective Rights of a Trustee
    View or Change the Inherited Rights Filter

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Trustees" lists all trustees for the file or directory.

    "Add Trustee..."  allows you to add a new trustee.

    "Delete Trustee" deletes a trustee.

    "Access rights" allows you to see and change a trustee's access rights.

    "Effective rights..." shows the rights that any object can use to access
       this file  or directory.

    "Inherited Rights Filter" allows you to view or change the Inherited Rights
       Filter  of this file or directory.

    "OK" saves changes and closes the dialog.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without saving changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 106. Add a Trustee for a File or Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Trustee to a File or Directory


 1. Choose "Add Trustee...."
    You must have the Access Control right to the file or directory to add a
    trustee.
 2. Specify the objects you want to add to the list of trustees for this file
    or  directory.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The objects that you selected are added to the "Trustees" list.
 Note: To grant rights to the trustee to work with this file or directory, use
 the "Access Rights" check boxes below the "Trustees" list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 107. Delete a Trustee of a File or Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Trustee of a File or Directory


 1. From the "Trustees" list, select the trustee you want to delete.
 2. Choose "Delete Trustee."
    You must have the Access Control right to the file or directory to delete a
    trustee.
 3. Choose "Yes."
 Note: The object that you deleted from the "Trustees" list will only have
 rights to this directory or file by inheriting them from a directory above
 this  directory or file, or by membership in a group that is a trustee of this
 directory or file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 108. Modify the Inherited Rights Filter of a File or Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change the Inherited Rights Filter of a File or Directory


 1. Select the check box next to each right that you want to change in the
    "Inheritance Filter" list.
    If the boxes are grey, no Inherited Rights Filter exists for this file or
       directory. All rights can be inherited.
    If a box is not marked, that right cannot be inherited.
    If a box is marked (X), that right can be inherited.
 2. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.
 Related topic

    More about the Inherited Rights Filter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 109. Modify the File and Directory Rights of a Trustee ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Trustee's File or Directory Rights


 1. Select a trustee from the "Trustees" list.
    Note: You can select multiple trustees by holding down the <Ctrl> or
    <Shift>  key while selecting trustees.
    Access Rights with a checkmark (X) denote rights that have been granted to
    the trustee.
 2. Choose the box next to any access right that you want to change.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.
 If any check boxes are gray, one of the following conditions exists:
 -  No trustee is selected. Select a trustee from the list.
 -  Rights are undefined. No rights are granted.
 -  Two or more trustees with different rights have been selected. Select only
    one trustee or change the check box to change that right for all selected
    trustees.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 110. See an Object's Effective Rights to a Directory or File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See an object's Effective Rights to this File or Directory


 You can see an object's effective rights to this file or directory only if:
 -  You have the access control right on the file or directory
 -  The file or directory is on a volume that uses NetWare v4.0
 For an object that is a trustee of this directory or file

 1. From the "Trustees" list, select a trustee.
 2. Choose "Effective Rights..."
 3. The effective rights of the trustee that you selected are shown below the
    "Trustee" field.
    Effective rights are bold. Non-effective rights are grayed.
 4. Choose "Close."
    You return to the "Trustees of this FIle [Directory]" dialog.
 For an object that is not a trustee of this directory or file

 1. Choose "Effective Rights..."
 2. Choose the "Browser" icon.
 3. Select an object.
    Note: To see a User's effective rights, you must manage that user (have at
    least the Write property right to that User's ACL property.)
 4. The effective rights of the object that you selected are shown below the
    "Trustee" field.
    Effective rights are bold. Non-effective rights are grayed.
 5. Choose "Close."
    You return to the "Trustees of this File [Directory]" dialog.

 Note: If you make changes to the "Trustees of this File [Directory]" dialog,
 they will not be effective until you return to the Browser. When you return to
 the "Trustees of this File [Directory]" dialog, any previous changes are
 reflected in "Effective Rights."
 Related topic

    More about Effective Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 111. Trustees List box for Files and Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trustees List Box for File and Directories


 Lists all objects that have rights granted to this file or directory.
 Objects that are not listed in the "Trustees" list can still have effective
 rights to this file or directory. They must get rights through
 -  Inheritance
 -  Equivalence to another object (such as a Group) that is a trustee
 Related topic

    More about the Inherited Rights Filter
    More about Effective Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 112. Add File or Directory Trustee button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add Trustee Button


 Adds a new trustee to the "Trustees" list for this file or directory. The new
 trustee is given specific rights that override the Inherited Rights Filter.
 You can add as many trustees as you need. You must have the Access Control
 right to a file or directory to add trustees.
 Define trustees as close to the root directory as possible. The fewer trustee
 assignments you use, the easier it is to determine where someone's inherited
 rights come from.
 Example: Users in the SEATTLE Organizational Unit need rights to the REPORTS
 directory. Rather than make each user a trustee of REPORTS, make SEATTLE a
 trustee of it. Each user will have the same rights as SEATTLE. (If a user
 needs  more rights to work in REPORTS, that user can be listed as a separate
 trustee  of the directory.)
 To grant a set of rights to a group of users who don't share a common
 container, use a Group object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 113. Delete a File or Directory Trustee button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a File or Directory Trustee Button


 Deletes a trustee from the "Trustees" list. An object that does not appear on
 the "Trustees" list will only have rights to this file or directory by
 inheriting them from a parent directory, or through group membership.
 You must have the Access Control right to a file or directory to delete its
 trustees.
 Note: To determine if you have Access Control rights, select the file or
 directory and choose Details from the Object menu. Choose "Trustees of this
 File" and then "Effective Rights." Select your User object to see your
 effective rights to the file or directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 114. Access Rights for Files and Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File and Directory Rights


 File and Directory rights determine what a trustee can do with a file or
 directory. Each right can be assigned separately to each trustee.
    Supervisor
    Read
    Write
    Create
    Erase
    Modify
    File Scan
    Access Control



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 115. Trustee Paths of an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rights to Other Objects


 The "Rights to Other Objects" option shows
 -  Objects that this object is a trustee of, and
 -  Rights this object has to those objects.
 When you select an object from the "Assigned Objects" list, the rights
 included  in the trustee assignment to that object appear below the list box.
 Note: The "Assigned Objects" list only lists objects for which an explicit
 trustee assignment exists for the object you selected. It does not list all
 objects that the object inherits rights to. To see rights to other objects,
 choose "Effective Rights."
 To close the "Rights to Other Objects" dialog and save changes, choose "OK."
 To close the "Rights to Other Objects" dialog without saving changes, choose
 "Cancel."

 Procedures
    Add a Trustee Assignment
    Delete a Trustee Assignment
    See the Effective Rights to Any Object
    Change the Object Rights to an Object
    Change the Property Rights to an Object

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Assigned Objects" lists all objects that this object has a trustee
       assignment to.

    "Effective rights" are the actual rights that this object has to any
       object. You can  also use this button to view the effective rights of
       other objects on the  current object.

    "Add Assignment..." grants this object a new trustee assignment to another
       object.

    "Delete Assignment" deletes a trustee assignment to another object from the
       "Assigned Objects" list.

    "Object Rights" let you see and change the object rights to the object
       selected  in the "Assigned Objects" list.

    "Property Rights" let you see and change the property rights to the object
       selected  in the "Assigned Objects" list.

    "Clear" resets all rights in the list to undefined (gray) for the selected
       object. Checked boxes show rights that are granted; Unchecked boxes show
       rights  that are not granted.

    "OK" saves changes and closes the dialog.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without saving changes.

 Related Topics

    Trustees of this Object and Rights to Other Objects

    Trustees of the Root Object in the Directory Tree


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 116. Select a Context for RIghts to Other Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set the Context for this "Rights to Other Objects" Dialog


 Use this dialog to limit the part of the tree for which this object's trustee
 assignments are shown. Every object under the container that you select will
 be  searched for this object's rights to other objects (trustee assignments).
 The  smaller a section of the Directory tree you select, the quicker the
 dialog will  appear.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 117. Add a Trustee Assignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Trustee Assignment


 1. Choose "Add Assignment...."
    You must have at least the Write property right to the ACL property of the
    object that you want to add to the "Assigned Objects" list.
 2. Select which objects you want to grant this object rights to.
    Example: To allow User John to use a Profile during login, view the "Rights
    to Other Objects" for User John, and add Profile to the "Assigned Objects"
    list. Then grant Browse object right and Read All Properties right. John
    can  now use the Profile.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The objects that you selected are added to the "Assigned Objects" list.
    To grant rights to the new Assigned Object, select the check boxes below
    the  "Assigned Objects" list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 118. Delete a Trustee Assignment Procedure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Trustee Assignment


 1. Select the object that you want to delete from the "Assigned Objects" list.
 2. Choose "Delete assignment."
    You must have at least the Write property right to the ACL property of the
    object that you want to remove from the "Assigned Objects" list.
 3. Choose "Yes."
    This object will only have rights to the object that you delete from the
    list by inheriting rights from other objects that are trustees, such as
    through  membership in a Group that is a trustee of the deleted object.
 You cannot delete a trustee assignment to an object if
 -  It is the only trustee of this object with Supervisor object right, and
 -  The object's Inherited Rights Filter blocks the Supervisor object right.
 You must first grant another trustee the Supervisor object right, or make sure
 the Inherited Rights Filter doesn't block the Supervisor object right. This
 prevents you from cutting off Supervisor-level access to part of the Directory
 tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 119. See Selected Object's Effective Rights to any Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See this Object's Effective Rights to Another Object


 To an object that is listed in the "Assigned Objects" list box

 1. Select one object from the "Assigned Objects" list.
 2. Choose "Effective rights..."
    This object's effective rights to the object you selected are shown below
    the "Object name" field.
    Effective rights are bold. Non-effective rights are grayed.
    Choose a property from the "Properties" list to see effective rights to
    specific properties.
 3. Choose "Close."
    You return to the "Rights to Other Objects" dialog.
 To an object that is not listed in the "Assigned Objects" list box

 1. Choose "Effective rights..."
 2. Choose the "Browser" icon.
 3. Select an object.
 4. Choose "OK."
    This object's effective rights to the object you selected are shown below
    the "Object name" field.
    Effective rights are bold. Non-effective rights are grayed.
    Choose a property from the "Properties" list to see effective rights to
    specific properties.
 5. Choose "Close."
    You return to the "Rights to Other Objects" dialog.

 Note: If you make changes to the "Rights to Other Objects" dialog, they are
 not  reflected in "Effective Rights" until you have exited the "Rights to
 Other  Objects" dialog with "OK." When you return to the "Rights to Other
 Objects"  dialog, any previous changes are reflected in "Effective Rights."

 More about Effective Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 120. Change the Selected Object's Object Rights to any object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change this Object's Object Rights to an Object


 1. Select an object from the "Assigned Objects" list.
    Note: You can select multiple objects by holding down the <Ctrl> or <Shift>
    keys. If an object is grayed, you do not have rights to change the trustee
    assignment.
    Object Rights with a checkmark (X) denote rights that are granted to the
    objects.
 2. Select the check box next to any object right that you want to change.
    Note: If the Supervisor right is granted to this object, you cannot remove
    it unless some other trustee also has the Supervisor right to this object,
    or  the Inherited Rights Filter allows other objects to inherit the
    Supervisor  right.
 3. To reset all object rights to undefined, choose "Clear".
    If you clear these rights, and no other rights are granted, the selected
    trustee is deleted from the list of trustees.
    Note: No rights in that list are granted, but they can be inherited if the
    Inherited Rights Filter of the object you selected in the list allows them.
 4. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.
 If any check boxes are gray, one of the following conditions exists:
 -  No object is selected. Select an object from the list.
 -  Rights are undefined. These rights are not granted to this object.
 -  Two or more objects have been selected, and this object has different
    rights  to each. Select only one object or change the check box to change
    that right to  all selected objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 121. Change Assigned Property Rights to an object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change this Object's Property Rights to an Object


 You can define property rights to an object in two ways:
 All Property rights define rights to the assigned object that are the same for
 every property of the object. These rights control all properties unless
 rights  are granted for a specific property as well.
 Selected Properties rights define rights to the assigned object for one
 property of an object. These rights, if granted, override the All Property
 rights to the object for only that specific property.
 Example: All the properties of a Printer object are Read only, but this object
 needs to update the Cartridges property. To allow this object to update the
 Cartridges property, select "Selected Properties;" then grant the Write right
 for the Cartridge property.
 Property Rights

    Supervisor
    Compare
    Read
    Write
    Add (or Delete) Self


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 122. Change the All Property Rights Assigned to an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change All Property Rights to an Object


 1. Select an object from the "Assigned Objects" list.
    Note: You can select multiple objects by holding down the <Ctrl> or <Shift>
    keys.
    Property Rights with a checkmark (X) denote rights that the object selected
    in the Browser is granted to the object in the "Assigned objects" list.
 2. Choose "All Properties."
    The properties listed in the "Properties" list box are grayed. The rights
    you choose apply to all properties that do not have specific rights defined
    (see Change Specific Property Rights).
 3. Select the check box next to any property right that you want to change.
    These rights apply to every property of this object that does not have
    specific rights defined as well.
 4. To reset All Property rights to undefined, choose "Clear".
    Rights can still be inherited if the Inherited Rights Filter of the object
    allows them.
    If you clear these rights, and no other rights are granted, the selected
    trustee is deleted from the list of trustees.
 5. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.
 Note: In most cases, this object will have the All Property Read right to the
 Assigned Object. This allows this object to see the values in all properties
 of  the assigned object.
 If any check boxes are gray, one of the following conditions exists:
 -  No Assigned object is selected. Select an object from the list.
 -  Rights are undefined. No rights are granted.
 -  Two or more objects have been selected, and this object has different
    rights  granted for each. Select only one object or change the checkbox to
    change that  right for the trustee assignment to all selected objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 123. Change the Selected Property Rights of a Trustee Assignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Selected Property Rights to an Object


 1. Select an object from the "Assigned Object" list.
    Note: You can select multiple objects by holding down the <Ctrl> or <Shift>
    key.
 2. Choose the "Selected Properties" radio button.
 3. Select a property from "Properties" list.
    The list box shows all possible properties. Properties in the list that
    have  rights granted are black; others are gray.
    If you select a property that is not a part of the assigned object, the
    rights shown have no meaning.
    The Property Rights show rights granted to the assigned object for this
    property.
 4. Select the check box next to any property right that you want to change.
 5. To reset Selected Property rights for the selected property to undefined,
    choose "Clear".
    Rights will not be granted to the selected property. All Property rights to
    the assigned object will apply to the selected property.
    If you clear these rights, and no other rights are granted, the selected
    trustee is deleted from the list of trustees.
 6. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.
 Example: A User has Read rights to all properties of a Directory Map object
 that points to an application. The User needs to change the location of the
 application in the Directory Map, and is granted the Supervisor property right
 to the Path property of the Directory Map.
 If any check boxes are gray, one of the following conditions exists:
 -  No property is selected. Select a property from the list.
 -  Rights are undefined. No rights are granted.
 -  Two or more properties with different rights have been selected. Select
    only  one property or change the check box to change that right for all
    selected  properties.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 124. Assigned Objects list box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Assigned Objects List Box


 Lists all objects that this object has a trustee assignment to. If an object
 is  grayed, you do not have rights to change the trustee assignment.
 This object can still have effective rights to objects that are not listed in
 the "Assigned Objects" list. These rights come from
 -  Inheritance
 -  Equivalence to another object (such as a Group) that is a trustee of this
    object.
 To see what rights make up this object's trustee assignment to the assigned
 object, select that object in the list. You can change the check boxes to
 change the rights to that object.
 More about Effective Rights
 Example: SALES, an Organizational Unit (under Organization BOSTON), has been
 added to the Trustee list of BOSTON and granted Browse and Create rights.
 SALES  inherits these two rights for every object below BOSTON in the
 Directory tree.
 But RESEARCH, another Organizational Unit in the same tree as SALES (under
 BOSTON), doesn't want anyone creating objects in their part of the Directory
 tree: So RESEARCH adds an Inherited Rights Filter with only the Browse right
 checked. Now no one can inherit the Create right in RESEARCH, but SALES still
 inherits the Browse right.
 But, User JOHN, who is under SALES, services one particular server under
 RESEARCH, so the administrator of RESEARCH adds JOHN to the Trustee List of
 server CentralStation with Supervisor right.  Now he can do anything he needs
 to on that server. (This explicit trustee assignment to the server object
 bypasses the Inherited Rights Filter.)



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 125. Add Assignment button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add Assignment Button


 Grants a new trustee assignment to an object and adds that object to the
 "Assigned Objects" list.
 You can add as many trustee assignments as you need. You must have at least
 the  Write property right to the ACL property of any object that you want to
 add to  the "Assigned Objects" list.
 Define trustee assignments as high as possible in the Directory tree. The
 fewer  trustee assignments you use, the easier it is to determine where an
 object's  inherited rights came from.
 Example: Users in the SEATTLE Organizational Unit need rights to the printer.
 Rather than make each user a trustee of the printer, make SEATTLE a trustee of
 the printer. Each user will have the same rights as SEATTLE. (If a user needs
 more rights to manage the printer, that user can be listed as a separate
 trustee of the printer.)
 To grant a set of rights to a group of users who don't share a common
 container, use a Group object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 126. Delete Assignment button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete Assignment Button


 Deletes an object from the "Assigned Objects" list.You must have at least the
 Write property right to the ACL property of any object that you want to remove
 from the "Assigned Objects" list.
 If this object is the only trustee of the assigned object with the Supervisor
 object right and the Inherited Rights Filter of the assigned object blocks the
 Supervisor object right, the trustee cannot be deleted. This prevents cutting
 off Supervisor-level access to part of the Directory tree.
 This object can still have rights to an object that does not appear in the
 "Assigned Object" list, by
 -  Inheriting them from objects higher in the Directory tree,
 -  Security equivalence (for user objects only), or
 -  Membership in a Group object that is a trustee of this object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 127. List of Object Rights to an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Rights to an Object in the Assigned Objects List


 Object rights determine what a trustee can do to an object. They do not grant
 any rights to see or change the properties of the object.
 When you select an object in the "Assigned Objects" list, this object's rights
 to the object that you selected are shown as checked in the list of object
 rights.
 Example: With the Delete object right, a user can remove an object from the
 Directory tree so that it no longer exists.
 Object Rights to Container Objects

    Browse
    Create
    Delete
    Rename
    Supervisor
 Object Rights to Leaf Objects

    Browse
    Delete
    Rename
    Supervisor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 128. List of Assigned Property Rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Property Rights to an Object


 Property rights determine what a trustee can do with the properties of an
 object.
 When you select an object in the "Assigned Objects" list, this object's
 property rights are shown as checked in the list of property rights.
 Example: With the Write right for All Properties, a user can add or change the
 values of any property.
 There are two ways to assign property rights
 All Property rights define this object's rights to the assigned object that
 are  the same for every property of the object. These rights control all
 properties  unless rights are granted for a specific property as well.
 Selected Property rights define this object's rights to the assigned object
 for  one property of the object. These rights, if assigned, override the All
 Property rights to the object for only that specific property.
 Example: A User has Read rights to all properties of a Directory Map object
 that points to an application. The User needs to change the location of the
 application in the Directory Map, and is granted the Supervisor property right
 to the Path property of the Directory Map.
 Property Rights

    Supervisor
    Compare
    Read
    Write
    Add (or Delete) Self


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 129. Managing a Bindery Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Manage a Bindery Object


 This object was created in the Directory tree by an upgrade or migration
 utility. It can't be converted to a standard Directory Services object.
 You can't view or change information about this object. To manage this object,
 refer to the utility that created it.
 If this object was upgraded from a previous version of NetWare, you may be
 able  to manage this object using utilities from that version of NetWare by
 setting  the Bindery Emulation Context to include this object.
 You can delete this object from the Directory tree.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 130. View or Change a User Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a User Object


 The "Identification" page describes this User object. You can use this page to
 store information such as
 -  Additional names for the User
 -  Where the User is located
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Title for this User
    Enter a Fax or Telephone Number for this User
    Enter a Description of this User

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Login name" shows the name the User enters to log in to the network.

     opens a dialog where you can enter more values for a field.

    "Last name" shows the User's last name.

    "Other name" lists other names associated with this User.

    "Title" shows the position or function of the User.

    "Description" describes the function the User performs.

    "Location" shows the User's physical location (such as a mail stop).

    "Department" shows the User's department or division.

    "Telephone" lists the User's telephone numbers.

    "Fax Number" lists the telephone numbers of fax machines available to the
       User.

    "E-mail Address" lists the user's MHS address (or other E-mail ID).

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 131. Entering Other Names for a User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using Other Names for a User


 The "Other name" field can contain identification information that helps you
 search for and identify specific users.
 Example: You frequently need to search for employees who have been hired after
 a certain date. To facilitate the search, include the employee's date of hire
 in the "Other name" field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 132. Security Equivalents of a user ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change Security Equivalences


 The "Security Equivalences" page shows objects that this user is security
 equivalent to. This means that any rights granted to the objects listed on
 this  page are also granted to this user. For example, you can
 -  See which objects this user is security equivalences to
 -  Add or delete objects from the list of security equivalent objects
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to the
 pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page of this
 dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add an Object to the List of Security Equivalences
    Delete an Object from the List of Security Equivalences
    See which Objects This User is Security Equivalent to That Are Not Listed

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Security Equal To" shows all objects that this user is security equivalent
       to.

    "Add" lets you add an object to the list of security equivalent objects.

    "Delete" lets you delete an object from the list of security equivalent
       objects.

    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of the dialog and returns you
       to  the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without saving the changes entered in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 133. Security Equivalents of a user-add an object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add an Object to the List of Security Equivalences


 Note: Some objects are added to the Security equivalences list of a user by
 NetWare when you perform other actions. For example, when you make a User a
 member of a Group, the Group is added to the Security equivalences list of the
 User, to give the user the same effective rights as the Group.
 1. Choose "Add."
 2. Select an object that you want to add to the list of security equivalent
    objects.
    The object is added to the list This object will have the same effective
    rights as any object listed in the "Security Equals To" list.
 Note: Every object is security equivalent to all of the objects in its
 complete  name, that is, all of the objects directly above it to the root of
 the  Directory tree. This security equivalence cannot be changed, but none of
 those  objects are listed in the Security Equivalences list.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 134. Security Equivalents of a user-delete an object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete an Object from the List of Security Equivalences


 1. Select an object from the "Security Equal To" list.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The object is deleted from the list of security equivalent objects.
 Note: This user no longer automatically has the same effective rights as the
 object that was deleted. The user might still have the same rights, but they
 must come from the user's own trustee assignments or from a security
 equivalent  object that was not deleted.
 Note: Every object is security equivalent to all of the objects in its
 complete  name, that is, all of the objects directly above it to the root of
 the  Directory tree. This security equivalence cannot be changed, but none of
 those  objects are listed in the Security Equivalences list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 135. Security Equivalents of a user-that are not listed in the object dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See which Objects This User is Security Equivalent to That Are Not Listed


 Every User is always security equivalent to every container that is directly
 above it in the Directory tree, even though these objects are not listed in
 the  Security Equivalences list. Here is one simple way to see a user's
 complete  name, which shows all of the containers that the user is security
 equivalent to  that are not listed on the Security Equivalences page.
 1. From the Security Equivalences page, choose "Add."
 2. Use the Select Object dialog to locate the User object in the Directory
    tree.
    The context of the user appears at the top of the Select Object dialog. The
    User is security equivalent to every container listed.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 136. Security Equivalents of a user-List of objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Security Equal To List


 This lists objects that this user is security equivalent to.
 Note: Every object is security equivalent to all of the objects in its
 complete name, that is, all of the objects directly above it to the root of
 the  Directory tree. This security equivalence cannot be changed, but none of
 those  objects are listed in the Security Equivalences list.
 The "Security Equal To" list can contain objects of different types. A user
 might be security equivalent to
 -  A Group object as part of a group
 -  A user who is on vacation
 -  A user who is acting as a supervisor
 Some objects, such as Group, are automatically placed in the "Security Equal
 To" list because of other operations that you perform.
 Example: When you add a user to the membership list of a Group object, the
 name  of that Group is automatically put in the "Security Equal To" list of
 that user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 137. Security Equivalents of a user-Add button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add Button


 Choose this button to add an object to the "Security Equal To" list. All
 effective rights for every object in the security equivalences list are added
 to the effective rights of this user.
 You can use this feature to temporarily access another user's files.
 Note: You must have the Write or Supervisor right to the Security Equals
 property of a User object (even your own) to add objects to the "Security
 Equivalences" list.
 Some objects are automatically placed in this list because of other actions
 that you perform.
 Example: When you add a user to the membership list of a Group object, the
 name  of that Group is automatically placed in the "Security Equivalences"
 list of  that user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 138. Security Equivalents of a user-delete button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete Button


 Use this button to delete an object from the "Security Equal To" list.
 This user will no longer automatically have all rights that the deleted object
 has. This user might still have all of the same rights, but they must come
 from  the user's own trustee assignments or from other objects that are still
 in the  "Security Equal To" list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 139. Set a User's Network Address Restrictions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set a User's Network Address Restrictions


 The "Net Address Restrictions" page determines which workstations a user can
 log in from by specifying the network addresses of those workstations. If no
 addresses are listed, there are no restrictions and the user can log in from
 any workstation. For example, you can
 -  Specify addresses the user can log in from
 -  Add or delete addresses from the list
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a Network Address
    Delete a Network Address

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Network Protocol" lists the protocol you have selected for the new
       address.  Complete the fields with values appropriate for the protocol
       you use.

    "Add..." lets you add another network address to the list. If you leave the
       protocol fields filled with F's or 255's, this User can log in from any
       address  using that protocol.

    "Delete" removes the network address from the list.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 140. Set User Login Restrictions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Login Restrictions


 The "Login Restrictions" page allows you to restrict how this User can use the
 network. For example, you can
 -  Disable this User's account
 -  Set a date for this User's account to expire
 -  Limit the number of workstations that the User can log in from
    simultaneously
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 pages. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every  page of the dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Disable this User's Account
    Set an Expiration Date for this User's Account
    See when this User Last Logged In
    Limit this User's Concurrent Connections (Logins)

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Account disabled" prevents the User from logging in.

    "Account has expiration date" allows you to set an expiration date for this
       account.

    "Expiration date and time" sets the date and time this User's account
       expires.

    "Limit concurrent connections" allows you to limit the number of
       workstations  that the User can log in from simultaneously.

    "Maximum connections" defines the maximum number of workstations that this
       User  can be logged in.

    "Last login" shows the date and time the User last logged in.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 141. Disable a User's Account ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Disable this User's Account


 1. Select the "Account Disabled" checkbox.
    This user cannot log in until the checkbox has been cleared.
 Note: Some network condition will cause the user's account to be disabled
 without you specifically selecting the checkbox. Examples include when the
 account expires, when an intruder is detected, or when the user's account
 balance drops below the allowable credit limit.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 142. Set an Expiration Date for this User's Account ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set an Expiration Date for this User's Account


 1. Select the checkbox "Account has expiration date."
    The other fields will not be editable until you select this checkbox. You
    can de-select this checkbox at any time to remove the expiration date from
    a user's account.
 2. Use the keyboard or mouse with the arrows next to the date and time
    sections of the "Expiration date and time" fields to set the date and time
    that this  user's account expires.
    When that date and time are reached, the user will be logged out, and the
    account will be locked. The user will not be able to log in again until a
    network administrator unlocks the account and resets the expiration date.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 143. Limit this User's Concurrent Connections (Logins) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Login Restrictions


 1. Select the checkbox "Limit Concurrent Connections."
    The "Maximum Connections" field will not be editable until you select this
    checkbox. You can de-select this checkbox at any time to allow unlimited
    concurrent connections to this user.
 2. Enter the maximum number of workstations that you want this user to be able
    to log in from at the same time in the "Maximum Connections" field.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 144. See When a User Last Logged In to the Network ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See When this User Last Logged In


 1. Look at the "Last login" field.
    This shows the date and time that this user last logged into the network.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 145. Set Password Restrictions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Password Restrictions


 The "Password Restrictions" page controls how passwords for this User are
 handled. For example, you can specify
 -  Whether the User can change his or her own password
 -  How many grace logins are allowed after the User's password expires
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Change this User's Password
    Require a Password for this User
    Limit this User's Grace Logins
    Set a Minimum Password Length
    Force Periodic Password Changes

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Allow user to change password" lets this User change his or her own
       password.

    "Change password" changes this User's password.

    "Require a password" requires a User to enter a password.

    "Minimum password length" specifies the minimum number of characters
       required for  the password.

    "Force periodic password changes" requires that passwords be changed at
       regular  intervals.

    "Days between forced changes" specifies the number of days a password can
       be  used.

    "Expiration date and time" displays the password expiration.

    "Require Unique Passwords" requires passwords to be unique. NetWare stores
       this  User's previous eight passwords and does not allow them to be used
       again.

    "Limit grace logins" allows you to limit the number of times an expired
       password  can be used.

    "Grace logins allowed" specifies the number of times an expired password
       can be  used.

    "Remaining grace logins" shows how many grace logins are left.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 146. Change a User's Password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a Password


 Make sure a password exists for objects like Users and Print Servers. Security
 could be compromised if someone were able to gain unauthorized access as a
 User  or Print Server and take advantage of their security equivalences.

 To change a password
 1. Type the old password in the "Old password" field.
 2. Type the new password in the "New password" field.
    Only alphanumeric characters and underscores (_) are valid. The password is
    not case-sensitive.
 3. Type the new password again in the "Retype new password" field.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Old password" is where you enter the current password.

    "New password" is where you enter the new password.

    "Retype new password" is where you enter the new password a second time.

    "OK" changes the password.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without changing the password.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 147. Require a Password for a User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Require a Password for this User


 1. Select the "Require a Password" checkbox.
    All of the password restriction options below the checkbox turn from gray
    to  black. A password must be entered by this user when logging in.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 148. Limit the Grace Logins Allowed for a User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Limit this User's Grace Logins


 1. Select the "Limit Grace Logins" checkbox.
    The "Require a Password" checkbox must be selected, or the other options
    described here will be grayed.
 2. Enter the number of grace logins in the "Grace Logins Allowed."
    This should be a number from zero to 50. One grace login is used each time
    that the user logs in using a password that has expired without accepting
    the  prompt to enter a new password. If all grace logins are used without
    changing  the expired password, the user's account is locked because of an
    expired  password until a network administrator unlocks it.
 3. If the user's password has expired and the user has begun to user grace
    logins and not changed the password, the number of grace logins remaining
    is shown in the "Remaining grace logins" field.
    You cannot change this field.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 149. Set a Minimum Password Length for a User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set a Minimum Password Length for this User


    Enter a value in the "Minimum password length" field.
    The "Require a password" checkbox must be selected, or the other fields
    will  be grayed.
    You can enter values from 5 to 30 in the "Minimum password length" field.
    If  you enter a value above 11, users cannot log in from Macintosh
    workstations.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 150. Force Periodic Password Changes for a User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Force Periodic Password Changes for this User


 1. Select the "Force periodic password changes" checkbox.
    The "Require a Password" checkbox must be selected or the other fields
    described will be grayed.
 2. Enter the number of days that each new password should last in the "Days
    between forced changes" field.
    After this many days, a new password must be entered or the account will be
    disabled (after any grace logins are used.)
    If you have previously selected "Force periodic password changes," the
    "Expiration date and time" field shows when the current password must be
    changed because it expires.
 3. (Optional) If you select the "Require a unique password" checkbox, each
    newly entered password must be unique. This user's previous passwords are
    saved  and cannot be used again. This can improve network security.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 151. Restrict a User's Login Times ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restrict a User's Login Times


 The "Time Restrictions" page allows you to limit the times when this User can
 log in.
 You can restrict times in half-hour segments. White cells indicate times that
 this User can log in. Dark cells indicate times that this User can't log in.
 The default is no restrictions (all white cells).
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Restrict Login Times Using a Mouse
    Restrict Login Times Using the Keyboard

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Day and time" shows the times the User can log in.

    "Login Times" shows which cell is selected in the grid.

    "Reset" resets the grid to the default (no login restrictions).

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 152. Use the Mouse to Restrict Login Times ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restrict Login Times Using a Mouse


 To restrict times a User can log in

 1. Move the mouse pointer to the cell that represents the beginning of the
    time  period you want to restrict.
    The "Login Times" field displays the day and time that the pointer is on.
 2. Click the left mouse button and drag the pointer to select the times you
    want to restrict.
    You can select rectangular regions only. You may need to repeat these steps
    several times to select the times that you want to restrict.
    Dark cells represent times this User can't log in. If you select an area
    that is already restricted, it will become unrestricted
 3. Release the mouse button.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 153. Use Keybord to Restrict Login Times ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restrict Login Times Using the Keyboard


 To restrict times a User can log in

 1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the cell that represents the
    beginning of the time period that you want to restrict.
    The "Login Times" field displays the day and time that the pointer is on.
 2. While holding down the <Shift> key, use the arrow keys to select the times
    that you want to restrict.
    You can select rectangular regions only. You may need to repeat these steps
    several times to select the times that you want to restrict.
    Dark cells represent the times the User can't log in. If you select an area
    that is already restricted, it will become unrestricted.
 3. Release the <Shift> key.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 154. Create or Change a User's Login Script ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create or Change a User's Login Script


 The "Login Script" page lists commands that are executed when this User logs
 in  to the network. For example, you can set commands to
 -  Map drives
 -  Assign printers to this User
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Copy a Login Script from Another Location
    Edit the Login Script
    Select a Profile Object to be Used by this User

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Edit" holds login script commands.

    "Profile" accepts the complete name of a Profile object. The login script
       in this  Profile object is executed before this User's login script.

     lets you select a Profile object.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related Topics

    Login Script Commands



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 155. Select the Profile Object for a User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a Profile Script to be Used by this User


 Each User object can list one Profile object with its login script. If a
 Profile object is listed, the login script in the Profile object is executed
 before the User's login script. This provides a method for several users to
 share common login commands that are not included in the container system
 login  script.
 To select a Profile object for this User:

 1. Select the Login Script page in a User's object dialog.
 2. Select the Browser icon to the right of the "Profile" field below the
    User's  login script commands.
    The "Select Object" dialog appears.
 3. Select the Profile object whose script you want to be executed when this
    User logs in.
    The Profile object can be anywhere in the Directory tree.
 4. Choose "OK."
    The Profile object is listed in the "Profile" field of the User's Login
    Script page.
    Only one Profile can be specified for each User.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 156. Copy Login Script Commands from Another Location ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copy a Login Script from Another Location


 This procedure allows you to use commands entered for another login script or
 in any OS/2 text editor in this login script without re-typing them.
 1. While editing any login script with the NetWare Administrator, or in any
    OS/2 text editor, use the mouse or hold down the Shift key to select the
    area of text that you want to copy into this login script.
 2. When the text you want is selected, hold down the Ctrl key and press
    "Insert."
 3. Return to the "Login Script" page where you want to insert the commands
    that  you selected in step 1.
 4. Place the cursor within the login script at the location where you want the
    commands inserted.
 5. Hold down the "Shift" key and press the "Insert" key.
    The text that you selected is copied into the login script.
 6. Make any other changes as needed to the commands, as if you had typed them
    in at this point.
 7. Choose "OK."
    The login script is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 157. Edit Login Scripts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit a Login Script


 1. Place the cursor within the login script at the point where you want to
    make  changes to the login script commands.
 2. Use the arrow, delete, insert, and other keys to move and erase text.
 3. Type new text whereever it is needed. Existing text will move to make room
    for it.
 4. Choose "OK."
    Changes are not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 158. Intruder Lockout Page of a User Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Reset Intruder Lockout


 The "Intruder Lockout" page displays the status of a User's account after the
 maximum number of login attempts is exceeded. If someone enters the wrong
 password too many times, the User's account is locked. For example, this page
 shows
 -  When a User's account was locked
 -  The network address of the workstation used when a person exceeded the
    allowed login attempts
 Check the information on this page if a User can't log in. If the "Account
 locked" field isn't checked, the login problem is caused by something else.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Unlock this User's Account
    View When and Why this User's Account was Locked

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Account locked" indicates that the account is locked because an incorrect
       password was used too many times.

    "Incorrect login count" shows the number of incorrect passwords entered.

    "Account reset time" shows the time when the account will be reactivated if
       this  account is locked. If it is not locked, this field shows when the
       "Incorrect  login count" will be reset.

    "Time until reset" shows the time remaining to reset this account if it is
       locked. If it is not locked, this field shows the time remaining until
       the  "Incorrect login count" is reset.

    "Intruder address" shows the network address of the last person who entered
       a wrong  password.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 159. Unlock this User's Account ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Unlock this User's Account


 1. De-select the "Account locked" checkbox to reset the Intruder Alert lockout
    for this user.
    The user can now log in normally.
 Note: The account lock will reset automatically after the time specified in
 the  "Intruder Lockout Reset Interval," which you can set in the object dialog
 for  the container above this object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 160. View When and Why a User's Account was Locked ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View When and Why this User's Account was Locked


 1. See the "Incorrect login count" field.
    This is the number of times that someone entered the wrong password for
    this  user before being locked out.
 2. See the "Intruder address" field.
    This is the network node address of the workstation that the person was
    using who entered the incorrect passwords when trying to log in as this
    user.
 3. See the "Account reset time" field.
    This is the time of day when the account will be unlocked by NetWare. It is
    calculated from the "Intruder Lockout Reset Interval" that you set for the
    container of this object.
    The "Time until reset" field is the length of time from now until the
    "Account reset time."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 161. List the Group Memberships of a User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

List the Group Memberships of a User


 The "Group Membership" page shows the Groups that this user is a member of.
 You can change the Groups a User is a member of in the
 -  "Group Membership" page of User Object dialog
 -  "Group Members" page of the Group Object dialog
 Changes to Group memberships that you make in either dialog appear
 automatically in both dialogs. You need appropriate property rights in both
 dialogs to view or change Group memberships.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add this User as a Member of a Group
    Delete this User as a Member of a Group

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Memberships" shows the Groups that this User is a member of.

    "Add" lets you select a Group object that you want this User to be a member
       of.

    "Delete" removes this User from the Groups listed in the "Memberships" list
       box.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 162. Add a Member to a Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add this User as a Member of a Group


 1. Choose "Add."
    To add this user as a  member of a Group, you must have the Write property
    right to the Membership property of the Group, and the Write property right
    to  the ACL of both the Group object and this User object that you want to
    add as a  member. If you have the Supervisor object right to the Group and
    to the User,  these requirements are filled.
 2. Select the Group that you want to make this User a member of.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The Group is added to the list of Groups that this User is a member of.
    This  user will have the same rights that are assigned to the Group object.
 Note: The Group object is automatically listed in the Security Equivalences
 list of each User object that you add to the membership list.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 163. Delete a Member from a Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete this User as a Member of a Group


 1. Select a Group from the "Membership" list.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The Group object is deleted from the list of Groups that this User belongs
    to.
 Note: When you delete a Group from the Group memberships list of a User, the
 Group is automatically removed from the Security Equivalence property of the
 User.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 164. Set a User's Account Balance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set a User's Account Balance


 Use the "Account Balance" page to manage the credit on a User's account. For
 example, you can
 -  See how much credit this User has
 -  Allow unlimited credit for this User
 To install or remove accounting, or to change the rate charged for particular
 services, go to the NetWare Server Object dialog and choose "Accounting."
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Set this User's Account Balance
    Set a Lower Limit on this User's Credit Balance

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Account balance" shows the credit that this User has remaining.

    "Allow unlimited credit" allows this User unlimited use of network
       services.  "Account balance" is ignored.

    "Low balance limit" shows the balance at which this User is denied access
       to  network services.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 165. Set this User's Account Balance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set this User's Account Balance


 1. Enter a value in the "Account Balance" field.
    This balance will be depleted each time this User uses a network resource
    for which an accounting charge has been established. If "Allow unlimited
    credit" is not selected, the user's account will be locked when the
    "Account  Balance" drops below the "Low balance limit."
 2. Choose "OK."
    The change is not recorded until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 166. Set a Lower Limit on a User's Credit Balance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set a Lower Limit on this User's Credit Balance


    1. De-select the "Allow unlimited credit" checkbox, if it is selected.
    If this checkbox is selected, the "Account balance" and "Low balance limit"
    fields have no effect.
    2. Enter a value in the "Low balance limit" field.
    The user's account will be locked when the "Account Balance" drops below
    the  "Low balance limit." The "Account balance is depleted each time this
    User uses  a network resource for which an accounting charge has been
    established.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 167. View Other Information about a User Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View Environment Information About a User Object


 Use the "Environment" page to see other properties of this User object. For
 example, you can
 -  View property information not included in other pages of this dialog such
    as  Bindery property and Network Address
 -  See which properties did not migrate when this User was upgraded to NetWare
    v4.0
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Set this User's Language
    See Which Workstations this User is Logged in From
    Set this User's Message Server
    Set Up a Home Directory for this User

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Language" determines the language that messages are displayed in.

    "Network Address" lists the addresses of the network workstations that the
       user is  currently logged in from.

    "Default Server" is the NetWare Server that this user will try to connect
       to when  logging in.

    "Home Directory" shows the volume object and directory path of this user's
       home  directory. You can change this directory, but you cannot create a
       new directory  from here.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 168. Set this User's Language ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set this User's Language


 1. Enter a language in the "Language" field.
    This is the language that all NetWare utilities and prompts will appear in
    when this user is logged in and runs a NetWare utility.
    The language that you choose must be installed on the network.
 2. Choose "OK."
    Your entry is not recorded until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 169. See Which Workstations a User is Logged in From ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See Which Workstations this User is Logged in From


 1. See the "Network Addresses" field.
    The network addresses of all workstations that this user is currently
    logged  in from are listed. If you have a computer object in Directory
    Services for  each workstation, you can see each workstation's address to
    determine where the  user is logged in.





ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 170. Set this User's Message Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set this User's Message Server


 1. Select the Browser button to the right of the "Message Server" field.
 2. Select a NetWare server from the "Select Object" dialog.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The NetWare server that you choose is inserted into the "Default Server"
    field.
    This is the server where this user's information will be stored by default.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 171. Set Up a Home Directory for a User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Up a Home Directory for this User


 1. Select the Browser button to the right of the "Home Directory" field.
 2. Select a volume and path from the "Select Object" dialog where this user's
    home directory should be located.
 3. Choose "OK"
    The path that you selected is inserted into the "Home Directory" field.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 172. View or Change a Computer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Computer Object


 The "Identification" page describes a Computer object. For example, you can
 -  Keep a record of the department and person responsible for the Computer
    object
 -  Record information such as the computer's serial number and location
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Description for this Computer
    Enter a Serial Number for this Computer
    Enter Another Name for this Computer
    Specify One or More Servers for this Computer

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" displays the name of this Computer object.

    "Other name" lists other names of this Computer object (such as names
       previously  used for this Computer).

    "Owner" shows the name of the person who uses this Computer.

    "Description" contains information that helps identify this Computer.

    "Serial number" shows this Computer's serial number.

    "Location" shows the physical location of the computer.

    "Department" shows the group the Computer belongs to.

    "Organization" shows the organization that the Computer belongs to.

    "Server" shows the server most commonly used by this Computer.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 173. Specify One or More Servers for this Computer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Specify One or More Servers for this Computer


 1. Select the Browser button to the right of the field.
 2. Select one or more NetWare Server objects from the Select Object dialog.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The NetWare Servers that you selected are listed as servers that this
    computer regularly accessed to retrieve data about logins and Directory
    Services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 174. View or Change a Country Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Country Object


 The "Identification" page describes a Country object. You can enter the full
 name and descriptive information about this Country object in the
 "Description"  field.
 Note: "Identification" is the only page in this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Description for this Country

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" displays the two-letter country code for this country.

    "Description" shows information such as the full name of the country and a
       description  of your organization in that country.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 175. Enter a Description for this Country ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a Description for this Country


 The Description field of a Country object can be used like the Description
 field of any other object: to record any pertinent information about the
 object.
 You should include the complete name of the country in the Description field,
 because the name of the object is only a two-letter country code. Placing the
 complete name in the Description field will help avoid confusion.
 1. Select the "Description" field.
 2. Type the information that you want recorded for this object.
    The information scrolls as you type. Use the scroll bar to the right of the
    field to scroll through the text that you have entered.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 176. Identify a Group Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Group Object


 The "Identification" page describes this Group object. For example, you can
 you  store information such as
 -  Other names this Group is known by
 -  The person responsible for this Group
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Description for this Group
    Add Another Name for this Group
    Enter an Owner for this Group

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" displays the name of this Group.

    "Other name" specifies other names this Group is known by.

    "Owner" specifies the person who is responsible for this Group.

    "Description" contains information that helps identify this Group.

    "Location" shows where the Group is located.

    "Department" displays the department this Group reports to.

    "Organization" lists the company or other organization that this Group
       reports to.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 177. Enter an Owner for this Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter an Owner for this Group


 The "Owner" field is used to record the name of the individual that is
 responsible for maintaining this group of users on the network. For example,
 if  a Group is created to list all users of an accounting package, the Owner
 might  be the network administrator in the accounting department.
 1. Select the "Owner" field.
 2. Type the name of the individual that you want recorded as the owner of this
    Group object.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 178. View or Change the Members List of a Group Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change the Members of a Group Object


 The "Group Members" page lists the Users who are members of this Group.
 This Group appears in the "Memberships" page of each User that is listed on
 this page.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a Member to this Group
    Delete a Member from this Group

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Members" lists the complete name of each User object that is a member of
       this  Group.

    "Add" opens the Select Object dialog, where you select User objects to add
       as  members of this Group.

    "Delete" removes the selected Users from the "Members" list.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 179. Add a Member to this Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add  a Member to this Group


 1. Choose "Add."
    To add a member to a Group, you must have the Write property right to the
    Membership property of the Group, and the Write property right to the ACL
    of  both the Group object and each User object that you want to add as a
    member. If  you have the Supervisor object right to the Group and all
    Users, these  requirements are filled.
 2. Select Users that you want to add to the list of members.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The user is added to the membership list This user will have the same
    rights  that are assigned to the Group object.
 Note: The Group object is automatically listed in the Security Equivalences
 list of each User object that you add to the membership list.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 180. Delete a Member from this Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Member from this Group


 1. Select a User from the "Membership" list.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The User is deleted from the list of member Users.
 Note: When you delete a User from the membership list of a Group, the Group is
 automatically removed from the Security Equivalence property of the User.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 181. View or Change an Organizational Role Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change an Organizational Role Object


 The "Identification" page describes this Organizational Role object. For
 example, you can
 -  Specify which Users currently occupy the role named by this object
 -  Record information about the occupants of this position, such as their
    telephone and fax numbers.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Description for this Organizational Role
    Add Another Name for this Organizational Role
    Add a Fax or Phone Number for this Organizational Role

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" displays the name of this Organizational Role.

    "Other name" lists other names that this Organizational Role is known by.

    "Occupant" shows the User objects that currently fill this role.

    "Description" describes this Organizational Role.

    "Location" describes the location of this Occupant.

    "Department" shows the department the Occupant belongs to.

    "Telephone" lists the Occupant's telephone numbers.

    "Fax Number" lists fax numbers of this Occupant.

    "E-mail address" lists the Occupant's MHS address or other electronic mail
       ID.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 182. View or Change an Organizational Unit Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change an Organizational Unit Object


 The "Identification" page describes this Organizational Unit object. For
 example, you can
 -  Record other names this Organizational Unit is known by
 -  Describe the types of objects this Organizational Unit contains
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Description for this Organizational Unit
    Enter Another Name for this Organizational Unit

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" displays the name of this Organizational Unit.

    "Other name" shows other names of this Organizational Unit.

    "Description" describes this Organizational Unit.

    "Location" gives the location of this Organizational Unit.

    "Telephone" lists telephone numbers of people in this Organizational Unit.

    "Fax Number" stores the Fax numbers of people responsible for this
       Organizational Unit.

    "E-mail Address" lists the Organizational Unit's MHS address or other
       electronic  mail ID.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 183. View or Change Intruder Limits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change Intruder Detection


 The "Intruder Detection" page allows you to set tolerance limits and intruder
 protection. If a specified number of incorrect login attempts are detected,
 NetWare assumes that an intruder is trying to log in as that user and locks
 the  User's account. For example, you can set
 -  The number of consecutive invalid logins that will be accepted before
    activating intruder detection
 -  Whether to lock a User's account after detecting an intruder
 These limits apply to all User objects in this container.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Detect Intruders for Users in this Container
    Lock a User's Account When an Intruder is Detected
    Set How Many Incorrect Login Attempts are Allowed

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Detect intruders" allows you to track intruder login attempts and
       automatically  lock a User's account.

    "Incorrect login attempts" sets the number of incorrect login attempts
       allowed for  all User objects in this container.

    "Intruder attempt reset interval" allows you to set the length of time you
       want to  record incorrect login attempts before resetting the counter
       back to zero.

    "Days, Hours, Minutes" shows the specific length of time that a series of
       incorrect login attempts are tracked. This field is valid only if
       "Intruder  attempt reset interval" is selected.

    "Lock account after detection" locks the User's account when the specified
       number of incorrect login attempts occurs in the time designated in the
       "Days  Hours, Minutes" field.

    "Intruder lockout reset interval" allows you to set how long a User's
       account  remains locked after an intruder is detected (the incorrect
       login attempts  number is exceeded).

    "Days, Hours, Minutes" lets you set a specific length of time that the
       User's  account remains locked after an intruder is detected.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 184. Detect Intruders for Users in this Container ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Detect Intruders for Users in this Container


 1. Select the checkbox "Detect Intruders."
    All users who log in to this context will now have the Intruder Detection
    fearture, meaning that if too many incorrect login attempts are made, the
    account can be locked.
 2. Set the number of incorrect login attempts allowed and other fields as
    needed.
    The other fields will be grayed until you select the checkbox in step 1.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The changes are not recorded until you choose "OK."



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 185. Lock a User's Account When an Intruder is Detected ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Lock a User's Account When an Intruder is Detected


 1. Select the checkbox "Lock Account After Detection."
    You must select the checkbox "Detect Intruders" before this checkbox can be
    selected.
    If too many incorrect login attempts are made for any user in this
    container, the user's account will be locked.
 2. Set the "Intruder Lockout Reset Interval" and other fields as needed.
    The other fields will be grayed until you select the checkbox in step 1.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The changes are not recorded until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 186. Set How Many Incorrect Login Attempts are Allowed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set How Many Incorrect Login Attempts are Allowed


 1. Select the checkbox "Detect Intruders."
    All users who log in to this context will now have the Intruder Detection
    fearture, meaning that if too many incorrect login attempts are made, the
    account can be locked.
 2. Enter a number in the "Number of incorrect login attempts" field.
    The default value is seven. You can allow any number of incorrect attempts.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The changes are not recorded until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 187. View or Change an Organization Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change an Organization Object


 The "Identification" page describes this Organization object. For example you
 can
 -  Record other names of this Organization
 -  Describe what other objects this Organization contains
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Description for this Organization
    Enter Another Name for this Organization

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" displays the name of this Organization.

    "Other name" lists other names of this object.

    "Description" describes this Organization.

    "Location" shows the location of this Organization.

    "Telephone" lists telephone numbers of people in this Organization.

    "Fax Number" stores the Fax numbers of people in this Organization.

    "E-mail Address" lists E-mail addresses of people in this Organization.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 188. View or Change a Profile Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Profile Object


 The "Identification" page describes the Profile object. For example, you can
 -  List other names that this Profile is called
 -  View or change the description of what this Profile
 -  View or change the company name where this Profile is used
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Description for this Profile
    Enter Another Name for this Profile

 Screen Regions and Buttons
    "Name" displays the name of this Profile.

    Other name lists other names of this Profile.

    "Description" describes how this Profile is used.

    "Location" shows the location of the department or users of this Profile.

    "Department" shows the department or Group that uses this Profile.

    "Company" shows the company that uses this Profile.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topics

    The Root Object


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 189. Profile object, other names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Profile Object - Other Names


 Shows all names by which this Profile is known. These names are for your use
 only and will not appear anywhere but in this dialog.
 Use the scroll arrows to see the contents of the list.
 Use the "Other name" field to list names that you can use to search for the
 Profile.
 To add or remove names from the list, choose the "More" button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 190. View or Change an Alias Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change an Alias Object


 The only information stored in an Alias is the name of the object that the
 Alias refers to.
 You can't change information about an Alias object after it has been created.
 You must delete the Alias and create it again if you need to make any changes.
 The icon for the object that the alias refers to is shadowed to indicate that
 you are seeing the object through an alias, and that the object is not really
 located here.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 191. View or Change a Directory Map  Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Directory Map Object


 The "Identification" page describes the Directory Map object. For example, you
 can
 -  View or change the description of what this Directory Map is used for.
 -  View or change the volume and path that this Directory Map contains.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    How to Use a Directory Map with the MAP Command
    Change the Path Pointed to by this Directory Map

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" displays the name of this Directory Map.

    "Other name" lists other names of this Directory Map.

    "Path" shows the complete path that this Directory Map refers to.

    "Description" describes how this Directory Map is used.

    "Location" shows the physical location of the volume referred to in the
       "Path" field.

    "Department" shows the department that uses this Directory Map.

    "Organization" shows the company or organization that uses this Directory
       Map.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topic

    The Root Object



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 192. Directory Map Example of MAP Command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

How to Use a Directory Map with the MAP Command


 A Directory Map object can be used with the MAP command in
 -  Container login scripts
 -  Profile login scripts
 -  User login scripts
 Instead of mapping to a specific volume and path on the network where an
 application is located, you can map to a Directory Map. The Directory Map
 contains the specific volume and path to the application.
 When the application is moved to a new location on the network, the network
 supervisor only has to change the volume and path in the Directory Map object.
 Every user will still reference the Directory Map and find the application. No
 login scripts need to be changed.
 If the user is not in the same context as the Directory Map, use the complete
 name of the Directory Map in the MAP command.
 Example: To reference a Directory Map for a word processing application in the
 login script, type the following command: MAP R:=WordPerfMap.Accounting.Novell


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 193. Change the Path of a Directory Map Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Path of this Directory Map Object


 1. Choose the "More" button .
 2. Enter a volume name.
    Use the Browser button to search the Directory tree for the correct volume
    if you need to.
    Any volume object in the Directory tree can be used.
 3. Enter a path name.
    Enter the directory and subdirectories on the selected volume that contain
    the desired application.
    If you don't know the correct path, choose "Cancel" and then use the
    Browser  button to locate the correct path. Then return to this point.
 4. Choose the correct name space.
    This should be the correct computer format of the path name you just chose.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The path of this Directory Map object is updated.
    You return to the page showing information about this Directory Map object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 194. Directory Map Object - other names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Map - Other Names


 Shows all names of this Directory Map. These names are for your convenience
 and  will not appear in the Browser. You can use other names to search for
 this  Directory Map.
 To see the list, use the scroll arrows.
 To add or remove names from the list, choose the "More" button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 195. Directory Map - Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Map Path


 The Path dialog shows the location of the directory path that this Directory
 Map.

 Procedures
    Change the Path that this Directory Map Points To

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Volume" shows the volume that this Directory Map points to. This field is
       required.

    "Path" shows the path that this Directory Map points to. This field is
       required.

    Name space shows the name space of the path.

    "OK" saves the values in this dialog and returns you to the previous
       screen.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without changing any values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 196. Directory Map Path - NameSpace field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Map Path - Name Space Field


 Indicates the name space of the path. The name space refers to which file
 system the path name uses, for example, DOS, Mactintosh, or UNIX.
 Your network administrator can tell you how to recognize different name space
 formats. The Volume Object dialog tells you which name space formats are used
 on the selected volume. You must choose one of these name spaces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 197. View or Change a NetWare Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a NetWare Server


 The "Identification" page describes the NetWare Server object you selected.
 For  example, you can
 -  View or change the description of what this NetWare Server is used for.
 -  View the version of NetWare that this NetWare Server uses.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    See What Operating System this Server is Using
    See the Network Addresses Used by this Server
    Enter a Description for this NetWare Server
    Enter Another Name for this NetWare Server
    Enter a Location for this NetWare Server

 Screen Regions and Buttons
    "Name" shows the name of this NetWare Server.

    Other name lists other ways of referring to this NetWare Server.

    "Description" describes this NetWare Server.

    "Location" shows the physical location of this NetWare Server.

    "Department" shows the department or group of users that use this NetWare
       Server.

    "Organization" shows the company or organization that uses this NetWare
       Server.

    "Version" shows the version of NetWare that is installed on this NetWare
       Server.

    Accounting installs or removes the accounting function from this NetWare
       Server.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topic

    The Root Object



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 198. See Which Operating System this Server is Using ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See What Operating System this Server is Using


 1. The "Version" field on the "Identification" page shows which version of the
    NetWare network operating system is being run on this server.
    You cannot change this field. Directory Services determined the value of
    this field by examining the server when the object was created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 199. See the Network Addresses Used by this Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the Network Addresses Used by this Server


 The different network addresses that may be used by this server allow it to
 function as a router between different networking systems, such as TCP/IP and
 IPX/SPX. Directory Services can only access the server on network addresses
 that are included in this list.
 1. Select the "Network Addresses" page on the right side of the object dialog.
    The network addresses used by this server are listed, each with the
    appropriate protocol before its address.
 2. For instructions on adding or removing addresses from the list, choose
    "Help" from that screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 200. View or Change an AFP Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change an AFP Server


 The "Identification" page describes the AFP Server you selected. For example,
 you can
 -  View or change the description of what this AFP Server is used for.
 -  View the version of AppleTalk that this AFP Server uses.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Enter a Serial Number for this AFP Server
    See the Number of Connections Allowed on this AFP Server
    Enter a Description for this AFP Server
    Enter Another Name for this AFP Server

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" shows the name of this AFP Server.

    "Other name" lists other ways of referring to this AFP Server.

    "Description" describes this AFP Server.

    "Location" shows the physical location of this AFP Server.

    "Department" shows the department that uses this AFP Server.

    "Organization" shows the company that uses this AFP Server.

    "Version" shows the version of the Apple Operating System that is installed
       on this  AFP Server.

    "Serial #" shows the serial number of the NetWare product that the AFP
       Server is  using.

    "Connections" shows the number of connections allowed by NetWare on this
       AFP Server.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topic

    The Root Object



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 201. See the Number of Connections Allowed on this AFP Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the Number of Connections Allowed on this AFP Server


 The number of connections allowed on this AFP server is shown in the
 "Connections" field on the "Identification" page of the object dialog.
 This number is determined by the software that you are running on the AFP
 server.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 202. NetWare or AFP Server - Other names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetWare or AFP Server Object - Other Names


 Shows all names by which this AFP Server is known. These names are for your
 information only and don't appear in the Browser.
 To add or remove names from the list, choose the "More" button:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 203. Accounting on NetWare Servers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Accounting for NetWare Servers


 If accounting is not active on this NetWare Server and you choose
 "Accounting,"  you will be asked if you want to install or activate
 accounting.
 If accounting is already active on this NetWare server and you choose
 "Accounting," you will be asked if you want to deactivate accounting.
 Accounting lets you define charge rates for five services:
 -  Disk block reads
 -  Disk block writes
 -  Time connected to the server
 -  Requests for actions
 -  Amount of disk storage used
 The charge rate for each service can be set separately.
 When accounting is active, any service that a user uses is charged to that
 user's account. If the user's account balance is depleted, the user may not be
 able to log into the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 204. View or Change the list of Supported Services for a server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change the List of Supported Services


 The "Supported Services" page lists services provided by the NetWare Server
 you  selected, such as print services or bindery emulation. Administrators can
 use  this page to track the services that are available. For example, you can
 -  View which services this server supports.
 -  Add or delete from the list of services.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a New Service
    Delete an Existing Service

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Supported Services" lists all services available on this server. Since the
       server  doesn't automatically update this property, this list has no
       operational effect  on the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 205. Add a Supported Service to a Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Supported Service


 1. Choose the "Add..." button below the "Services" box.
 2. Enter the name of the service.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Supported Services" page and the new service is added to
    the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 206. Delete a Supported Service on a server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete A Supported Service


 1. Select a service from the list in the "Services" list box.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The selected service is deleted from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 207. Resources of a Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Resources of a Server


 The "Resources" page describes resources available on this NetWare Server,
 such  as volumes or printers. For example, you can
 -  View which resources this Netware Server provides
 -  Add or delete a resource
 This list has no operational effect on the network, but can be used by a
 network supervisor to record information about this server.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a New Resource
    Delete an Existing Resource

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Resources" lists the complete name of all objects that are resources
       supported by  this server.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 208. Add a Resource to a server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Resource


 1. Choose the "Add..." button below the "Resources" box.
 2. Choose the object that you want to add as a resource.
    Because this list is for your information only, you can add any object to
    the list.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Resources" page, and the new object is listed as a
    resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 209. Delete a Resource from a Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete A Resource


 1. Select a resource from the "Resources" list box.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The resource is deleted from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 210. Users of a server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

List of Users


 The "Users" page lists users of this resource. This list is created and
 maintained by the network supervisor. For example, you can
 -  View users who can access this resource
 -  Add or delete a user of this resource
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a New User
    Delete an Existing User

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Users" lists all User objects that have accounts on this NetWare Server.
       This  list has no operational effect on the network, but can be used by
       a supervisor  to record information about this network resource.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 211. Add a user to a server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a User


 1. Choose the "Add..." button below the "User" list box.
 2. Choose the User that you want to add to the list from the "Select Object"
    dialog.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Users" page, and the new object is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 212. Delete a user from a server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete A User


 1. Select a User from the "Users" list box.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The User is deleted from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 213. Server Error Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Server Error Log


 This page lets you view the error log that is maintained by this NetWare
 Server. All error conditions that occur during this server's operations are
 recorded here, and remain here until the error log is cleared.
 Errors in the error log can include
 -  A file cannot be migrated
 -  An NLM requested memory but none was available
 -  A section of a mirrored hard disk becomes inoperable.
 Many errors are automatically fixed by NetWare. Studying this error log can
 help you see where problems are occurring, and check or modify your network so
 that future problems will not become more serious.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Clear the Error Log
    View the Error Log



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 214. Clear the Server Error Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Clear the Server Error Log


 The server error log is displayed in the edit window as soon as you select the
 Error Log page. It is a record of activity on the server. You can use the
 scroll bars on the right side and bottom of the edit window to view different
 sections of the error log.
 To Clear the Error Log

 1. Choose "Clear."
    The error log is erased and a new log is begun with the next error
    encountered by the server.
    Because the error log is created by the server from its own operations, you
    cannot change the server error log, you can only clear it.
    You can use the Copy (Ctrl and Insert) and Paste (Shift-Insert) functions
    of  OS/2 to copy any portion of the error log to another OS/2 application
    before clearing it.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 215. View the Server Error Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View the Server Error Log


 The server error log is displayed in the edit window as soon as you select the
 Error Log page. It is a record of activity on the server. You can use the
 scroll bars on the right side and bottom of the edit window to view different
 sections of the error log.
 Because the error log is created by the server from its own operations, you
 cannot change the server error log, you can only erase or clear it.
 You can use the Copy (Ctrl and Insert) and Paste (Shift-Insert) functions of
 OS/2 to copy any portion of the error log to another OS/2 application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 216. Blocks Read accounting charges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Accounting for Blocks Read


 The "Blocks Read" page lists rates charged by accounting services for
 resources  of this NetWare Server. For example, you can
 -  View times when each charge rate is in effect
 -  Change the formula used to calulate any charge rate
  Each block that is read from the hard disk by a user during a certain day and
 hour is charged the corresponding rate shown on this page.
 No reports can be generated.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a Charge Rate
    Delete a Charge Rate
    Change a Charge Rate
    Find What Rate is Charged on a Certain Day and Time
    Change What Rate is Charged on a Certain Day and Time

 Screen regions and buttons
    Day and Time Grid
    Undo Button
    Time and Charge Rate Text
    Charge rates list box
    Add Charge Rate Button
    Delete Charge Rate Button
 Related topics

    Determining Charge Rate Multipliers and Divisors
    What to Charge For
    How Charge Rates Affect a User's Account Balance


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 217. Blocks Written accounting charges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Accounting for Blocks Written


 The "Blocks Written" page lists rates charged for resources used on this
 server. For example, you can
 -  View times when each charge rate is in effect
 -  Change the formula used to calulate any charge rate
 Each block that is written to the hard disk by a user is charged the
 corresponding rate shown on this page.
 No reports can be generated.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a Charge Rate
    Delete a Charge Rate
    Change a Charge Rate
    Find What Rate is Charged on a Certain Day and Time
    Change What Rate is Charged on a Certain Day and Time

 Screen regions and buttons
    Day and Time Grid
    Undo Button
    Time and Charge Rate Text
    Charge Rates List Box
    Add Charge Rate Button
    Delete Charge Rate Button
 Related topics

    Determining Charge Rate Multipliers and Divisors
    What to Charge For
    How Charge Rates Affect a User's Account Balance


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 218. Connect Time accounting charges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Accounting for Connect Time


 The "Connect Time" page lists rates charged for connecting to this NetWare
 Server. For example, you can
 -  View times when each charge rate is in effect
 -  Change the formula used to calulate any charge rate
 For each minute that a User is connected to this NetWare Server, the User is
 charged the corresponding rate shown on this page.
 No reports can be generated.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just
 individual pages. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need
 to the pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page
 of  the dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a Charge Rate
    Delete a Charge Rate
    Change a Charge Rate
    Find the Charge Rate for a Certain Day and Time
    Change the Charge Rate for a Certain Day and Time

 Screen regions and buttons
    Day and Time grid
    Undo Button
    Time and Charge Rate Text
    Charge Rates List Box
    Add Charge Rate Button
    Delete Charge Rate Button
 Related topics

    Determining Charge Rate Multipliers and Divisors
    What to Charge For
    How Charge Rates Affect a User's Account Balance


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 219. Disk Storage accounting charges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Accounting for Disk Storage


 The "Disk Storage" page lists rates charged by accounting services for storing
 data on this server. For example, you can
 -  View times when each charge rate is in effect
 -  Change the formula used to calulate any charge rate
 Users are charged for each block on the hard disk for which they are listed as
 the owner of the file or directory occupying that block.The rates charged
 correspond to the rates shown on this page.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just
 individual pages. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need
 to the pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page
 of  the dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a Charge Rate
    Delete a Charge Rate
    Change a Charge Rate
    Find the Charge Rate for a Certain Day and Time
    Change the Charge Rate for a Certain Day and Time

 Screen regions and buttons
    Day and Time Grid
    Undo Button
    Time and Charge Rate Text
    Charge Rates List Box
    Add Charge Rate Button
    Delete Charge Rate Button
 Related topics

    Determining Charge Rate Multipliers and Divisors
    What to Charge For
    How Charge Rates Affect a User's Account Balance


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 220. Service Requests accounting charges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Accounting for Service Requests


 The "Service Requests" page lists rates charged for requesting services on
 this  NetWare Server. For example, you can
 -  View times when each charge rate is in effect
 -  Change the formula used to calulate any charge rate
 Each time a workstation requests a service, that User is charged the
 corresponding rate shown on this page.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a Charge Rate
    Delete a Charge Rate
    Change a Charge Rate
    Find the Charge Rate for a Certain Day and Time
    Change the Charge Rate for a Certain Day and Time

 Screen regions and buttons
    Day and Time Grid
    Undo Button
    Time and Charge Rate Text
    Charge Rates List Box
    Add Charge Rate Button
    Delete Charge Rate Button
 Related topics

    Determine Charge Rate Multipliers and Divisors
    What to Charge For
    How Charge Rates Affect a User's Account Balance


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 221. Add a Charge Rate to a server resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Charge Rate


 You can have up to 20 different charge rates on this NetWare Server (4 for
 each  category that you can charge for).
 Before you begin, you must determine the multiplier and divisor used to
 compute  charges for each User who uses this resource on this server.
 1. Choose "Add Charge Rate."
 2. Enter a value in  the "Multiplier" field.
 3. Enter a value in the "Divisor" field.
 4. Choose "OK."
    You return to the page showing the grid of charges for each day and time.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 222. Delete a Charge Rate for server resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Charge Rate


 1. Select a charge rate from the box in the middle of the page that lists all
    charge rates.
    You can't delete a charge rate if it still appears in the day-time grid.
    You  must change the rate charged at those times so that the charge rate
    you want to  delete is no longer in use.
 2. Choose "Delete Charge Rate."
    The selected charge rate is deleted from the list


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 223. Change a Charge Rate for a server resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a Charge Rate


 To change a charge rate, you must delete it and re-enter it with new values.
 You must also change all days and times that use the rate.
 1. Select the charge rate that you want to change from the list of charge
    rates  in the middle of the page.
    You can't delete a charge rate if it still appears in the day-time grid.
    You  must change the rate charged at those times so that the charge rate
    you want to  delete is no longer in use.
 2. Choose "Delete Charge Rate."
 3. Choose "Add Charge Rate."
 4. Enter values for the new charge rate.
    Note: You must determine the multiplier and divisor for the new rate.
 5. Choose "OK" to return to the page showing all charge rates.
 6. Select the new charge rate in the "Charge rate" box.
 7. Block out the days and times that the charge rate should apply to (probably
    the ones you had to change to complete step 1).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 224. Find what rate is charged on a certain day and time for a server resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Find the Charge Rate for a Certain Day and Time


 If you use a mouse

 Put the pointer on the cell that represents the day and time for which you
 want  to know the charge rate (the day and time that you are pointing to are
 shown  below the day-time grid after "Time").
 The number of the charge rate is shown after "Charge rate." Look at the line
 corresponding to the number shown here to see the amount charged at that time.
 If you use a keyboard

 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor in the day-time grid to the cell that
 represents the day and time for which you want to know the effective charge
 rate (the day and time that you are pointing to are shown below the day-time
 grid after "Time").
 The number of the charge rate is shown after "Charge rate." Look at the line
 corresponding to the number shown here to see the amount charged at that time.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 225. Change what rate is charged on a certain day and time for a server resource ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Charge Rate for a Certain Day and Time


 If you use a mouse

 1. Select the charge rate that you want to use from the list of charge rates
 2. Select the cell representing the day and time that you want that charge
    rate  to apply to.
    You can click and drag to cover a larger area of the grid.
    The "Time" indication under the grid changes as you move the pointer
    around.
 If you use a keyboard

 1. Select the charge rate that you want to use from the list of charge rates
 2. Move the cursor within the grid to the cell representing the day and time
    that you want that charge rate to apply to.
 3. Select that cell by pressing the <Spacebar>.
    The cell changes to the color representing the selected charge rate.
 4. Repeat this process for each cell that you want the selected charge rate to
    apply to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 226. Day and time grid in accounting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Day and Time Grid


 You can specify a different charge rate for each hour of each day of the week.
 Each cell in the Day and Time grid represents one hour of the week.
 Each row of cells from left to right is one 24-hour day.The seven days of the
 week are listed to the left of the grid. The "Time" indicator below the grid
 shows the day of the week and the time of day that you are pointing to.
 Example: To set a charge rate for work hours, select all cells from Monday at
 8  a.m. to Friday at 5 p.m. and fill it with one charge rate (shown by that
 charge  rate's color).
 You can have up to 20 different charge rates among all five accounting
 categories.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 227. Undo button for accounting charge rates ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Undo Button


 If you change the charge rate in an area of the Day and Time grid, choosing
 "Undo" returns the grid to its previous state.
 "Undo" does not undo a deletion of a charge rate after you choose "Delete
 Charge Rate."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 228. Time and Charge rate text lines in accounting for server resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Time and Charge Rate Fields


 Two fields are under the Day and Time grid to help you assign charge rates:
    "Time" shows the cell you are pointing at, indicated by the day of week and
    time
    "Charge rate" shows the charge rate in effect for that day and time. This
    refers to the line in the list of charge rates, not the amount charged.
 Watch these fields when you work in the grid to make sure you are assigning
 charge rates for the correct days and hours.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 229. Charge rates list box for server resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Charge rates list box


 This box lists all charge rates that can be assigned to this resource on this
 server. Each charge rate is made up of a multiplier and a divisor.
 You can have a total of 20 charge rates for all five accounting categories.
 A color is assigned to each charge rate and is used to display squares in the
 day and time grid for which that charge rate is assigned.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 230. Add charge rate button to account for server resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add Charge Rate Button


 When you choose "Add Charge Rate" you see a dialog where you enter a
 multiplier  and a divisor as a new charge rate. The new charge rate is added
 to the list of  charge rates that can be assigned to any square of the day and
 time grid.
 You should use no more than four or five charge rates for each accounting
 category. (The total number of charge rates for all five categories together
 is  20).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 231. Delete charge rate button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete Charge Rate Button


 This button deletes the selected charge rate from the list of charge rates.
 You can delete only charge rates that are not used in the Day and Time grid.
 To  delete a charge rate that is still in use, you must change the charge rate
 for  those days and times.
 This deletion can't be undone. You must re-enter the deleted values with "Add
 Charge Rate" and select the days and times again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 232. Deciding on Charge Rate Multipliers and Divisors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Determining Charge Rates


 Charge rates are not defined with units such as dollars and cents. We
 recommend  that you use cents or an equivalent value.
 There are two ways to determine charge rates.
    If you know how much to charge per resource unit
    If you know how much you want to charge for the entire resource


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No Title for this topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Determining a Charge Rate


 You can set a charge rate for the amount you want. For example, you know that
 you want to charge 1 cent for each block read.
 1. Convert the amount you want to charge into a fraction.
    If the amount is a whole cent amount, like 2 or 3 cents, then the fraction
    is that number over 1; for example, 2/1.
    If the amount is a fraction, like 1.75 cents, then multiply it by 10 enough
    times to get rid of the decimal, then put a 10 underneath the fraction for
    each  time you do that. For example, 1.75 times 10 equals 17.5, with one 10
    underneath. So our first fraction is 17.5/10. Since the number is still a
    fraction, repeat the process: 17.5 times 10 equals 175. with another 10
    underneath.So the new fraction is 175 over 10 times 10, or 175/100.
 2. Enter the top number as the multiplier. (175 in our example.)
 3. Enter the bottom number as the divisor. (100 in our example.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No Title for this topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Charging for a Resource


 You can charge for an entire resource used. For example, you know that you
 want  to charge $200 per month for disk storage to cover your costs, and there
 are  usually 100,000 4 KB used on your 500 MB hard disk.
 1. Enter the total amount charged as the multiplier (the top number).
    This is 20,000 in our example...$200 in cents.
 2. Enter the total amount of the resource used as the divisor (the bottom
    number).
    This is 100,000 in our example, the total amount of disk space to charge
    for.
    This fraction comes out to two tenths of one cent per 4 KB disk block used
    to store data. So if a user had 1 MB of word processing and spreadsheet
    files  stored on the hard disk, she would be charged about 51 cents per
    month.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 233. Deciding what to charge for when accounting for server resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

What to Charge For


 As a general rule, charge users for server resources that are scarce or that
 you want to limit use of. For example,
 -  If disk storage space is scarce or you want to encourage users not to keep
    old files on the hard disk, charge for disk storage space.
 -  If network traffic is heavy and you want users to limit their overall use
    of  the network, charge for service requests.
 -  If you run out of NetWare connections regularly, charge for connect time so
    that users log in only when they really need the network.
 You can also charge for more than one resource. If no charge rates are entered
 in the Day and Time gid for a resource, then no users are charged for that
 resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 234. How charge rates affect a user's account balance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

How Charge Rates Affect a User's Account Balance


 Each User can have an account balance that determines the amount of network
 resources that the User can use. If you set "No Limit" in the User's Object
 dialog "Account Restrictions" page, then accounting and charge rates have no
 effect.
 If a User does have an account limit and uses a service for which an
 accounting  charge rate has been specified, the amount of that service is
 deducted from the  User's account balance. When the User's credit limit is
 reached or the account  balance is zero, the User can no longer log in to the
 network until the account  balance is changed.
 Example: A User pays $50 to use the network. You charge 2 cents for each block
 read and 1 cent for each minute of connect time. Each time the User reads a
 block of information from a volume attached to that NetWare Server, the User's
 account balance is reduced by 2 cents. Each minute that the User is attached
 to  that NetWare Server, the User's account balance is reduced by 1 cent.
 After  several weeks, the User's acccount balance is zero. The User is logged
 out and  can't log in again until the network supervisor updates the User's
 account  balance.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 235. View or Change a Volume Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Volume Object


 The "Identification" page describes this Volume object. For example, you can
 -  View or change the name of the physical volume
 -  View or change the description of what this volume is used for.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    List the Files on This Volume
    See the Physical Name of this Volume
    See Which Server this Volume is Attached To
    Enter Another Name for this Volume
    Enter a Location for this Volume

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" shows the name of this Volume object. To rename this object, choose
       "Rename" from the "Object" menu.

    "Host Server" shows the name of the NetWare Server on which this volume is
       physically located. This field can't be changed.

    "Host Volume" shows the physical volume name. This field can't be changed.

    "Other name" list other ways of referring to this object.

    "Location" shows the physical location of the NetWare Server that contains
       this  Volume.

    "Department" shows the department that uses this Volume.

    "Organization" shows the company that uses this Volume.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topics

    The Root ObjectRoot_Object_Concept
    Trustees and Trustee Paths
    The Root Directory of a Volume - Assigning Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 236. List the Files on a Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

List the Files on This Volume


 In the NetWare Administrator, you can manage files and directories on a
 NetWare  volume. Files and directories are displayed below the volume object
 as a  continuation of the Directory structure, even though they are actually a
 part  of a file system and not the Directory Services database.
 You can select and expand a volume object just as you do a container object in
 the Browser, provided that you have these rights:
    Browse object right to the Volume object

    Read property right to the Host Server and Physical Volume Name properties
       of  the Volume object

    File Scan directory right to the root directory of the volume

 Remember that you must have rights to the ACL property to change object or
 property rights, and you must have the Access Control directory right to
 change  rights to the root directory.
 Also, remember that Supervisor rights to the file system on the volume are
 granted through the NetWare Server object on which this volume is installed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 237. See the Physical Volume Name for this Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the Physical Name of this Volume


 The physical volume name of the volume that this Volume object refers to is
 shown in the "Physical Volume Name" field on the Identification page of the
 Volume object dialog. The physical volume name may also be called the Host
 resource name.
 The physical volume name is assigned when a volume is installed. A volume
 named  SYS must exist for every NetWare server, but other volumes on the
 server can  have any name. The physical volume name cannot be changed by
 Directory  Services. You can use the NetWare Console to change the physical
 volume name,  but you must then delete the old volume object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 238. See Which Server this Volume is Attached To ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See Which Server this Volume is Attached To


 The physical NetWare Server that this volume is attached to is shown in the
 "Host Server" field of the Identification page of the object dialog for this
 volume. The Host Server was specified when the volume object was created and
 cannot be changed. The Host Server provides Directory Services an address to
 find the volume on the network. You can view the object dialog for the Host
 Server's NetWare Server object to find out more about that server.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 239. Volume object - other names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Volume Object - Other Names


 This field shows all names by which this Volume object is known. These names
 are for your convenience only and will not appear in the Browser. Use "Other
 Name" to record information that you want to use to search for this Volume.
 To see the list, use the scroll arrows.
 To add or delete names, choose the "More" button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 240. View Statistics about a Volume Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View Statistics About a Volume Object


 The "Statistics"page describes the use of the Volume object you selected. For
 example, you can
 -  View how space on this Volume is used
 -  See which name spaces and features are installed on this Volume
 You can't change the information on this page.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 Procedure

    How to Use the Object Dialog
    See How Much Disk Space is Available
    See How Many Directory Entries are Available
    See the Block Size Used on this Volume
    See If this Volume is Removeable or Not
    See How Much Space is Used by Deleted Files
    See How Much Space is Saved by Compression
    See How Many Files Have Been Migrated
    See Which Name Spaces are Installed on this Volume
    See Which Features are Installed on this Volume
    List the Files on This Volume

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Block size" shows the block size used by files on this volume.

    "[Non-]removeable volume" indicates if this is a permanent or a removeable
       volume.

    "Space" shows how much of the volume is used.

    "Directory entries"shows how many directory entries are used.

    "Migrated Files" shows the number and size of files that have been migrated
       to a  secondary storage device.

    "Compressed Files" shows the number and size of files that have been
       compressed.

    "Name spaces" lists which name spaces are loaded on this volume.

    "Installed features" lists features installed on this volume, such as
       compression or  auditing.

    "Deleted Files" shows the number, age, and size of files that have been
       deleted  but not purged from the volume.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 241. Volume Statistics - Block size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Block Size


 This field indicates the block size used by this volume. The block size was
 determined when the volume was installed. Block size can't be changed without
 deleting and re-creating the volume.
 Space on a volume is allocated to files in blocks. The minimum amount of disk
 space that a file can use is one disk block, and subsequent space allocations
 are also a multiple of the block size.
 Example: If the block size in 4 KB, a file with only one line of text will
 still use 4 KB of disk space because that is the smallest amount of disk space
 that can be allocated to any file.
 A smaller block size will save disk space for smaller files, but make access
 to  larger files less efficient. A larger block size will make access to very
 large  files much quicker, but will waste disk space for each small file.
 Block suballocation allows several files to share one disk block. This
 eliminates most of the wasted space caused by large block sizes. It is
 generally best to allow NetWare to choose the combination of block size and
 block suballocation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 242. Volume Statistics - Removeable volume flag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

[Non-]Removeable Volume Flag


 This flag is set automatically. When a volume is installed, NetWare determines
 the type of storage device it is and sets this flag.
 Non-removeable volumes include hard drives.
 Removeable volumes contain cartridges or optical disks that can be taken out
 of  the drive.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 243. Volume statistics - Space chart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Space Chart


 This chart shows how much of this volume is in use. The total size of the
 volume and the remaining free space are shown numerically below the graphic
 representation.
 You can't change this information here. To change the amount of space used,
 you  must create or delete files, add or remove name spaces, or perform
 similar  actions.
 Colored areas indicate the space that is used. This is also shown by the
 percentage at the right of the chart.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 244. Volume Statistics - Directory entries chart ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Entries Chart


 This chart shows the percentage of directory entries used on this volume. The
 total  number of available directory entries and the entries that are still
 unused are  shown numerically below the graphic.
 Note: You can't change this information. The number of directory entries
 available on each volume is determined by the block size used on the volume,
 which must be set when the volume is installed. Each directory entry used 128
 bytes, and a maximum of 65,536 disk blocks can be used for directory entries.
 So the maximum number of directory entries on a volume is the block size (in
 KB) times 524,288.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 245. Volume Statistics - Migrated files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Migrated Files


 This box shows how many files on this volume have been migrated to a secondary
 storage device, and how much disk space was saved by migrating them.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Count" shows the number of files on this volume that are currently
       migrated to a  secondary storage device.

    "Actual size" shows the total size of all files that have been migrated to
       a  secondary storage device. To bring all migrated files back to the
       volume, you  would need this much disk space. This number can be larger
       than your entire  volume since the secondary storage device can be
       larger than the volume from  which files are migrated.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 246. Volume statistics - Compressed files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Compressed Files


 This box shows how many of the files on this volume have been compressed by
 NetWare, and how much disk space was saved by compressing them.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Count" shows the number of files on this volume that have been compressed.

    "Uncompressed size" shows the space that all of the files in the "Count"
       field would  use on the volume if they were not compressed.

    "Compressed size" shows the space that all of the files in the "Count"
       field are  actually using while they are compressed.

    "Average compression" shows the average amount of space saved by
       compressing a  file, as a percentage of it's original size. The formula
       used to calculate this  is (Uncompressed size minus Compressed size)
       divided by Uncompressed size.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 247. Volume statistics - Name Spaces ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Name Spaces Box


 This box lists name spaces that are installed on this physical volume.
 Name spaces can be added to the volume at any time by the network supervisor
 using the LOAD command at the server console prompt. Each name space uses
 another directory entry for every file or directory on the volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 248. Volume statistics - Installed Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Installed Features Box


 This lists features that are installed on the volume. A feature must be
 installed on a volume for the files on that volume to be able to use it.
 Some features can be installed or removed at the NetWare Server console. Other
 featuers must be chosen when the volume is installed and can't be changed.
 Possible features are:
 -  Block suballocation: allows disk blocks to be shared by several files to
    prevent wasted disk space
 -  Compression: compresses files that have not been used recently to conserve
    disk space
 -  Data migration: moves files that have not been used recently to a secondary
    storage device until they are requested by a User
 -  Auditing: allows a network auditor to track file and Directory Services
    transactions
 -  Read Only: indicates that this volume is Read Only (can be read but not
    written to, such as a CD ROM drive).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 249. Volume Statistics - Deleted files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Deleted Files


 This lists the space used on this volume by files that have been deleted but
 are still stored on the volume.
 NetWare saves all deleted files for a time in case they need to be salvaged
 and  reused after they have been deleted.
 The NetWare Server console allows you to set the amount of time to wait before
 purging deleted files (permanently erasing them), or for purging them
 immediately when they are deleted. If a volume is full, the oldest deleted
 files are purged first to make space for current files to be stored.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Count" shows how many deleted files are stored on this volume. All deleted
       files  referred to in this number are listed as "unpurgeable" or
       "purgeable" in the  two fields below.

    "Unpurgeable size" indicates the total size of all deleted files that can't
       be purged  yet. This refers to the "Minimum delay to purge files"
       parameter in the NetWare  Server console. Files that have been deleted
       less than that amount of time  can't be purged.

    "Purgeable size" indicates the total size of all deleted files that can be
       purged.  These files have been deleted at least the "Minimum delay to
       purge files," but  they have not been purged yet.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 250. View or Change Dates and Times related to a Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change Dates and Times Related to a Volume


 The "Dates and Times" page describes the use of this Volume object. For
 example, you can
 -  View or change the owner of this volume
 -  View the last user to archive the volume
 -  View or change the date of creation or archive for this volume
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    List the Files on This Volume
    Change the Creation Date and Time
    Change the Owner
    Change the Modified Last Date and Time
    Change the Archived Last Date and Time
    Change the Archived Last by

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Created" on shows the date and time that this volume was initialized.

    "Owner" shows the User object that initialized this volume.

    "Modified last on" shows the date and time when this information was last
       updated.

    :"Archived last on" shows the date and time when this volume was partially
       or  completely backed up. This field is set when the Archive attribute
       of the  volume's root directory is reset by a backup application.

    "Archived last by" shows the User object that was operating the backup
       application  that most recently backed up (all or part of) this volume.
       This field is set  when the Archive attribute of the volume's root
       directory is reset by a backup  application.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topics

    The Root ObjectRoot_Object_Concept
    Trustees and Trustee PathsTrustees_and_Trustee_Paths
    The Root Directory of a Volume - Assigning Rights



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 251. Change the Creation date and time of a Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Creation Date and Time of a Volume


 1. Select the section of the "creation date and time" field that you want to
    change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decrease the date or time further in the past.
 3. To return to the Browser, choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 252. Change the owner of a Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Owner of a Volume


 1. Select the "Owner" field.
 2. Enter the name of the User that should be the owner of this volume. You can
    do this by
    2a.Typing the name in the field or
    2b.Choosing the icon to the right of the field  to choose a User object
       from the Browser.
 3. To return to the Browser when the correct User is chosen, choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 253. Change the Modified Date and Time of a Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Modified Date and Time of a Volume


 1. Select the section of the "Modified date and time" field that you want to
    change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decreases the date or time further in the past.
 3. To return to the Browser, choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 254. Change the Archived Date and Time of a Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Archived Date and Time of a Volume


 1. Select the section of the "Archived date and time" field  that you want to
    change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decreases the date or time further in the past.
 3. To return to the Browser, choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 255. Change Who Archived a Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Who Archived a Volume


 1. Select the "Archived Last by" field.
 2. Enter the name of the User that last archived (backed up) this volume. You
    can do this by
    2a.Typing the name in the field shown, or
    2b.Choosing the icon to the right of the field  to choose a User object
       from the Browser.
 3. To return to the Browser when the correct User is chosen, choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 256. View or Change User Space Limits on a non-4.0 Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change User Space Limits on a Volume


 This Volume is located on a non-NetWare 4.0 server, or is being viewed on a
 different Directory tree through bindery emulation. The "User Space Limits"
 page describes how users can use the space on this Volume object. For example,
 you can
 -  View a User's space restrictions
 -  Change a User's space restriction for this volume
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    List the Files on This Volume
    See a User's Space Restrictions on this Volume
    Change a User's Space Restrictions on this Volume
    See the Number of Files and Directories that a User is Using

 Screen regions and buttons
    "User list" shows all Users who are using space on this volume, and details
       about their usage.

    "Display number of files and directories" allows you to see how many files
       and  directories on this volume this user is the owner of.

    "Modify button" opens a dialog for the selected User that lets you change
       or  remove its space limits for this volume.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topics

    The Root Object
    Trustees and Trustee Paths
    The Root Directory of a Volume - Assigning Rights



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 257. View or Change User Space Limits on a Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change User Space Limits on a Volume


 The "User Space Limits" page describes how users can use the space on this
 Volume object. For example, you can
 -  Select which area of the Directory tree you want to see Users from
 -  View a User's space restrictions
 -  Change a User's space restriction for this volume
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    List the Files on This Volume
    Select Which part of the Directory Tree You See Users From
    See a User's Space Restrictions on this Volume
    Change a User's Space Restrictions on this Volume
    See the Number of Files and Directories that a User is Using

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Context" tells which container to begin searching for Users to list here.
       Listing  Users from only part of the Directory tree is much faster and
       only lists Users  that you are interested in.

    "Search Entire Subtree" checkbox determines whether everything below the
       "Context" is searched for Users, or only those leaf objects directly
       below the  container object listed in "Context."

    "User list" shows all Users who are using space on this volume, and details
       about their usage.

    "Display number of files and directories" allows you to see how many files
       and  directories on this volume this user is the owner of.

    "Modify button" opens a dialog for the selected User that lets you change
       or  remove its space limits for this volume.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topics

    The Root Object
    Trustees and Trustee Paths
    The Root Directory of a Volume - Assigning Rights



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 258. Select Which part of the Directory Tree You See Users From-User Space Limits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Which part of the Directory Tree You See Users From


 Use this dialog to limit the part of the tree for which this object's trustee
 assignments are shown. Every object under the container that you select will
 be  searched for this object's trustee assignments. The smaller a section of
 the  Directory tree you select, the quicker the dialog will appear.
 1. Select the Browser button to the right of the "Context" field.
 2. Select a container object.
 This page will only list User Space Limits for Users under this container.
 3. Select the "Search Entire Subtree" checkbox.
    If you do not select this checkbox, only leaf objects directly below the
    container that you selected will be included in the list of Users. This is
    faster if you know exactly where the User that you want is located.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 259. See a User's Space Limit on this Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See a User's Space Limits


 1. Select the User whose limits you want to view.
 2. Look in the "Space Restriction" field to see how much space this User is
    allowed on this volume.
    A User is using space when that User is the owner of a file or directory.
    Access will be denied if the User tries to create new files or increase the
    size of files when the space limit is exceeded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 260. Change a User's Space Limit on this Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change a User's Space Limits


 1. Selece the User whose space restrictions you want to change.
 2. Choose "Modify."
    The "User" field shows the name of the User.
    The amount of space (in thousands of bytes) that the User is now using is
    shown in "Volume space used by user."
 3. To remove the User's space restrictions, select the "Limit Volume Space"
    check box.
    When the "Limit Volume Space" check box is not selected, the user can use
    any free space on the volume.
 5. To change the User's space restriction:
    5a.Make certain that the "Limit Volume Space" check box is selected (marked
       with "X").
    5b.Enter a value in the "Volume space limit" field.
    This value is in KB. If you enter 5000, the user can use a maximum of
    5,000,000 bytes, or 5 megabytes of volume space.
    A user is using space when that user is the owner of a file or directory.
    Access will be denied if the user tries to create new files or increase the
    size of files when the space limit is exceeded.
 6. Choose "OK" to return to the "User Space Limits" page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 261. See the number of files and directories that a user is using on this volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the Number of Files and Directories that a User is Using


 1. Select the "Display number of Files and Directories" check box.
    Note: This process may take several minutes.
 2. Select the User whose files and directories information you want to see.
 3. Scroll to the right to see the column that shows the number of files and
    directories that this User is using on this volume.
    This User is listed as the owner of each of these files and directories.
    Access will be denied if the User tries to create new files or increase the
    size of files when the space limit is exceeded.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 262. Volume User Space Limits - User List Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Volume User Space Limits - User List Box


 The "User" list box lists all Users who are listed as the owners of any file
 or  directory on this volume.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "User's name" is the username listed as the owner for one or more files or
       directories.

    "Limit" is the maximum amount of volume space that this User can use.
       Access will  be denied if the User exceeds this limit and then tries to
       create new files or  increase the size of existing files. If the User
       has no space restriction on  this volume, this field is blank.

    "Space used" shows how much space the User is currently using on the
       volume. It  is the sum of the sizes of all files and directories that
       list this User as  their owner.

    "Available" is the difference between the space limit and the space used if
       there is  a space restriction, or the amount of free space on the volume
       if there is no  space restriction for this user.

    "Files used" lists how many files this User owns. It is not displayed
       unless the  "Display number of files and directories" check box is
       selected.

    "Directories used" lists how many directories this User owns. It is not
       displayed  unless the "Display number of files and directories" checkbox
       is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 263. Volume User Space Limits - Modify Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Volume User Space Limits - Modify Button


 The "Modify" button opens a dialog that lets you change a User's volume space
 restriction. You can also remove the space restriction so that the User has no
 space restrictions.
 The dialog that appears shows the User that you selected and lets you enter a
 new value for the space restriction or check a box to indicate that this User
 has no space restriction.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 264. View or Change a Directory name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Directory Name


 The "Identification" page describes the directory you selected. For example,
 you can
 -  View  the name of the directory
 -  Change the name of the directory in one or all of the name spaces used.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    See What Name Spaces are Used on this Volume
    See What this Directory is Called in Each Available Name Space
    Rename a Directory
 Description of name space formats

    "DOS" is used by IBM PC and compatibles, including Windows.

    "Macintosh" is used by all Apple Macintosh computers.

    "FTAM" is a standard file system used by many mainframe and minicomputers.

    "NFS" (Network Filing System) is used by Unix and RISC workstations.

    "OS/2" is used by the IBM OS/2 Operating System on IBM PC and compatibles
       for  OS/2 High Performance File System. Files and directories can have
       long names  and properties similar to those used by Directory Services
       objects.

 Related topics

    Trustees and Trustee Paths
    The Root Directory of a Volume - Assigning Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 265. Rename a file or directory on a pre-v3.11 volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a File or Directory Name


 The "Identification" page describes the file or directory that you selected.
 This file is located on a volume with a pre-3.11 version of NetWare, which
 does  not support name spaces for different file formats. For example, you can
 -  View  the name of the file or directory
 -  Change the name of the file or directory
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Rename a Directory
 Related topics

    Trustees and Trustee Paths
    The Root Directory of a Volume - Assigning Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 266. Rename an older file or directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rename a File or Directory


 1. Select the "New name" field.
 2. Enter a new name for the file or directory.
 3. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 267. Rename a directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rename a Directory


 1. Select the "New name" field.
 2. Enter a new name for the directory.
 3. (Optional) To rename all name spaces, select "Rename all name spaces using
    new name."
 4. (Optional) To rename only one name space,
    4a.Select a name space in the box above the "New name" field.
    4b.Select "Rename only selected name space."
 5. Choose "Rename."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 268. Directory Facts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Facts


 The "Facts" page shows statistical information about this directory. For
 example, you can
 -  View the date and time this directory was created
 -  Change the owner of the directory
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Restrict the Size of the Directory
    Change the Size Restriction of the Directory
    Change the Creation Date and Time
    Change the Owner of the Directory
    Change the Date or Time the Directory Was Last Modified
    Change the Date or Time the Directory Was Last Archived
    Change Who Last Archived the Directory

 Screen regions and buttons
    "KB available to directory" shows the number of kilobytes available to the
       directory.

    "Restrict size" check box shows whether the directory is restricted in
       size.

    "Limit" field shows the directory's maximum number of 4K blocks (if
       directory  size is restricted)

    "Created date and time" show when the directory was first created

    "Owner field" shows the owner of this directory

    "Last Modified date and time" shows the last time the directory was
       modified

    "Last Archived date and time" shows the last time the directory was
       archived.  Tthis field and the "Archiver" field are set when the Archive
       attribute of this  directory is reset by a backup application.

    "Archiver" field shows who last archived the directory

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.

 Related topics

    Trustees and Trustee Paths
    The Root Directory of a Volume - Assigning Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 269. Restrict the Size of the Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restrict the Size of a Directory


 1. Select the "Restrict size" check box.
 2. Select the "Limit" field.
 3. Enter the number of 4 KB blocks to limit this directory to.
 4. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 270. Change the Size Restriction of the Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Size Restriction of a Directory


 1. Select the "Limit" field.
 2. Enter the new number of 4 KB blocks to limit this directory to.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 271. Change the Creation Date and Time of a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Creation Date and Time of a Directory


 1. Select the section of the "Creation date and time" field that you want to
    change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decreases the date or time further in the past.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 272. Change the Owner of a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Owner of a Directory


 1. Select the "Owner" field.
 2. Enter the name of the User that should be the owner of this directory. You
    can do this by
    2a.Typing the name in the field or
    2b.Choosing the icon to the right of the field  to choose a User object
       from the Browser.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 273. Change the Last Modified Date or Time of a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Last Modified Date or Time of a Directory


 1. Select the section of the "Modified date and time" field that you want to
    change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decreases the date or time further in the past.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 274. Change the Last Archived Date or Time of a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Last Archived Date or Time of a Directory


 1. Select the section of the "Archived date and time" field that you want to
    change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decreases the date or time further in the past.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 275. Change Who Last Archived a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Who Last Archived a Directory


 1. Select the "Archiver" field.
 2. Enter the name of the User that last archived (backed up) this directory.
    You can do this by
    2a.Typing the name in the field shown or
    2b.Choosing the icon to the right of the field  to choose a User object
       from the Browser.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 276. Directory Attributes - pre-4.0 Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Attributes - v2.x and v3.x Directories


 The "Attributes" page shows attribute information about this directory or
 volume. Any attribute that is checked is in effect for this directory. For
 example, you can
 -  See which attributes are assigned to this directory
 -  Change attributes of this directory
 If you select a volume, the attributes are for the root directory of that
 volume.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Change the Directory Attributes

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Directory Attributes" Shows the attributes of this directory.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 277. Directory Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Attributes


 The "Attributes" page shows attribute information about this directory or
 volume. Any attribute that is checked is in effect for this directory. For
 example, you can
 -  See which attributes are assigned to this directory
 -  Change attributes of this directory
 If you selected a volume, the attributes are for the root directory of that
 volume.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Change the Directory Attributes

 Screen regions and buttons
    Directory Attributes Shows the attributes of this directory.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 278. Change the Directory attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Directory Attributes


 Directory attributes describe how users and NetWare can use a directory. You
 can set the attributes to suit your work needs.
 1. Select the check box for the attribute you want to change.
    If the attribute was checked, it will be cleared. If the attribute was
    clear, it will be checked. Any attribute that is checked is in effect for
    this  directory.
 2. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 279. Directory Attributes List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Attributes List


 Directory attributes

    Delete Inhibit
    Don't Compress
    Don't Migrate
    Hidden
    Immediate Compress
    Purge
    Rename Inhibit
    System


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 280. Directory Attributes List - Pre-4.0 Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Attributes List - v2.x and v3.x directories


 Directory Attributes

    Delete Inhibit
    Hidden
    Purge
    Rename Inhibit
    System


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 281. View or change a file name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change a Filename


 The "Identification" page describes this file. For example, you can
 -  View the name of the file
 -  Change the name of the directory in one or all of the name spaces used
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    See What Name Spaces are Used on this Volume
    See What this File is Called in Each Available Name Space
    Rename the File
 Description of name space formats

    "DOS" is used by IBM PC and compatibles, including Windows.

    "Macintosh" is used by all Apple Macintosh computers.

    "FTAM" is a standard file system used by many mainframe and minicomputers.

    "NFS" (Network Filing System) is used by Unix and RISC workstations.

    "OS/2" is used by the IBM OS/2 Operating System on IBM PC and compatibles
       for  OS/2 High Performance File System. Files and directories can have
       long names  and properties similar to those used by Directory Services
       objects.

 Related topics

    Trustees and Trustee Paths



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 282. Rename a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rename a File


 1. Select the "New name" field.
 2. Enter a new name for the file.
 3. (Optional) To rename all name spaces, select "Rename all name spaces using
    new name."
 4. (Optional) To rename only one name space:
    4a.Select a name space in the box above the "New name" field.
    4b.Select "Rename only selected name space."
 5. Choose "Rename."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 283. File Facts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Facts


 The "Facts" page shows statistical information about this file. For example,
 you can
 -  View the date and time this file was created
 -  Change the owner of this file
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Change the Creation Date and Time
    Change the Owner of the File
    Change the Date or Time the File Was Last Modified
    Change the Date or Time the File Was Last Archived
    Change Who Last Archived the File
    Change the Search Mode for the File

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Size" shows the space used by this file in bytes

    "Created date and time" shows when the file was first created

    "Owner" field shows the owner of this file

    "Last Modified date and time" shows when the file was last modified

    "Modifier" field shows who last modified the file

    "Last Accessed date and time" shows when the file was last accessed

    "Last Archived date and time" shows when the this file was last archived.
       This  field and the "Archiver" field are set whenever the Archive
       attribute of this  file is reset by a backup application.

    "Archiver" field shows who last archived the file

    "Search Mode" shows how this file will be treated when using the Search
       feature.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 284. Search Mode of a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Search Mode


 A search mode determines how NetWare looks for files that it needs, such as
 data files or auxilliary program files. A search mode can be defined for any
 file, but only application files (files with an .EXE or .COM extension in DOS)
 really use them.
 A NET.CFG file can contain a search mode that applies to all files unless a
 different search mode is specified for a particular file
 When an application requests a file, it can include a path with the filename,
 or just the filename. It can also specify that the file is to be read, but not
 written to. This is called a Read Only open.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Shell default" uses the search mode defined in the user's NET.CFG file.
       (Equivalent to value 0 in the text utilities)

    "Search on all opens with no path" looks for the desired file first in the
       default (current) directory, and then in each search drive. (Equivalent
       to  value 5 in the text utilities)

    "Do not search" looks for the desired file only in the path included with
       the  filename and in the default (current) directory. Search drives are
       not checked.  (Equivalent to value 2 in the text utilities.)

    "Search on read only with no path" looks for the desired file first in the
       default (current) directory, and then, if the file is to be opened for
       Read  Only, in each search drive. (Equivalent to value 7 in the text
       utilities)

    "Search on all opens" looks for the desired file first in the path
       specified with  the file, then in the default (current) directory, and
       then in each search  drive. (Equivalent to value 1 in the text
       utilities)

    "Search on all read only opens" looks for the desired file first in the
       path  specified with the file, then in the default (current) directory,
       and then, if  the file is to be opened for Read Only, in each search
       drive. (Equivalent to  value 3 in the text utilities)



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 285. Change the Creation Date and Time of a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Creation Date and Time of a File


 1. Select the section of the "Creation date and time" field at the top of the
    dialog that you want to change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decreases the date or time further in the past.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 286. Change the Owner of a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Owner of a File


 1. Select the "Owner" field.
 2. Enter the name of the User that should be the owner of this file. You can
    do  this by
    2a.Typing the name in the field or
    2b.Choosing the icon to the right of the field  to choose a User object.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 287. Change the Last Modified Date of a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Last Modified Date of a File


 1. Select the section of the "Modified date and time" field that you want to
    change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decreases the date or time further in the past.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 288. Change the Last Archived Date and Time of a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Last Archived Date and Time of a File


 1. Select the section of the "Archived date and time" field that you want to
    change.
 2. Choose the arrow to the right of the field that you selected.
    2a.The Up arrow advances the date or time further in the future.
    2b.The Down arrow decreases the date or time further in the past.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 289. Change Who Last Archived a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Who Last Archived a File


 1. Select the "Archiver" field.
 2. Enter the name of the User that last archived (backed up) this file. You
    can  do this by
    2a.Typing the name in the field shown or
    2b.Choosing the icon to the right of the field  to choose a User object
       from the Browser.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 290. Change the Search Mode of a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Search Mode of a File


 1. Select the Down arrow on the right side of the "Search Mode" field.
    A drop box appears listing the options that you can choose from.
 2. Select a search mode option
    The drop box closes and the option you selected is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 291. File Attributes - Pre-4.0 Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Attributes -v2.x and v3.x Files


 The "Attributes" page shows attribute information about this file. Any
 attribute that is checked is in effect for this file. For example, you can
 -  See which attributes are assigned to this file
 -  Change attributes of this file
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Change the File Attributes

 Screen regions and buttons
    File Attributes Shows the attributes of this file.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 292. File Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Attributes


 The "Attributes" page shows attribute information about this file you
 selected.  Any attribute that is checked is in effect for this file. For
 example, you can
 -  See which attributes are assigned to this file
 -  Change attributes of this file
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Change the File Attributes

 Screen regions and buttons
    File Attributes shows the attributes of this file.
    File Flags shows the flags that NetWare has set for this file.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 293. Change the File Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the File Attributes


 File attributes describe how users and NetWare use a file. You can set the
 attributes to suit your work needs.
 1. Choose the the attribute you want to change.
    If the attribute was checked, it will be cleared. If the attribute was
    clear, it will be checked. Any attribute that is checked is in effect for
    this  file.
 2. Choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 294. File Attributes List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Attributes List


 File attributes

    Archive Needed
    Copy Inhibit
    Delete Inhibit
    Don't Compress
    Don't Migrate
    Execute Only
    Hidden
    Immediate Compress
    Indexed
    Purge
    Read Audit
    Read Only
    Rename Inhibit
    Shareable
    System
    Transactional
    Write Audit


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 295. File Flags List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Flags List


 File flags are like file attributes, but you cannot set them. They are set by
 NetWare to indicate the current state of the file.
 File flags

    Can't Compress
    File Compressed
    File Migrated


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 296. File Attributes List - pre-4.0 Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Attributes List - v2.x and v3.x files


 File attributes

    Archive Needed
    Copy Inhibit
    Delete Inhibit
    Execute Only
    Hidden
    Indexed
    Migrated
    Purge
    Read Audit
    Read Only
    Rename Inhibit
    Shareable
    System
    Transactional
    Write Audit


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 297. Create a User object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Create a User Object

 A User object represents a user on the network. A User object must exist for
 every user who will log in to the network.
 Users on 4.0 client workstations can be created anywhere in the Directory
 tree,  though they must know where they are to log in. Users on non-4.0 client
 workstations must be located in the same container as the server that runs
 bindery emulation for them.
 To create a user

 1. Type the user's name in "Login name."
    This is the name that the user will use to log in to the network (this name
    appears in the Directory tree).
    You must follow the user naming conventions.
    Use Tab or the mouse to move to the next field. Enter will not work.
 2. Type the user's surname in "Last name."
 3. (Optional) To complete the fields of this new User with the information
    entered in the USER_TEMPLATE for this container, select "Use User
    Defaults."
    If this container does not have a USER_TEMPLATE object, this selection is
    grayed.
 4. (Optional) To define additional information about this User immediately
    after creating it, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another User."
 5. (Optional) To create another User immediately after this one, select
    "Create  Another User."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 6. (Optional) To automatically create a home directory for this User when it
    is  created, select "Create Home Directory."
    If you select this option, you must also define a path and directory name
    for the User's home directory.
    If you select this option, this User is granted all rights to this
    directory.
    6a.Choose the Browser icon  to the right of the "Path" field to select a
       volume (root directory) or other subdirectory that will hold this user's
       home  directory.
    6b.Type a directory name in the "Home Directory" field.
    The User's login name is generally used as the directory name.
 7. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the User object dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create another Profile," this "Create User Object" dialog
    appears again.
    If you selected "Create Home Directory," a directory is created on the
    selected volume. You see no evidence of this new directory on the screen.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Login name" is the name of this User object and the name the user enters
       to log  in to the network.

    "Last name" shows the user's last name, or other identification information
       that you have chosen to store in this field.

    "Use User Defaults" applies default values to properties for this User.

    "Define Additional Properties" lets you define more information about this
       User  immediately after creating it, such as a password or login script
       commands.

    "Create another User" repeats this dialog rather than returning to the
       Browser.

    "Create Home Directory" creates the directory described in "Path" and "Home
       Directory" and grants this user a trustee assignment to that directory.
       This  gives the new user a place to work immediately.

    "Path" lets you choose a path on a volume where you want to create the home
       directory for this user. A path such as \USERS or \HOME is often used to
       hold  all users' home directories. This field is only used if "Create
       Home Directory"  is selected.

    "Home Directory" is the name of the directory that is created for this
       user,  and to which this user is granted rights, if "Create Home
       Directory" is  selected.

    "Create" creates the new User.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a User.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 298. Use User Defaults when Creating a User Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Use the User Template when Creating a User Object

 User defaults are the information contained in the USER_TEMPLATE object. This
 object can be created in two ways:
 -  Select "Define User Defaults." When creating an Organizational Unit object,
    select "Define User Defaults."
 -  Choose "User Defaults" from the "Object" menu after creating an
    Organizational Unit object.
 You cannot apply user defaults to existing users. If you change the user
 defaults, the changes apply only to the Users created after that; they do not
 apply to Users that were previously created using user defaults.
 You can use defaults to complete general User information, then make changes
 to  some fields in the User Object dialog. The USER_TEMPLATE object includes
 information for the following pages:
    Identification
    Environment
    Login restrictions
    Password restrictions
    Login Time restrictions
    Login script
    Network Address
    Group Membership
    Security Equals
    Postal Address
    Account Balance
    See Also

 Procedures
    View or Change the User Defaults of a Container


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 299. View or Change the User Defaults of a Container ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change the User Defaults of a Container


 1. Choose the Organizational Unit object that will contain new users that
    these  defaults should be applied to.
 2. Choose "User Defaults" from the "Object" menu.
    If "Define User Defaults" was selected when this Organizational Unit was
    created, you edit the user defaults. If "Define User Defaults" was not
    selected, the programs creates a new object called USER_TEMPLATE which you
    can  edit.
 3. Enter or change information in the appropriate pages.
 4. Choose "OK."
 Related topics

    Using User Defaults when Creating a User Object
    Using the Pages of the Object Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 300. User - Login Name Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Login Name of a User


 The login name is the name that the user enters to log in to the network (this
 name appears in the Directory tree). Your organization should standardize how
 new login names are entered. For example, everyone should use first initial
 and  last name, or first name (a small organization), or last name, or first
 and  last name with an underscore.
 Other identification information can be stored in the "Last Name" field in the
 "Create User" dialog, or in the "Other Names" field. Both of these fields can
 contain multiple values and can be edited in the "Identification" page of the
 User Object dialog.
 Login Name Restrictions

 -  The login name must be unique in the branch (container) of the Directory
    tree where the User is located.
    Example: If users Debra Jones and David Jones are in the same
    Organizational  Unit, only one of them can use the login name "djones."
    However, if they are in  different containers, they can use the same login
    name.
 -  The login name can be up to 64 characters in length.
 -  Any special characters can be used, unless this user needs to log in from a
    non-NetWare 4.0 client workstation, in which case you should avoid special
    characters (see below).
 Note: If you have workstations using different languages, you should only use
 characters that appear in the code page of all languages. Otherwise, a name
 entered when creating an object in England, for example, will contain
 unreadable characters when viewed in Japan, because the characters of the name
 are not available on the Japan code page. See your DOS or OS/2 manual for more
 information about code pages.
 -  Names are displayed with upper and lower case as they were first entered,
    but they are not case sensitive. So DJones and DJONES are considered to be
    identical names.
 -  Spaces and underscores can both be used, and they will be displayed as they
    were first entered, but they are considered to be the same. So Dave_Jones
    and  Dave Jones are the same.
 Note: If you use spaces in an object name, you must always enclose the object
 name in quotation marks when entering it on the command line or in login
 scripts. For this reason, you may want to avoid spaces in object names.
 Login Name Restrictions for Bindery Emulation

 When creating users who will log in from a non-NetWare v4.0 workstation, the
 names of User objects must match bindery naming rules, or the user will not be
 able to log in.
 -  Spaces in object names are replaced by underscores in Bindery Emulation
 -  Object names longer than 47 characters are cut off after the 47th character
 -  The following characters cannot be used in an object name that must be
    access from a non-NetWare v4.0 workstation:
       /      Slash
       \      Backslash
       :      Colon
       ,      Comma
       *      Asterisk
       ?      Question mark



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 301. User - Last Name Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Last Name of a User


 You must enter a value in the "Last Name" field. This can be any
 identification  information that you need.
 If you open an object dialog for this User after creating it, you can enter
 multiple values in this field. This can be very helpful when searching for
 objects with particular values.
 Example: David Jones logs in as "djones." To find him when searching for all
 users named Jones, you enter "Jones" in the "Last name" field.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 302. Object Naming Conventions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Naming Conventions


 Although you can use almost anything for an object name, it will simplify
 network management and reduce users' problems if you use simple, relatively
 short object names.
 The rules below apply to most objects, including Users, Volumes,
 Organizations,  and Organizational Units. Special rules apply to Country
 objects, which can  only have a two-character name, and to NetWare Server
 objects. More information  is also provided elsewhere for User object names
 (Login Names).
 Object Name Restrictions

 -  The name must be unique in the branch (container) of the Directory tree
    where the object is located.
    Example: If users Debra Jones and David Jones are in the same
    Organizational  Unit, only one of them can use the object name "djones."
    However, if they are  in different containers, they can use the same object
    name.
 -  The object name can be up to 64 characters in length.
 -  Any special characters can be used, unless this object needs to be accessed
    from a non-NetWare 4.0 client workstation, in which case you should avoid
    special characters.
 Note: A few special characters like plus (+), equals (=), and period(.) must
 be  preceded in the object name by a backslash. Avoid these characters if
 possible.
 Note: If you have workstations using different languages, you should only use
 characters that appear in the code page of all languages. Otherwise, a name
 entered when creating an object in England, for example, will contain
 unreadable characters when viewed in Japan, because the characters of the name
 are not available on the Japan code page. See your DOS or OS/2 manual for more
 information about code pages.
 -  Object names are displayed with upper and lower case as they were first
    entered, but they are not case sensitive. So ManagerProfile and
    MANAGERPROFILE  are considered to be identical names.
 -  Spaces and underscores can both be used, and they will be displayed as they
    were first entered, but they are considered to be the same. So
    Manager_Profile  and Manager Profile are the same..
 Note: If you use spaces in an object name, you must always enclose the object
 name in quotation marks when entering it on the command line or in login
 scripts. For this reason, you may want to avoid spaces in object names.
 Object Name Restrictions for Bindery Emulation

 When creating objects that will be accessed from a non-NetWare 4.0 client
 workstation through bindery emulation, the names of objects must match bindery
 naming rules, or the non-4.0 client cannot see them.
 -  Spaces in object names are replaced by underscores in Bindery Emulation
 -  Object names longer than 47 characters are cut off after the 47th character
 -  The following characters cannot be used in an object name that must be
    access from a non-NetWare v4.0 workstation:
       /      Slash
       \      Backslash
       :      Colon
       ,      Comma
       *      Asterisk
       ?      Question mark


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 303. NetWare Server Object Naming Conventions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetWare Server Object Naming Conventions


 The general object naming rules allow more flexibility than those for naming a
 NetWare Server object.
 NetWare Server Name Restrictions

 -  Every object name must be unique within its container. There cannot be two
    objects named TEST in the same container.
 -  The first NetWare Server object for a NetWare 4.0 server must be created
    with the INSTALL.NLM. The object will be given the same name as the
    physical  server. Rules for naming physical servers are in the <F1> help
    system of  INSTALL.NLM.
 -  If you create another NetWare Server object that points to the same NetWare
    4.0 server, it must have the same name as the original NetWare Server
    object,  which was the physical server name. Because the objects have the
    same name,  they must be in different containers.
 -  If you create a NetWare Server for a non-NetWare 4.0 server, you must use
    the physical server name as well, because Directory Services must search
    for  the server on the network to verify its existence.
 -  Because of these restrictions, you can never rename a NetWare Server
    object,  even if you have the Supervisor object right to it.
 -  Naming rules for physical servers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 304. Naming Rules for Physical Servers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Physical Server Naming Rules


 These rules are provided as information only. Every NetWare Server object must
 be named by an existing physical server that was created with INSTALL.NLM at
 the server console. You also cannot rename a NetWare Server object.
 The physical name of a NetWare server:
    must be 2 to 47 characters long
    can contain letters A-Z, numbers 0-9, hyphens, periods, and underscores
    cannot have a period as the first character


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 305. Naming Rules for Physical Volumes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Physical Volume Naming Rules


 These rules are provided as information only. Every NetWare volume must be
 installed at the server console and given a physical volume name at that time.
 A Volume object that points to this physical volume contains the physical
 volume name as a property, though the Volume object can be named anything that
 follows the object naming conventions.
 The physical name of a NetWare volume:
    must be 2 to 15 characters long
    can contain letters A-Z, numbers 0-9, hyphens, periods, and underscores
    cannot have a period as the first character
    cannot contain spaces, colons, asterisks, question marks, or backslashes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 306. Create a Volume Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Volume Object


 A Volume object provides a place in the Directory database to record and view
 information about a physical volume that was installed on a NetWare Server.
 By creating a Volume object and "pointing it" to a physical volume, you can
 see  the directories and files on the volume from within the NetWare
 Administrator  and other utilities.
 Volume is a leaf object. Directories and files on the physical volume are
 shown  under it, however.
 To create a new Volume object

 1. Type a name for this Volume object in the "Volume name" text box.
    We recommend that you use the Server_PhysicalVolumeName for Volume names.
    The only requirement, however, is that you follow the object naming
    conventions.
 2. Select the "Host server" text box.
 3. Choose the "Browser" icon .
 4. Select the NetWare Server on which you want to create this Volume object.
    The server must already exist.
 5. Enter the volume's physical name in the "Physical volume name" text box.
    You can type the name or choose one from the drop box. The drop box lists
    the physical volumes that have been installed on the NetWare server
    selected in  step 4.
 6. (Optional) To define additional information about this Volume right now,
    select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another volume."
 7. (Optional) To create another Volume immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Volume."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 8. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Volume object dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create another volume," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Volume Name" is the name of the Volume as it will appear in the Browser.

    "Host Server" is the name of the NetWare Server to which the physical
       volume is  attached. The NetWare Server must already exist.

    "Physical Volume Name" is the name of the volume that was recorded when the
       volume  was first initialized at the server (for example, SYS:).

    "Define Additional Properties" allows you to define more information about
       this  volume immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Volume" repeats this dialog box rather than returning to
       the  Browser.

    "Create" creates the new Volume.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Volume.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 307. Create a Volume object, name field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Volume Object - Naming a Volume Object


 This is the name of the Volume object for Directory Services. It can be any
 valid object name.
 This name can include
 -  The name of the area where this volume is used
 -  The server it resides in
 -  Its physical name
 The Volume object name is not the same thing as the physical volume name,
 although you can use the same name for both.
 Example: The name of the physical volume is SYS:. You create the new Volume
 object under the MARKETING Organizational Unit. To describe its location, you
 name the Volume object MARKETING_SYS.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 308. Create a NetWare server object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a NetWare Server Object


 A NetWare Server object provides Directory Services with a way to refer to a
 physical server. Information is stored in the NetWare Server object's
 properties about the physical location of the server, what services it
 provides, and how those resources are used and accounted for.
 You must use INSTALL.NLM on each NetWare 4.0 Server to create the first
 NetWare  Server object for each physical server. After that, you can create
 other  NetWare Server objects that point to the same physical server as the
 NetWare  Server object that was created with INSTALL.NLM. Multiple NetWare
 Server  objects pointing to the same physical server cannot be in the same
 container,  however.
 You can create a NetWare Server object that points to a NetWare 3.x or NetWare
 2.x server at any time. NetWare Server is a leaf object.
 To create a new NetWare Server object under the selected container

 1. Type a name for this NetWare Server in the "Server name" text box.
    You must follow the NetWare Server object naming conventions.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this NetWare Server right
    now, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another NetWare Server."
 3. (Optional) To create another NetWare Server object immediately after this
    one, select "Create Another NetWare Server."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the NetWare Server object
    dialog appears.
    If you selected "Create another NetWare Server," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Server Name" shows the name of the NetWare server.

    "Define Additional Properties" allows you to define more information about
       this  NetWare Server immediately after creating it, such as which
       services it  provides.

    "Create Another NetWare Server" repeats this dialog rather than returning
       to the  Browser.

    "Create" creates the new NetWare Server.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a NetWare Server.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 309. Create an AFP Server object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create an AFP Server Object


 AFP Server is a leaf object.
 To create a new AFP Server object

 1. Type a name for this AFP Server in the "Server name" text box.
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this AFP Server object
    right now, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another AFP Server."
 3. (Optional) To create another AFP Server immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Server."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the AFP Server object
    dialog  appears.
    If you selected "Create another NetWare Server," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Server Name" shows the name of the AFP Server.

    "Define Additional Properties" lets you define more information about this
       AFP  Server immediately after creating it.

    "Create another AFP Server" repeats this dialog rather than returning to
       the  Browser.

    "Create" creates the new AFP Server.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating an AFP Server.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 310. Create a Computer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Computer Object


 A Computer object keeps track of computers on the network.
 Computer is a leaf object.
 To create a new Computer object

 1. Type a name for this Computer in the "Computer name" text box.
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about the Computer right now,
    select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Computer."
 3. (Optional) To create another Computer immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Computer."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Computer object dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create another Computer," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Computer name" displays the name for this Computer.

    "Define Additional Properties" lets you define more information about this
       Computer immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Computer" repeats this dialog rather than returning to the
       Browser.

    "Create" creates the new Computer.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Computer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 311. Create a Country Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Country Object


 You must select the [Root] object before creating a Country object. A Country
 object
 -  Designates the countries where your network resides
 -  Organize other Directory Services objects within the Country object
 Country is a container object. You can create a Country object only under the
 root object. Country is higher than Organization and Organizational Unit
 objects.
 To create a new Country object

 1. Type the two-letter ISO country code for this Country in the "Country name"
    text box.
    You should use the appropriate two-letter ISO code; only two characters can
    be entered as a Country name. Use the Description field of the object
    dialog to  enter the country's full name.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this Country right now,
    select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Country."
 3. (Optional) To create another Country immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Country."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Country object dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create another Country," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Country name" displays the lm margin=4.two-letter country code that
       designates the country.  The full name of the country can be entered in
       other properties of the object  using the Object dialog.

    "Define Additional Properties" allows you to define more information about
       this  Country immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Country" repeats this dialog rather than returning to the
       Browser.

    "Create" creates the new Country.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Country.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 312. Naming a country object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Two-Letter Country Codes

 Country objects can only use two characters as an object name. You should use
 the appropriate two-letter ISO country code below. Use the Description field
 of  the object dialog to enter the country's full name.
 Some common ISO country codes are:
    Argentina - AR
    Australia - AU
    Austria - AT
    Belgium - BE
    Brazil - BR
    Canada - CA
    China - CN
    Denmark - DK
    Finland - FI
    France - FR
    Germany - DD
    Greece - GR
    Hong Kong - HK
    Ireland - IE
    Israel - IL
    Italy - IT
    Mexico - MX
    Netherlands - NL
    Norway - NO
    Portugal - PT
    Puerto Rico - PR
    Singapore - SG
    South Africa - ZA
    Spain - ES
    Sweden - SE
    Switzerland - CH
    Taiwan - TW
    United Kingdom - GB
    United States - US
    Venezuela - VE


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 313. Create a Group Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Group Object


 A Group object assigns a name to a list of users located anywhere in the
 Directory tree. Group is a leaf object.
 You can grant rights to a Group object, rather that granting rights to all of
 the users in the Group individually. These rights transfer automatically to
 the  Users listed in the Group by security equivalence.
 Use Groups when the membership of the group will remain fairly constant, but
 the rights granted to the group need to be updated regularly.
 To create a new Group object

 1. Type a name for this Group in the "Group name" text box.
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this Group right now,
    select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Group."
 3. (Optional) To create another Group immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Group."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Group object dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create another Group," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Group name" displays the name of the Group.

    "Define Additional Properties" lets you define more information about this
       Group  immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Group" repeats this dialog rather than returning to the
       Browser.

    "Create" creates the new Group.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Group.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 314. Create an Organizational Role Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create an Organizational Role Object


 An Organizational Role object defines a position that can be filled by
 different people, such as Team Leader or Print Manager.
 You can grant rights to an Organizational Role object, rather that granting
 rights to the occupant of the Organizational Role. These rights transfer
 automatically to the Users listed as Occupants of the Organizational Role by
 security equivalence. If the person acting in a role changes, the trustee
 assignments do not have to be changed; only the occupant field of the
 Organizational Role.
 Use Organizational Roles when the occupant of the position may change at
 times,  but the rights granted to whoever occupies that position will not
 change.
 Organizational Role is a leaf object.
 To create a new Organizational Role object

 1. Type a name for this Organizational Role in the "Organizational Role name"
    text box.
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this Organizational Role
    right now, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Organizational Role."
 3. (Optional) To create another Organizational Role immediately after this
    one,  select "Create Another Organizational Role."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Organizational Role
    object dialog appears.
    If you selected "Create another Organizational Role," this dialog appears
    again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Organizational Role name" accepts the title or position of this role (such
       as Team  Leader).

    "Define Additional Properties" allows you to define more information about
       this  Organizational Role immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Organizational Role" repeats this dialog rather than
       returning to  the Browser.

    "Create" creates the new Organizational Role.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating an Organizational Role.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 315. Create an Organizational Unit Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create an Organizational Unit Object


 Use an Organizational Unit to
 -  Organize other objects into medium sized entities such as a department
    within a company
 -  Set user defaults for users created in this container
 Organizational Unit is a container object and can be created only under an
 Organization or another Organizational Unit.
 To create a new Organizational Unit object

 1. Type a name for this Organizational Unit in the "Organizational Unit name"
    text box.
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this Organizational Unit
    right now, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Organizational Unit."
 3. (Optional) To create another Organizational Unit immediately after this
    one,  select "Create Another Organizational Unit."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. (Optional) To define user defaults for users that will be created later in
    this Organizational Unit, select "Define User Template."
 5. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Organizational Unit
    object dialog appears.
    If you selected "Create another Organizational Unit," this dialog appears
    again.
    If you selected "Define User Template," the object dialog for a new
    USER_TEMPLATE object appears. Enter default information in the pages of
    this  dialog. If a user template exists in the parent container, you will
    be asked if  you want to copy that information into this user template. You
    can then change  it as needed.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Organizational Unit name" is where you enter a name for this
       Organizational Unit.

    "Define Additional Properties" allows you to define more information about
       this  Organizational Unit immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Organizational Unit" repeats this dialog rather than
       returning to  the Browser.

    "Define User Template" allows you to enter default information for users
       that you  create later in this Organizational Unit. A new object,
       USER_TEMPLATE, is  created, and you enter default information in the
       fields of its object dialog.

    "Create" creates the new Organizational Unit.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Organizational Unit.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 316. Create an Organization Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create an Organization Object


 Use an Organization to
 -  Organize other objects into large entities such as a company or operating
    division of a company.
 Organization is a container object and can be created only under the root
 object or a Country object. One Organization cannot contain another
 Organization.
 To create a new Organization object

 1. Type a name for this Organization in the "Organization name" text box.
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this Organization right
    now, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Organization."
 3. (Optional) To create another Organization immediately after this one,
    select  "Create Another Organization."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. (Optional) To define user defaults for users that will be created later in
    this Organization, select "Define User Template."
 5. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Organization object
    dialog appears.
    If you selected "Create another Organization," this dialog appears again.
    If you selected "Define User Template," the object dialog for a new
    USER_TEMPLATE object appears. Enter default information in the pages of
    this  dialog. If a user template exists in the parent container, you will
    be asked if  you want to copy that information into this user template. You
    can then change  it as needed.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Organization name" is where you enter a name for this Organization.

    "Define Additional Properties" allows you to define more information about
       this  Organization immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Organization" repeats this dialog rather than returning to
       the  Browser.

    "Define User Template" allows you to enter default information for users
       that you  create later in this Organization. A new object,
       USER_TEMPLATE, is created, and  you enter default information in the
       fields of its object dialog.

    "Create" creates the new Organization.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Organization.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 317. Create a Directory Map object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Directory Map Object


 A Directory Map object refers to a directory path on a volume.You can't look
 at  the directory path from the Directory Map, but login scripts can use the
 MAP  command with a Directory Map to record the location of frequently used
 applications. If the application moves, only the Directory Map must be
 changed;  all login scripts can remain the same.
 Directory map is a leaf object.
 To create a new Directory Map

 1. Type a name for this Directory Map in the "Directory Map Name" text box.
    Use a name that shows what this Directory Map will be used for, such as
    what  application it points to, or which volume and path it uses (example
    object  name: SPREADSHEET_PATH). The volume and path are entered after the
    object is  created.
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. Select the Browser button to the right of the "Volume" field and select the
    volume that this Directory Map will point to.
 3. In the "Path" field, type a path name for the directory that this Directory
    Map will point to.
 4. (Optional) To define additional information about this Directory Map right
    now, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Directory Map."
 5. (Optional) To create another Directory Map immediately after this one,
    select "Create Another Directory Map."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 6. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Directory Map Object
    dialog appears.
    If you selected "Create another Directory Map," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Directory Map Name" shows the name of the Directory Map.

    "Volume" specifies the volume that this Directory Map points to.

    "Path" specifies the path on the selected volume that this Directory Map
       refers  to.

    "Define Additional Properties" lets you define more information about this
       Directory Map immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Directory Map" repeats this dialog rather than returning to
       the  Browser.

    "Create" creates the new Directory Map.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Directory Map.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 318. Create an Alias object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create an Alias Object


 An Alias object refers to another object in the Directory tree and makes it
 appear as if the object that it names actually exists in the Directory tree
 where the Alias is created.
 Although an object appears both where it was first created and where an Alias
 was created referring to it, only one copy of the object really exists, and
 changes made to either object affect what appears in both locations.
 Alias is a leaf object. The object that the Alias refers to, however, can be a
 container, so an Alias can appear to have objects beneath it.
 To create a new Alias object

 1. Type a name for this Alias in the "Alias Name" text box.
    If you are creating an alias that refers to Accounts, you might name it
    "Alias of Accounts."
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. Select the "Aliased object" text box.
 3. Choose the "Browser" icon.
 4. Select an object.
 5. (Optional) To create another Alias immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Alias."
    You cannot select "Define Additional Properties" for an Alias. The Alias
    object consists only of an Alias name and the name of the object that the
    Alias  points to.
 6. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Create another Alias," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Alias Name" is the name of the Alias.

    "Aliased object" is the name of the object that the Alias refers to. This
       object  appears where the Alias is created. The Aliased object can be
       anywhere in the  Directory tree. It can be a leaf or a container object.

    "Create another Alias" repeats this dialog instead of returning to the
       Browser.

    "Create" creates the new Alias.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating an Alias.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 319. Create an Alias object, Alias name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Alias Object - Naming an Alias


 This is the name of the Alias.
 An Alias shows another object (named in the "Aliased Object" field) from a
 different location; it does not create a copy of the object.
 Rights to the Aliased object will always be inherited from an object's true
 parent container, and not from the parent container of an Alias that points to
 it.
 Example: The CENTRAL Organizational Unit wants access to a Volume object
 contained by the SEATTLE Organizational Unit without changing their context to
 SEATTLE's part of the Directory tree. CENTRAL creates an Alias that refers to
 the Volume under SEATTLE. (The Volume is the Aliased object.)
 Now CENTRAL can see and use the volume in SEATTLE without changing their
 current context. Any changes made by CENTRAL still occur on the Volume object
 in SEATTLE's area of the Directory tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 320. Create an Alias object, aliased object name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Alias Object - Setting an Aliased Object Name


 This is the name of the object that the Alias object refers to. It can be a
 container or a leaf object, depending on whether you want to see an entire
 branch of the Directory tree at this location, or just one object.
 An Alias looks at the original object from a different location; it does not
 create a copy of the object. Rights to the aliased object will always be
 inherited from an object's true parent container, and not from the parent
 container of an Alias that points to it.
 Example: CENTRAL Organizational Unit wants to see information in the ITALY
 Organizational Unit without changing their context. Central office creates an
 Alias under the Central organizational unit that refers to the Milan Sales
 organizational unit object under Italy.
 Now Central can see everything under Milan Sales without changing their
 current  context. Any changes made by Central office still occur on the "real"
 objects  under ITALY in the Directory tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 321. Create a Profile object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Profile Object


 A Profile object stores a login script that is used by a group of users that
 need to share common login script commands, but who are not necessarily
 located  under the same container in the Directory tree.
 If a Profile is listed in the Login Script page of a User object, it is
 executed after the login script of the User's container object, but before the
 User's individual login script.
 Profile is a leaf object.
 To create a new Profile object

 1. Type a name for this Profile object in the "Profile Name" text box.
    You must follow the object naming conventions.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this Profile object right
    now, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Profile."
 3. (Optional) To create another Profile object immediately after this one,
    select "Create Another Profile."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Profile object dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create another Profile," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Profile Name" is the name of the profile object.

    "Define Additional Properties" lets you define more information about this
       Profile immediately after creating it

    "Create another Profile" repeats this dialog rather than returning to the
       Browser.

    "Create" creates the new Profile.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Profile.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 322. Create a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Directory


 Directories are not Directory Services objects. They are part of the file
 system, which is integrated with Directory Services in the NetWare
 Administrator utility. You can create a directory when you select a Volume or
 another directory.
 You can only create directories on a network volume, not on your local hard
 drive.
 To create a new directory

 1. Type a name for the directory in the "Name" text box.
    The name must follow the rules of the name space that you are using. If you
    are using DOS, for example, the name must be eight characters or fewer,
    with a  three character extension (for example, TESTNAME.TXT).
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this directory right now,
    select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create another Directory."
 3. (Optional) To create another directory immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Directory."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Directory dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create another Directory," this dialog appears again.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Directory Name" is the name of the directory.

    "Define Additional Properties" lets you define more information about this
       directory immediately after creating it.

    "Create another Directory" repeats this dialog rather than returning to the
       Browser.

    "Create" creates the new directory.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a directory.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 323. Create a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a File


 Use the NetWare Administrator to see information about files that already
 exist. You must use another application, such as a word processor, to create
 new files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 324. Using the NetWare Administrator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using the NetWare Administrator


 The NetWare Administrator is similar to a file manager, except that you also
 manage objects in the Directory database instead of only files.
 The Browser is the main work area in the NetWare Administrator. It displays
 the  name of each object and its corresponding icon.
 To work with an object, select it; then choose the task you want. There are
 several ways to complete tasks:
    Use Menu Options
    Double-Click on an Object
    Click the Right Mouse Button
    Drag and Drop Objects

 Procedures
    Change the Directory Context
    Create a New Object
    Move  Objects
    Move or Copy Files
    Include Certain Object Classes in the Browser
    Open Multiple Browser Windows
    Set Browser Defaults
    Use Menu Options
    Set the Preferred Name Space for Files and Directories
    View the Current Directory Context

 Screen regions and buttons
    Menu options let you choose tasks from pull-down menus.

    The Browser window displays objects in the Directory database in a tree
       structure that allows you to see their relationships to each other.

    The Hint Bar explains menu options as you select them.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 325. Browser Icon Explanation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Browser Icons


 Object icons show what class of object is displayed.
 Container objects

       Country
       Organization
       Organizational Unit
 Leaf objects

       Alias
       AFP Server
       Bindery object
       Computer
       Directory Map
       Group
       NetWare Server
       Organizational Role
       Printer
       Print Server
       Profile
       Queue
       User
       Volume



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 326. Double-click on an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double-Click on an Object


 When you double-click on an object (or press Enter after an object is
 selected), the NetWare Administrator performs the most logical action for that
 object at that place. The action depends on the object you choose.
 When you double-click on a container object, the Browser lists the objects
 contained in that object.
 When you double-click on a leaf object, the Browser opens an object dialog,
 unless the leaf object is a volume.
 When you double-click on a Volume object, the Browser lists directories and
 files in the root directory of that volume.
 Example: If you double-click on Organizational Unit SALES, SALES opens and
 shows the objects it contains. If you double-click on User object JORDAN, you
 see the object dialog for JORDAN. If you double-click on Volume MARKETING, you
 see the root directory of that volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 327. Use Menu Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use Menu Options


 Menus list all tasks that you can perform. To use most menu options, select
 the  object you want to work with, then choose the task from a pull-down menu.
 The  Hint Bar at the top of the screen explains each menu option when you
 select it.
 Example: To create Server SERVER1 under Organizational Unit SALES, select
 SALES; then choose "Create" from the "Object" menu.
 If a menu option is grayed, that option is not available (either because you
 do  not have rights to perform the action, or the object you selected doesn't
 allow  that option).
 Some menu options have ellipses, indicating that a dialog appears when that
 option is chosen.
 Menus

    Object
    View
    Options
    Tools
    Window
    Help


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 328. Object Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Menu Options


 Create
 Opens a dialog that allows you to select which class of object you want to
 create under the container you selected. If you selected a leaf object or do
 not have rights to create an object under this container, the "Create" option
 will be grayed. You can use this option to create directories on a Volume as
 well.

 Trustees of this Object
 Opens a dialog that shows which objects have rights to the object you
 selected.  You can also set the object's Inherited Rights Filter or see other
 object's  effective rights to this object.
 Use the "Rights to Other Objects" option to see which objects this object has
 rights to.

 Rights to Other Objects
 After you specify which part of the Directory tree to look at, a dialog opens
 that shows what the selected object has rights to. There is a delay when you
 choose this option while all objects in the selected part of the Directory
 tree  are searched for trustee assignments that include the selected object.
 To see who has rights to this object, use the "Trustees of this Object"
 option.

 Salvage
 Opens a dialog that allows you to recover or permanently delete (purge)
 previously deleted files. You must select a Volume object or directory within
 a  Volume before choosing this option.

 Details
 Opens an object dialog that allows you to see information about the object,
 file, or directory. The type of information you can view or change varies
 according to the object you select. The same dialog will open if you
 double-click on a leaf object.

 Move
 Allows you to move the selected leaf objects or files to another location. You
 can select multiple leaf objects or files, and select a destination in the
 dialog that appears when this menu item is chosen.

 Copy
 Allows you to make a copy of a file. You can select multiple files. You select
 a destination in the dialog that appears when this menu item is chosen.

 Rename
 Opens a dialog that allows you to rename any object, file, or directory. If
 you  rename an object, you can choose to save the object's old name in the
 Other  Names property for future reference.

 Delete
 Deletes the selected object. Once you have deleted an object, you cannot
 recover it. A container can only be deleted if it is empty except for the
 USER_TEMPLATE object. You cannot delete the USER_TEMPLATE object; it is
 deleted  when its container is deleted..

 User Default
 Provides a pattern for User objects created under the selected container. You
 can change the pattern and apply it to new User objects.

 Search
 Allows you to search a branch of the Directory tree for objects matching a
 pattern that you specify.

 Exit
 Closes the NetWare Administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 329. View Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View Menu Options


 These settings control how the Browser displays objects

 Show Hints
 If this option is checked, a one-line description of each menu item is
 displayed at the top of the screen as you scroll through each menu item. You
 can select this menu item to turn the hints on or off.

 Set Context
 Opens a dialog box which allows you to change which part of the Directory tree
 you are viewing.

 Include
 Opens a dialog box which allows you to limit by name or by object type the
 objects  you see in the Browser, or limit by name the files and directories
 you see when  you view a Volume object's files and directories. Use this
 option if you have a  large number of items to display.
 For example, you could select to see all User, Group, and Printer objects
 whose names include S and R, and select to see files and directories whose
 names inlcude P, T, and S.

  Sort
 Opens a dialog box which allows you to set the order in which the classes of
 objects appear in the Browser.
 For example, if you want to see users listed first, groups listed second,
 volumes third, and so on, move users to the top, groups second, etc. in the
 Sort list box.

  Expand
 Opens the container object that you have selected. The container remains
 selected.

 Collapse
 Closes the container that you have selected. The container remains selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 330. Console Preferences Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options Menu


 Confirmations
 Opens a dialog box that lets you decide whether to see a confirmation box when
 you delete an object, file, or directory. You cannot recover deleted objects,
 so you should set this to confirm deletions.
 Your choice will apply every time you open the NetWare Administrator, until
 you  make another change in this dialog.

 Preferred Name Space
 Opens a dialog that lets you set the name spaces used to display files and
 directories. If the name space that you select is not available on a volume,
 the default name space, DOS, is used to display the files and directories on
 that volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 331. Console Tools Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Tools Menu


 Browser
 Opens another Browser window with the selected object as the first object in
 the new window.

 Partition Manager
 Starts the Partition Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 332. Console Windows Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window Menu


 Cascade
 Arrange all Browser windows in overlapping style (so the title bar of each
 window can still be seen).

 Tile
 Arrange all Browser windows in tile style, like a checkerboard. Each window is
 smaller, but none overlap.

 Close all
 Close all Browser windows. To open a window to view the Directory tree again,
 you must choose "Browser" from the "Tools" menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 333. Console Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Menu


 Contents
 Lists all topics available in Help. These topics link to procedures and
 descriptions of all parts of the NetWare Administrator.

 Glossary
 Lists all glossary terms used in the online help.

 Error Messages
 Shows a description of error messages that can appear in the NetWare
 Administrator.

 About NetWare Administrator
 Gives version and copyright information about the NetWare Administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 334. Use the Right Mouse Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Right-Click on an Object


 When you click the right mouse button on an object, a menu appears next to the
 object. The menu lists options for all tasks you can complete with that object
 at that point. Choose the option for the task you want to complete.
 If a task is grayed, you cannot perform that task on that object, either
 because of the object type, or because you do not have rights.
 To close the menu without selecting anything, click the left mouse button.
 Example: You need to work with organizational unit SALES. Select SALES; then
 click the right mouse button. A menu appears listing all the tasks you can do
 with SALES at that point.


 Details
 Opens an object dialog for the selected object. Functions like "Details" on
 the  "Object" menu.

 Set as Context
 Sets the current Browser's context to the selected object, so that the
 selected  object is the first object in the Browser window. Equivalent to
 choosing "Set  Context" from the "View" menu and entering the selected object
 in the "New  Context" field.

 Trustees of this Object
 Opens the "Trustees" dialog for the selected object, where all objects that
 have a trustee assignment to the selected object are listed. Trustees rights
 and the Inherited Rights Filter can be changed from this dialog. Functions
 like  "Trustees of this Object" on the "Object" menu.

 Browse
 Only valid when a container object is selected. Opens a new Browser window
 with  the selected container as the first object, and listing all object
 within that  container.

 Create...
 Only valid when a container object, Volume object, or directory is selected.
 Opens a dialog that allows you to create a new object or directory below the
 selected point. Functions like "Create" on the "Object" menu.

 Delete
 Only valid when a leaf object, file, or empty container or directory is
 selected. Deletes the selected object after displaying a confirmation box (if
 selected in options). Functions like "Delete" in the "Object" menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 335. Drag and Drop Objects, Files, or Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Drag and Drop Operations


 Drag and Drop Objects

 If you drag one object onto another object, the NetWare Administrator makes
 the  object that you dragged a trustee of the object that you dropped on.
 If you have rights to add trustees to the object you landed on, the "Trustees
 of this Object" dialog for the object you landed on opens and the object that
 you dragged is added as a trustee.

 Shift-Drag and Drop Objects
 If you hold down the "Shift" key while you drag one object onto another
 object,  the NetWare Administrator makes the object that you landed on a
 trustee of the  object that you dragged.
 If you have rights to add trustees to the object that you dragged, the "Rights
 to Other Objects" dialog opens for the object you dragged, and the object that
 you landed on is added as a trustee.


 Moving Objects
 Leaf objects can be moved to a new location in the Directory tree by dragging
 and dropping the object while holding the <Ctrl> key. (You can also select the
 object and choosing "Move" in the "Object" menu.)


 Drag and Drop Files and Directories
 If you drag one file or directory onto another directory or volume, the
 NetWare  Administrator will move or copy that file or directory to the place
 where you  dropped it.
 You must have rights to create a file or directory where you land.
 You can drag and drop files or directories to other directories on the same
 volume, or to directories in other volumes in the Directory tree. You can land
 on the volume object to copy or move something to the root directory of that
 volume, even if the volume object is not "open" to display directories.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 336. Rename an object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rename an Object


 When you rename an object, that name appears in the Browser and in any context
 in which it is referenced.

 To rename an object

 1. Select an object in the Browser.
 2. Choose "Rename" from the "Object" menu.
 3. Enter the object's new name in "New name" field.
 4. To store the old name in the "Other Names" list, select the "Save Old Name"
    check box.
    Note: If the "Save Old Name" box is not checked, the old name is deleted.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The object is renamed. If you selected the "Save old name" check box, the
    old name is stored in the "Other names" field of the "Identification" page.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "New name" is where you enter the object's new name.

    "Save old name" stores the previous name (if checked).

    "OK" saves changes and closes the "Rename" dialog box.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog box without changing the name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 337. Search dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Search Option


 The "Search" option allows you to search for any object class or specific
 objects in the container that you choose.
 When you search, a new Browser window is opened that lists the objects that
 match your search requirements.
 You can search for all objects of a certain class, such as all Users. Or you
 can search for particular objects by telling what class they are, and then
 defining the values of their properties to match.


 To use search

 1. Select a container in the Directory tree where the search should start.
    When you choose "Search," the container that you selected is inserted into
    the "Start from:" field.
    If you want to start from a different container, choose the Browser icon
    to select an object for the "Start from:" field.
    Search looks for objects in the Directory tree below the "Start from:"
    container.
 2. Specify how much of the directory tree to search.
    To search only among objects one level below your "Start from" object, do
    not select "Search entire subtree."
    To search everything below your "Start from" object, select "Search entire
    subtree."
 3. Select the drop arrow to the right of the "Search for" field to select an
    object class to search for.
    Notice that there are extra object classes listed here.
    If you skip to step 7, Search will list all objects of the selected object
    class. If you complete steps 4-7, Search will only list objects of the
    selected  class if their properties match what you select below.
 4. (optional) Select the drop arrow to the right of the "Property" field to
    select which property's values will be examined.
    If you select "None," then all objects of the class selected above will be
    listed.
 5. (optional) Select how you want to compare a value to the selected property.
    You can select "Equal to," "Greater than," "Less than," or other choices.
    If you select "Exists," then objects will be included if they have some
    value in the selected property.
 6. (optional) Enter a value in the field to the right of the comparison method
    that you entered in step 5.
    If you selected "Exists" in step 5, you can leave this field blank.
    For example, searching for a certain Profile object, you might select Other
    Names property, Equal To, and Manger's Profile. Or if searching for certain
    User's, you might select Department property, Equal To, and Development.
 7. Choose "OK."
    Objects that match your selections are displayed in a new Browser window.
    You can now work with these objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 338. Search Object Classes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Search Object Classes


 In addition to the standard object classes used to create objects, several
 other object classes are listed in the search dialog to assist in finding
 objects. They are described below.


    "Device" will list all Computer and Printer objects.
    "Locality" is an object class that may be used by third-party products.
    "Organizational Person" will list all Users.
    "Partition" is used only by the Partition Manager. It indicates which
    containers are at the top of a separate partition.
    "Person" will list all Users.
    "Resource" will list all Printer Queue and Volume objects.
    "Server" will list all NetWare Server, Print Server, and AFP Server
    objects.
    "Top" will list every object in the container that you are searching.





ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 339. Set a New Context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set a New Context


 Opens a dialog that lets you set the context of the Browser to any location in
 the Directory tree.
 If you don't want to see the entire Directory tree, you can set the context to
 the object that you want to be the root of the Browser you are using to view
 the tree.
 You can also see a non-NetWare 4.0 server's file system as a separate Browser,
 even if no object exists for that server. Just enter the SERVER/VOLUME: in the
 "New Context" field.
 Example: If you want to see only objects under Engineering.Acme.US, you can
 set  the context to that object (Engineering) and view only objects that are
 below  it.

 To set a new context
 1. Choose "Set Context" from the "View" menu.
    The current context is displayed.
 2. Enter the new context in the "New Context" field.
    To make the top of the tree the new context, enter [Root].
 Example: Enter a container object's complete name: .ou=servers.ou=npd.o=Novell
 3. Choose "OK."
    The Browser now displays objects starting from the context you entered.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 340. Browser Current Directory Context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View the Current Directory Context


 To view the current directory context, choose "Set Context" from the "View"
 menu. This opens a dialog that shows the object in the Directory tree that is
 the root object of the active Browser window.
 You can also change the context in this dialog.
 Choose "Cancel" to return to the Browser without changing your context.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 341. Browser New Directory Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create an Object


 To create an object

 1. Select the container that you want the object created in.
    For example, to create an object that is subordinate to "SALES," choose
    "SALES."
    You can also select a Volume object or a directory in a volume to create a
    new subdirectory.
 2. From the "Object" menu, choose "Create."
    If "Create" is grayed, you do not have sufficient rights, or you selected a
    leaf object.
 3. From the "Class of New Object" list box, choose the class of object you
    want  to create.
    If the class of object you want to create isn't listed, you can't create it
    in the container you selected. For example, a Country object cannot contain
    a  User object.
 4. Choose "OK."
 5. Enter the information required to create the new object.
    Note: Although the object appears in the Browser if you define only the
    fields shown in the "Create" dialog, you will usually select "Define
    Additional  Properties" to add information that will be used later.
 6. Choose "Create."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 342. Move Leaf Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Move Objects


 1. Select one or more leaf objects in the Browser.
    You can select multiple objects by holding down <Shift> or <Ctrl> while
    selecting objects.
 2. Choose "Move" from the "Object" menu.
    The "Move Object" dialog appears.
    The "From" list box shows all the objects that you selected in the Browser.
    If you change your mind about any object in the list, you can de-select it
    and  it will not be moved.
 3. Choose the Browser button to the right of the "Copy selected objects to"
    field.
    If this dialog appeared after you Dragged-and-Dropped objects, this field
    is  already filled in. Unless you want to change it, you can skip steps 3
    and 4.
 4. Select an Organization or Organizational Unit object from the "Select
    Object" dialog that appears.
    This is the destination container. You must have the Create object right to
    this container object to complete the Move  operation.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The selected objects are moved one by one to the selected container object.
    If one of the objects that you selected to move cannot be moved, the Move
    dialog reappears. Objects that have been successfully moved are no longer
    in  the list box. The first object listed is the one that could not be
    moved. You  can de-select that object and choose "OK" to try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 343. Copy or Move Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Move or Copy Files


 1. Select one or more files from a volume in the Browser.
    You can select multiple files by holding down <Shift> or <Ctrl> while
    selecting files.
 2. Choose "Move" or "Copy" from the "Object" menu.
    The "Copy or Move Object" dialog appears.
    A button at the top of the dialog indicated whether you are moving or
    copying the selected files. You can change this button if you choose to.
    The "From" list box shows all the files that you selected in the Browser.
    If  you change your mind about any file in the list, you can de-select it
    and it  will not be included in the operation.
 3. Choose the Browser button to the right of the "Copy selected objects to:"
    field.
    If this dialog appeared after you Dragged-and-Dropped files, this field is
    already filled in. Unless you want to change it, you can skip steps 3 and
    4.
 4. Select a directory from a volume using the "Select Object" dialog that
    appears.
    This is the destination directory. You must have the Create directory right
    to this directory to complete the Move or Copy operation. To move or copy
    to  the root directory, select a Volume object.
 5. Choose "OK."
    The selected files are Copied or Moved to the selected directory.
    If one of the files that you selected cannot be moved or copied, the dialog
    reappears. Files that have been successfully moved are no longer in the
    list  box. The first file listed is the one that could not be moved. You
    can  de-select that file and choose "OK" to try again



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 344. New Object Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create an Object


 Use the "New Object" dialog to create new objects in the Directory tree. You
 must have the Create object right on a container to create objects in that
 container.
 You can also create directories on a volume. You must have the Create
 directory  right to do this.
 Procedure

    Create a new object

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Parent Object" shows the object that contains the new object.

    "Class of New Object" lists classes of objects that you can create in this
       container. You can only select one object class each time you create an
       object.

    "Context" shows the place in the Directory tree where you are creating this
       object.


    "OK" opens the "Create" dialog for the object class that you selected.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without creating an object.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 345. Browser Set Current Directory Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set a New Context


 Opens a dialog that lets you set the context of the Browser to any location in
 the Directory tree.
 If you don't want to see the entire Directory tree, you can set the context to
 the object that you want to be the root of the Browser you are using to view
 the tree.
 You can also see a non-NetWare 4.0 server's file system as a separate Browser,
 even if no object exists for that server. Just enter the SERVER/VOLUME: in the
 "New Context" field.
 Example: If you want to see only objects under Engineering.Acme.US, you can
 set  the context to that object (Engineering) and view only objects that are
 below  it.
 To set a new context

 1. Enter the new context in the "New Context" field.
    To make the top of the tree the new context, enter [Root].
 Example: Enter a container object's complete name: .ou=servers.ou=npd.o=Novell
 2. Choose "OK."
    The Browser now displays objects starting from the context you entered.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Current Context" shows the context you are at now.

    "New Context" is the field where you enter a new context.


    "OK" sets the new context that you entered.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog box without changing your context.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 346. Server Login Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Server Login


 This dialog appears when you attempt to set your context to a non-NetWare 4.0
 server. Because the server you entered does not use Directory Services, you
 must have a separate account on that server. Use this dialog to log in to that
 server using that user account.
 To log in to the non-NetWare 4.0 server

 1. In the "Name" field, enter the username of the account that you have on the
    server listed at the top of the dialog under "Server."
 2. In the "Password" field, enter the password for the username that you just
    entered.
 3. Choose "OK."
    If you entered a valid username and password for the server shown, you are
    logged in, and the NetWare Administrator proceeds with your request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 347. Browser Startup View Preferences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Confirmation


 Use this dialog to set whether you see a confirmation box when you delete an
 object, file, or directory. This selection remains in effect every time you
 start the NetWare Administrator, until you make a change in this dialog.
 Leave the confirmation on unless you are very comfortable with the operation
 of  the NetWare Administrator and will be making many deletions where the
 confirmation might become a nuisance.
 You cannot undo a delete object operation.
 Defaults

    Confirm on delete: On

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Confirm on Delete" determines whether you see a confirmation box when you
       delete  an object. You cannot recover deleted objects, so you should set
       this to  confirm object deletions.


    "OK" closes the dialog and makes the settings effective for this and future
       sessions of the NetWare Administrator.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without making the changes effective.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 348. Browser Include Objects Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Including Certain Objects in the Browser


 Use the "Include" dialog to define by name and by object classes  what you
 want displayed in the Browser.
 Container objects are not affected. You always see all container objects.
 Example: To see only printing-related objects whose names include a "P" in the
 active  Browser window, select Print Server, Printer, and Queue in the "Object
 Types" list and type "*p*" in the "Directory Services Object Name" field.
 Example: To see all objects starting with "f" in the active Browser window,
 select all object types in the "Object Types" list and type "f*" in the
 "Directory Services Object Name" field.
 Example: To see only users in the active Browser window, select Users in the
 "Object Types"  list.

 Use the "Include" dialog also to define by name which directories and files
 you want displayed. If you select Volume objects to be displayed, you will see
 the directories and files on those volumes that match the pattern.

 Example: To see volumes with files that have .EXE extensions in the active
 Browser window,  select Volumes in the "Object Types" list and type "*.exe" in
 the "DOS File Name" field.
 Example: To see volumes with directories and files that have "P" and "R" in
 their names,  select Volumes in the "Object Types" list and type "p*r*" in the
 "DOS File Name" field.
  To choose which objects to display in the Browser

 1. From the "Object Types" list, select all object classes that you want
    included in the Browser display.
    Select multiple objects in the list by holding down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
    keys while selecting  objects. The <Shift> key allows you to select
    multiple objects listed next to each other; the <Ctrl> key  allows you to
    select multiple objects not next to each other in the list.
 2. Choose "OK."
    The objects that were selected in the list are the only object classes that
    are displayed in the Browser.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Object Types" lists the classes you can select for display.

    "Directory All Services Object Name" allows you to use wildcard  characters
       to view objects whose names include a certain letter or group of
       letters.

    "DOS File Name" allows you to use wildcard characters to view files  whose
       names include a certain letter or group of letters or that end with a
       certain extension.

    "Save as Default" allows you to save the options you have set for the  next
       time you use NWADMIN.

    "Restore Default" allows you to return to the previous default settings and
       use them as your current default settings..
    "OK" closes the dialog box and sets the Browser to display only the
       selected objects  the next timeyou expand a container or Volume object
       in the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog box without saving the changes.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 349. Browser Open Additional Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Open Multiple Browser Windows


 You can have multiple Browser windows open at one time.This is useful if you
 want to drag and drop objects from one window to another, or view different
 areas in a large Directory tree at the same time.
 To open a new Browser window

 1. Select the container object that you want to be the first object in the new
    Browser window.
 2. Choose "Browser" from the "Tools" menu.
    Another Browser window is opened with the context of the object you
    selected.
    Note: To have a Browser window start at the very top of the Directory tree,
    set the context of a Browser to [Root].


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 350. Set Information in the File and Directory Options Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Preferred Name Space


 Use the "Preferred Name Space" dialog to set the way you want to view file and
 directory names. From this dialog you choose the name space that you want to
 use from the "Preferred Name Space" drop-box. Files and directories in all
 volumes will be displayed using this name space.
 If the name space that you selected is not available on a volume, the DOS name
 space will be used to display files and directories on that volume.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Preferred Name Space" lets you select the name space for how you want
       files and  directories displayed. Possible options are DOS, Macintosh,
       NFS, FTAM, and OS/2.


    "OK" saves all changes and returns you to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without making any changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 351. Salvage Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage Option


 The Salvage option allows you to recover previously deleted files, or
 permanently delete them to save disk space.

 Procedures
    Salvage One or More Files
    Permanently Delete All Deleted Files in a Directory
    Permanently Delete One or More Files
    Change Which Files Are Listed in the "File List" Box
    Change How the Files in the "File List" Box Are Sorted
    Change Which Directory's Files Are Listed

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Include" allows you to select which files to display.

    "List" displays files specified in the "Include" field.

    "Sort Options" defines how files are sorted.

    "Source" shows which directory the files listed are located in.

    "File List box" shows all deleted files in the directory with the pattern
       chosen in the "Include" field.

    "Salvage" recovers the selected files.

    "Purge" permanently deletes files.

    "Close" closes the "Salvage" dialog and returns you to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 352. Salvage Option-purge a volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Permanently Delete All Deleted Files in a Directory


 1. Choose "Purge."
    You do not have to choose "List" first.
    If you selected any files in the "File List" box, the "Include" field
    applies and only the selected files are purged.
    You must be the owner of or have at least the Erase file right to any file
    that you want to Purge.
 2. Choose "Yes."
    A count of the files found is displayed, and decreases to zero as they are
    purged. All deleted files in the directory are now permanently deleted.
 3  Choose "Close"
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 353. Salvage Option-Purge files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Permanently Delete One or More Files


 1. Select the file or files that you want to purge from the "File List" box.
    If the files you want are not shown, change the source or select another
    directory before choosing "Salvage." You must be the owner of or have at
    least  the Erase file right to any file that you want to Purge.
 2. Choose "Purge."
    A count of the files found is displayed, and decreases to zero as they are
    purged. All deleted files in the directory are now permanently deleted.
    Purged  files cannot be recovered later.
 3. Choose "Close."
    You return to the Browser.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 354. Salvage Option-Salvage Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage One or More Files


 1. Select the file or files that you want to salvage from the "File List" box.
    If the files you want are not shown, change the source or select another
    directory before choosing "Salvage."
    You must have the create right on a file to salvage it.
    If you are salvaging a file from a deleted directory, you must have
    supervisor right to the root directory of the volume.
 2. Choose "Salvage."
    The files disappear from the "File List" box. They will now appear in
    regular file listings (DIR, NDIR, or the Browser).
 3. Choose "Close."
    You return to the Browser.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 355. Salvage Option-Change which files are listed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Which Files Are Listed


 1. Select the "Include" field.
 2. Enter a file pattern that describes the files that you want shown in the
    "File List" box.
    Example: Type *.* to display all files. Type *.DAT to display all data
    files.
 3. Choose "List."
    Listing the file can take several minutes for a large directory. You can
    change the source directory, or purge files without first listing them.
    The files matching the file specification that you entered are displayed in
    the "File List" box. These files can be permanently deleted or salvaged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 356. Salvage Option-Sorting files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change How Files Are Sorted


 1. Choose the arrow by the "Sort Options" field.
 2. Choose the sort option that describes how you want the files in the "File
    List" box displayed.
    You can only select one sort option at a time. The left-to-right order of
    the fields does not change.
 Example: If you want all files organized by when they were deleted, choose
 "Deletion Date" as the sort option. The first file listed is the most recent
 one deleted, and the last file listed is the one deleted the longest time ago.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 357. Salvage Option-Change which directory files come from ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Which Directory's Files are Listed


 1. Choose the arrow by the "Source" drop-down list.
 2. Choose a source directory.
    2a.To display files from the directory that you selected before choosing
       "Salvage," choose "Current directory."
       You must have the create right to a file or you cannot salvage it.
    2b.To display files from directories that have been deleted on this volume,
       choose "Deleted directories."
       You must have the Supervisor right to the root directory of the volume
    in  order to salvage files from a deleted directory.
 Note: If you have selected deleted directories as your source and you are
 working on a SYS: volume, it can take a long time to list the files. You
 should  consider limiting the list with the "Include" field. You can select a
 source  directory, and enter a value in the "Include" field before choosing
 "List."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 358. Salvage Menu Item - Include field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage - Include Field


 The "Include" field defines which files are shown in the "File List" box.
 When you have changed the pattern in the "Include" field, choose "List." The
 list of files changes to show those files.
 You can enter information in the "Include" field and choose a source directory
 before listing files. This may save time. You do not have to choose "List"
 before purging all files in this directory.
 Example: Type *.* to display all files. Type *.DAT to display all data files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 359. Salvage Menu Item - Fetch button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage - List button


 Choose "List" to indicate that you have finished entering changes in the
 "Include" field. The "File List" box is updated according to what you entered.
 You can enter information in the "Include" field and choose a source directory
 before listing files. This may save time. You do not have to choose "List"
 before purging all files in this directory.
 Note: If you have selected deleted directories as your source and you are
 working on a SYS: volume, it can take a long time to list the files. You
 should  consider limiting the list with the "Include" field.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 360. Salvage Menu Item - Sort Options field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage - Sort Options


 The "Sort" option determines how files in the "File List" box are organized.
 Organize files to more easily find the files you are looking for. The "Sort"
 option changes which files are listed from first to last; it does not change
 the left-to-right order of the fields.
 Sort Options

    "Filename" sorts alphabetically by filename.

    "Deletor" sorts alphabetically by name of user who deleted the file.

    "Deletion date" sorts numerically by the date that the file was deleted.

    "File size" sorts numerically by how large the file is.

    "File type" sorts alphabetically by the file's three-letter extension. (for
       example .EXE or .DAT.) Files without extensions (including those used by
       non-DOS name spaces such as Macintosh) are listed first in alphabetical
       order  by filename.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 361. Salvage Menu Item - Source Options field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage - Source


 The "Source" field determines which directories the files listed in the "File
 List" box are in.
 Source options

    "Current directory" lists deleted files from the directory that you
       selected. You  need the Create right to a file to salvage it from the
       current directory.

    "Deleted directories" lists deleted files from directories that have been
       deleted.  You need the Supervisor right to the root directory of the
       volume in order to  salvage files from a deleted directory.

 Note: If you have selected deleted directories as your source and you are
 working on a SYS: volume, it can take a long time to list the files. You
 should  consider limiting the list with the "Include" field, but you do not
 have to  "List" the files until both the source directory and the include
 field are  ready.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 362. Salvage Menu Item - File list box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage - File List Box


 The "File List" box shows all files in the selected directory that have been
 deleted and that can be salvaged or purged.
 You can change which files are shown with the "Include" file specification and
 " Source." You can change how the list of files is organized with the "Sort
 Options".You can select all three fields before listing the files; this may
 save time in large directories. You also do not have to list the files before
 purging all files in the directory; just choose "Purge."

 Screen regions
    "Filename" displays the name of the file.

    "Deleted Date" displays the date that the file was deleted.

    "Deleted Time" displays the time that the file was deleted.

    "File Size" displays the size of the file in bytes.

    "Deletor Name" displays the name of the user who deleted the file.

    "Last Update Date" displays the date that the file was last written to.

    "Last Update Time" displays the time that the file was last written to.

    "Last Update Name" displays the name of the user who last wrote to this
       file.

    "Creation Date" displays the date that the file was first created in this
       location.

    "Creation Time" displays the time that the file was first created in this
       location.

    "Owner Name" displays the name of the user who created the file.

    "Archive Date" displays the date that the file was last backed up.

    "Archive Time" displays the time that the file was last backed up.

    "Archiver Name" displays the name of the user who last backed up this file.

    "Last Access Date" displays the date that the file was last read.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 363. Salvage Menu Item - Salvage button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage - Salvage button


 Choose "Salvage" to salvage all selected files. You must have the Create file
 right to a file in order to salvage it.
 Files that are salvaged can be used as if they had never been deleted.
 Files that have been permanently deleted (purged) cannot be salvaged or
 reused.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 364. Salvage Menu Item - Purge button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage - Purge button


 Choose "Purge" to permanently delete all selected files. You must be the owner
 of or have at least the Erase right to a file in order to purge it.
 If you have not chosen "List" yet, or if no files are selected, all deleted
 files in the directory that you selected will be permanently deleted, not just
 the deleted files described by the pattern in the "Include" field. A
 confirmation dialog box appears before files are purged.
 Permanently deleting files can speed up your system and free disk space, but
 permanently deleted files cannot be recovered for use later.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 365. Salvage dialog-file already exists ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Salvage - File Already Exists


 A file already exists in this directory with the same name as the file that
 you  are trying to salvage. You must enter a new name for the file that you
 want to  salvage.
 1. Enter a new filename in the "Filename" text box.
 2. Choose "OK."
    The file is salvaged and given the new name you entered in this dialog.
    If you choose "Cancel," this file is not salvaged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 366. Setting Up NetWare Print Services ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Setting Up NetWare Print Services

 NetWare print services requires you to create three printing objects--a Print
 Server, Printer, and Print Queue--in order for network users to share
 printers.  Use the following steps to create a printing environment with one
 object of  each type and make the necessary assignments for Print Servers and
 Printers and  Printers and Print Queues.
 After you create the printing objects, Print Servers must be assigned to
 Printers, and Printers must be assigned to Print Queues. This procedure tells
 you how to create and assign the objects in the simplest order.
 To create basic NetWare print services

 1. Select the context or organizational unit where you want to create printing
    objects. For example, "Sales."
 2. Create a Print Queue by choosing "Create" from the Object menu. Type the
    name in "Print Queue Name." For example, "Q1." Choose the Browser button
    next  to the "Print Queue Volume" field.
    The Select Object dialog appears. Only volumes will appear in the list of
    objects.
 3. Choose the volume that will store the print queue directory (print jobs).
    We recommend that you choose the volume that will usually have the most
    free  disk space.
 4. Choose the Create button without marking the available option boxes.
 5. Create a Printer by choosing "Create" from the Object menu. Type the name
    in  "Printer Name." For example, "P1." Mark the "Define Additional
    Properties" box  and choose the Create button.
    The details dialog for Printer P1 appears.
 6. Select the Assignments page and choose the "Add" button.
    The Select Object dialog appears. Only Print Queue objects will appear in
    the list of objects.
 7. Select the same context used in Step 1 and choose the Print Queue object
    Q1.
    This assigns the Printer to the Print Queue.
 8. Select the Configuration page and make any necessary changes. Choose the OK
    button.
    The default Printer configuration is a parallel printer cabled to a NetWare
    server's LPT1 port using a polled interrupt.
 9. Create a Print Server by choosing "Create" from the Object menu. Type the
    name in "Print Server Name." For example, "PS-Sales." Mark the "Define
    Additional Properties" box and choose the Create button.
    The details dialog for Print Server PS-Sales appears.
 10.Select the Assignments page and choose the "Add" button.
    The Select Object dialog appears. Only Printer objects will appear in the
    list of objects.
 11.Select the same context used in Step 1 and choose the Printer object P1.
    This assigns the Print Server to the Printer.
 12.Choose the OK button.
 The three necessary printing objects are now created and properly assigned.
 Network workstations can print after you load the print server (PSERVER.NLM)
 and network printer driver (NPRINTER.EXE/NLM). If the printer is cabled to the
 the NetWare server that loads PSERVER.NLM, you can have NPRINTER.NLM loaded
 automatically. For all manual load printers, you must load NPRINTER.EXE or
 NLM.  See Load Print Server Software and Load Network Printer Software.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 367. Load Print Server Software ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Load Print Server Software

 NetWare print services requires a print server (PSERVER.NLM) to be loaded on a
 NetWare server. Each print server supports up to 256 printers. You cannot load
 multiple copies of PSERVER.NLM on one NetWare server.
 To load a print server

 1. At the NetWare server console, type "LOAD PSERVER."
    The browser appears.
 2. Select the context or organizational unit where the Print Server is defined
    and choose the Print Server.
    For example, "PS-Sales" in the "Sales" context.
 3. To avoid browsing for the Print Server, you could type LOAD PSERVER
    printservername.context at the NetWare server console.
    For example, type LOAD PSERVER PS-SALES.SALES at the NetWare server
    console.
 If the printer is not cabled to the NetWare server with the network printer
 driver loading automatically, you must load NPRINTER.EXE or NLM. See Load
 Network Printer Software.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 368. Load Network Printer Software ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Load Network Printer Software

 NetWare print services requires a network printer driver for each network
 printer. Network printers include printers that are attached:
    Directly to the network cabling (printer contains NPRINTER software)
    To a DOS workstation (NPRINTER.EXE)
    To an OS/2 workstation (NPRINTER.EXE)
    To a NetWare server not running PSERVER.NLM (NPRINTER.NLM)
    To a NetWare server running PSERVER.NLM (may load NPRINTER.NLM
    automatically)
 To load NPRINTER.NLM

 1. At the NetWare server console, type "LOAD NPRINTER."
    The browser appears.
 2. Select the context or organizational unit where the Printer is defined and
    choose the Printer.
    For example, "P1" in the "Sales" context.
 3. To avoid browsing for the Printer, you could type LOAD NPRINTER
    printername.context at the NetWare server console.
    For example, type LOAD NPRINTER P1.SALES at the NetWare server console.
 To load NPRINTER.EXE

 1. At the DOS or OS/2 workstation prompt, type "NPRINTER."
    The menu appears.
 2. Select the context or organizational unit where the Printer is defined and
    choose the Printer.
    For example, "P1" in the "Sales" context.
 3. To avoid browsing for the Printer, you could type NPRINTER
    printername.context at the workstation prompt.
    For example, type NPRINTER P1.SALES at the NetWare server console.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 369. Create a Print Server Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Create a Print Server Object

 A Print Server object represents a print server on the network. NetWare print
 services requires a Print Server object along with a Printer and Print Queue
 in  order for network users to share printers. To follow a procedure to create
 and  assign the three objects, see NetWare Print Services Setup.
 To create a Print Server object under the selected container

 1. Type a name for this Print Server object in the "Name" text box.
    This is both the name of the Print Server object as it appears in the
    Directory tree and as it is loaded at the NetWare server console. You can
    enter  up to 128 characters. We recommend that you keep it simple so that
    it can be  easily remembered and typed in the future.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this Print Server right
    now, select "Define Additional Properties." Choose this option
    You cannot select this if you select "Create Another Print Server."
 3. (Optional) To create another Print Server immediately after this one,
    select  "Create Another Print Server."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Print Server object
    dialog appears.
    If you selected "Create Another Print Server," this dialog appears again.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Print Server object.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 370. Create a Printer Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Printer Object


 A Printer object represents a printer on the network. NetWare print services
 requires a Printer object along with a Print Server and Print Queue in order
 for network users to share printers. To follow a procedure to create and
 assign  the three objects, see NetWare Print Services Setup.
 To create a Printer object under the selected container

 1. Type a name for this Printer object in the "Name" text box.
    This is both the name of the Printer object as it appears in the Directory
    tree and as it is loaded at the NetWare server console or workstations. You
    can  enter up to 128 characters. We recommend that you keep it simple so
    that it can  be easily remembered and typed in the future.
 2. (Optional) To define additional information about this Printer right now,
    select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create Another Printer."
 3. (Optional) To create another Printer object immediately after this one,
    select "Create Another Printer."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 4. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Printer object dialog
    appears.
    If you selected "Create Another Printer," this dialog appears again.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Printer object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 371. Create a Print Queue object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Print Queue Object


 A Print Queue object represents a print queue on the network. NetWare print
 services requires a Print Queue object along with a Printer and Print Server
 in  order for network users to share printers. To follow a procedure to create
 and  assign the three objects, see NetWare Print Services Setup.
 To create a Print Queue object under the selected container

 1. Type a name for this Print Queue object in the "Name" text box.
    This is the name of the Print Queue object as it appears in the Directory
    tree. You can enter up to 128 characters. We recommend that you keep it
    simple  so that it can be easily remembered and typed in the future.
 2. Type a name for the print queue volume in the "Volume" text box or choose
    the Browser button  to browse.
    We recommend that you choose the volume that will usually have the most
    free  disk space.
 3. (Optional) To define additional information about this Print Queue right
    now, select "Define Additional Properties."
    You cannot select this if you select "Create Another Print Queue."
 4. (Optional) To create another Print Queue immediately after this one, select
    "Create Another Print Queue."
    You cannot select this if you select "Define Additional Properties."
 5. Choose "Create."
    If you selected "Define Additional Properties," the Print Queue object
    dialog appears.
    If you selected "Create Another Print Queue," this dialog appears again.

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without creating a Print Queue object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 372. Print Server Identification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 View or Change Print Server Object

 The "Identification" page describes this Print Server object. You can use this
 page to store information such as
 -  Additional names for the print server
 -  Where the print server is located
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 To change the object's name, select the object and choose "Rename" from the
 Object menu.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Setting Up NetWare Print Services

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Advertising Name" shows the name the print server uses in network
       communications.  This is the  name needed when loading PSERVER.NLM at a
       NetWare server.

     opens a dialog where you can enter more values for a field.

    "Other name" lists identification information associated with this print
       server  that helps you search for and identify specific print servers.

 Example: You frequently need to search for print servers that have a certain
 version number. To facilitate the search, include the print server's version
 number in the "Other name" field.
    "Network Address" lists the 16 digit (8 byte) number associated with the
       NetWare  server that runs this print server (PSERVER.NLM).

    "Description" describes the function the print server performs (such as
       route Sales  print jobs).

    "Location" shows the print server's physical location (where the NetWare
       server  running PSERVER.NLM is located, such as a room number).

    "Department" shows the department or division that generally uses the print
       server.

    "Telephone" lists the telephone numbers of the network supervisor
       responsible for the  print server.

    "Fax Number" lists the telephone numbers of fax machines of the network
       supervisor responsible for the print server.

    "E-mail Address" lists the MHS address (or other E-mail ID) of the network
       supervisor responsible for the print server.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 373. Printer Object Identification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change Printer Object


 The "Identification" page describes this Printer object. You can use this page
 to store information such as
 -  Where the printer is located
 -  Additional names for the printer
 The other pages in this dialog contain the following functionality.
 -  "Assignments" assigns Print Queue objects
 -  "Notification" controls the objects that are notified when the printer
    requires servicing (out of paper, jammed, etc.)
 -  "Features" stores additional printer information (available type faces,
    amount of memory, etc.)
 -  "Configuration" controls the printer type, location, print server service
    interval, etc.
 -  "See Also" lists the names of objects related to this Printer (for example,
    you could list similar printers as alternatives if the current printer is
    busy)
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 To change the object's name, select the object and choose "Rename" from the
 Object menu.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Setting Up NetWare Print Services

 Screen regions and buttons
     opens a dialog where you can enter more values for a field.

    "Other name" lists identification information associated with this printer
       that  helps you search for and identify specific printers.

 Example: You frequently need to search for printers from a certain
 manufacturer. To facilitate the search, include the printer's manufacturer in
 the "Other name" field.
    "Description" describes the function the printer performs (such as print
       Sales  documents).

    "Network Address" lists the 16 digit (8 byte) number associated with the
       NetWare  server or workstation that this printer is cabled to.

    "Location" shows the printer's physical location (such as a person's
       office).

    "Department" shows the department or division that generally uses the
       printer.

    "Organization" lists the organization that can use the printer.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 374. Print Queue Identification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change Print Queue Object


 The "Identification" page describes this Print Server object. You can use this
 page to store information such as
 -  Additional names for the print server
 -  Where the print server is located
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.
 To change the object's name, select the object and choose "Rename" from the
 Object menu.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Setting Up NetWare Print Services

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Print Queue Volume" shows the name of the NetWare volume that contains the
       print queue directory (print jobs).

    "Description" describes the function the print queue performs (such as hold
       Sales print  jobs).

     opens a dialog where you can enter more values for a field.

    "Location" shows the print queue's physical location (where the NetWare
       server with  the print queue volume is located, such as a room number).

    "Organization" lists the organization that can use the print queue.

    "Department" shows the department or division that generally uses the print
       server

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 375. Printer Assignments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer Assignments


 The "Assignments" page controls the Print Queues assigned to this Printer
 object. For example, you can use this page to
 -  Add or delete Print Queue assignments
 -  Specify a default Print Queue for CAPTURE and NPRINT commands that do not
    specify a Printer or Print Queue
 You can also view the Print Server assigned to this Printer. Use the Print
 Server object dialog to change Print Server and Printer assignments.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Add" lets you add a Print Queue to the list of assigned Print Queues
       objects.

    "Delete" lets you delete the highlighted Print Queue from the list of Print
       Queue  objects.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 376. Printer Notification ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Notification


 The "Notification" page controls the objects that are notified when the
 printer  requires servicing (out of paper, jammed, etc.). You can use this
 page to
 -  Add or delete user or container objects that receive printer error messages
 -  Specify how soon and how frequently printer error messages arrive
 You can also specify that the print job owner receive the printer error
 messages.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Add" lets you add an object to the notification list.

    "Delete" lets you delete the highlighted object from the notification list.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 377. Printer Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer Features


 The "Features" page stores additional printer information such as
 -  Page description languages
 -  Amount of memory
 -  Supported type faces
 -  Supported cartridges
 Users can take advantage of this information in searches. For example, a user
 can search only for printers with at least 4 MB (4096 KB) of memory and the
 Futura font.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Page Description Language" shows the languages supported by the printer.
       To  specify a language, choose the More button and click "Add" for each
       language  the printer supports.

     opens a dialog where you can enter more values for a field.

    "Memory in KB" shows the amount of RAM installed in the printer.

    "Supported type faces" shows the fonts that the printer can use. To specify
       a type  face, choose the More button and click "Add" for each font the
       printer supports.

    "Supported Cartridges" lists the font cartridges that the printer can use.
       To  specify a cartridge, choose the More button and click "Add" for each
       cartridge  the printer supports.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 378. Printer Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer Configuration


 Configure the printer. You can have .
 The "Configuration" page stores additional printer information such as
 -  Printer type: AIO, Unix, AppleTalk, XNP, Serial, and Parallel printers;
    Other/Unknown and XNP (Extended Network Printer) protocol printers are
    configured elsewhere
 -  Communication parameters: Interrupt (polled mode or specific interrupt) and
    loading location (you can load all printers manually; only printers cabled
    to  the print server can be auto loaded)
 -  Frequency that the print server checks for print jobs for the printer
 The default values function for a parallel printer that is cabled to the LPT1
 port of the NetWare server running the print server (PSERVER.NLM). The network
 printer driver necessary for this printer (NPRINTER.NLM) will be loaded
 automatically when the print server is loaded.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Printer Type" shows whether the printer is parallel, serial, etc. To
       specify a  type, click on the down arrow to the right of the field and
       choose the proper  printer type. Choose type Other/Unknown for
       network-attached printers like the  HP IIIsi or IV, Compaq PageMarq 20,
       GENICOM 7170, or Talaris 1794 Printstation.  Other/Unknown and XNP are
       the only printer types that do not automatically  bring up the
       communication dialog when chosen.

    "Banner Type" shows whether the printer produces banner pages in text or
       postscript mode.

    "Service Interval" shows how often the print server checks for print jobs
       for this  printer in the print queue. The default is every 15 seconds.
       You can specify a  number between 1 and 15, inclusive, by using the
       arrow buttons or typing the  number of seconds in the field.

    "Buffer Size in KB" shows how large the packets of data can be for this
       printer.  The default is 3 KB (3,072 bytes). You can specify between 1
       and 20 KB,  inclusive, by using the arrow buttons or typing the number
       of KB in the field.

    "Starting Form" shows the number of the printer form that the printer will
       service  when the NetWare printer driver is loaded. Printer forms are
       defined (between 0  and 255, inclusive) in the Organization or
       Organizational Unit objects.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 379. AIO Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AIO Printer Communication


 This printer uses Asynchronous Input/Output.
 To modify printer type

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Printer object.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 380. Unix Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Unix Printer Communication


 This printer is cabled to a Unix network.
 To modify printer type

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Printer object.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 381. AppleTalk Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AppleTalk Printer Communication


 This printer is cabled to an AppleTalk network.
 To modify printer type

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Printer object.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 382. Serial Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Serial Printer Communication


 This printer is cabled to a serial port.
 To modify printer type

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Printer object.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 383. Parallel Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Parallel Printer Communication


 This printer is cabled to a parallel port.
 To modify printer type

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Printer object.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 384. Printer Status ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer Status


 Control the printer status.
 To modify printer status

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Printer object.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 385. Mount Printer Form ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Mount Printer Form


 Control the printer form.
 To mount printer form

 1. Select a name or number and  choose the OK button.
 2. (Optional) To view or select forms in another container, choose the Browser
    button .
    The Select Object dialog appears. Choose the container you want.

    "Cancel" returns to the Printer Status without modifying the printer form.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 386. Print Server Assignments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Server Assignments


 The "Assignments" page controls the Printers assigned to this Print Server
 object. You can use this page to add or delete Printer assignments. At least
 one Printer object must be assigned to a Print Server in order for NetWare
 print services to function properly.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Add" lets you add a Printer to the list of assigned Printer objects.

    "Delete" lets you delete the highlighted Printer from the list of Printer
       objects.

    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 387. Unload Print Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Unload Print Server Software


 To unload a print server

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Print Server object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 388. Print server operators ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Server Operators


 Specify the objects that can control this Print Server.
 To modify Print Server operators

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Print Server object.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 389. Print server users ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Server Users


 Specify the objects that can use this Print Server.
 To modify Print Server users

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Print Server object.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 390. Print Queue Assignments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Queue Assignments


 The "Assignments" page views the Printers assigned to this Print Queue object
 and the Print Servers assigned to the Printer objects. To change assignments
 between a Print Server and Printer objects, use the Print Server object
 dialog.  To change assignments between a Printer and Print Queue objects, use
 the  Printer object dialog.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to this
 page  and other pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in
 every page  of this dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog

 Screen regions and buttons
    "OK" saves changes in all pages of this dialog.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog without saving changes in any page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 391. Print Jobs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Jobs


 To delete or modify print jobs

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the print jobs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 392. Print Job Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Job Details


 To delete or modify print jobs

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the print jobs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 393. Print queue operators ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Queue Operators


 Specify the objects that can control this Print Queue.
 To modify Print Queue operators

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Print Queue object.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 394. Print queue users ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Queue Users


 Specify the objects that can use this Print Queue.
 To modify Print Queue users

 1. Make the changes and choose "OK."

    "Cancel" returns to the Browser without modifying the Print Queue object.





ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 395. How to use pages of the object dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 How to Use the Object Dialog

 Use the Object dialog to set or change information about an object.
 The Object dialog has two areas: an information area, where you work with that
 object, and a page area. Each page contains information about the object. To
 open other pages, choose a page button. The information area changes as you
 open a page.
 All pages are part of the Object dialog. When you open a page, you're still in
 the Object dialog.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just
 individual pages. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need
 to the pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page
 of  the dialog.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "More"  Allows multiple entries in a field.

    "Browser"  Appears next to fields that require the complete name of an
       object.  Lets you browse and select an object.

    Page buttons change information you can edit..

    "OK" saves the changes in all pages of the dialog and returns you to the
       Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without saving the changes entered in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 396. Enter a Title for this object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a Title


 "Title" is only one of several properties of this object that are shown on the
 Identification page of the object dialog. Use this procedure as a model for
 entering values for any of the properties on the Identification page with a
 similar field style.
 1. Select the "Title" field.
 2. Type the Title that you want recorded as a property of this object.
    If this is not the first value in the "Title" property, you must choose the
    "More" button to the right of the "Title" field and use the dialog that
    appears  to enter other values. Choose "Help" in that dialog for more
    information.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 397. Enter Another Name for this Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter Another Name for this Object


 The "Other names" field can be used to record any identification information
 that you think will be useful for this object. You can add several alternative
 names for this object. Any of these names can be referred to in a search to
 locate this object.
 1. Select the "Other name" field.
 2. Type the name that you want recorded as a property of this object.
    If this is not the first value in the "Other name" property, you must
    choose  the "More" button to the right of the "Other name" field and use
    the dialog  that appears to enter other values. Choose "Help" in that
    dialog for more  information.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 398. Enter a Location for this object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a Location for this Object


 The "Location" field can be used to record any information that you think will
 be useful for this object. It is generally used to record the physical
 location  of the object, such as where it is in your office complex.
 1. Select the "Location" field.
 2. Type the location that you want recorded for this object.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 399. Enter a Description of this object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a Description of this Object


 The "Description" field can be used to record any information that you think
 will be useful. It is in a paragraph form; you can enter as much as you need.
 "Description" is property of most objects in Directory Services.
 1. Select the "Description" field.
 2. Type the information that you want recorded for this object.
    The information scrolls as you type. Use the scroll bar to the right of the
    field to scroll through the text that you have entered.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 400. Enter a Serial Number for this object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a Serial Number for this Object


 The "Serial Number" field can be used to record the unique serial number of
 this object. This number uniquely identifies every piece of equipment that you
 own. This field can be very useful when searching for information about a
 specific piece of equipment.
 1. Select the "Serial Number" field.
 2. Type the serial number of the piece of equipment that is represented by
    this  object.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 401. Enter a Fax or Phone Number for this Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a Fax or Phone Number for this Object


 "Fax" and "Telephone Number" are used to record numbers where the people or
 places represented by this object can be reached. You can enter several fax
 numbers and several phone numbers, if needed.
 1. Select the "Fax" or "Telephone Number" field.
 2. Type the number that you want recorded as a property of this object.
    The number is not examined; you can include dashes, parentheses, or other
    marks as needed.
    If this is not the first value in the "Fax" or "Telephone Number" property,
    you must choose the "More" button to the right of the field and use the
    dialog  that appears to enter other values. Choose "Help" in that dialog
    for more  information.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The information is not saved to Directory Services until you choose "OK."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 402. See What Name Spaces are Used on this Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See What Name Spaces are Used on this Volume


 To see what name spaces are available (or installed) on the volume where this
 file or directory is stored, simply look at how many file or directory names
 are listed for this item.
 Every file or directory on a volume must have a name in every name space that
 is installed on that volume.
 For example, if your file has a name shown for DOS, OS/2, and Macintosh name
 spaces, those name spaces are available to every file on that volume, and
 every  file must have a name in each of those name spaces.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 403. See What This Directory or File is Called in Each Available Name Space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

See the Name of this File or DIrectory in Each Available Name Space


 The name of each file or directory is listed with all of the available name
 spaces in the table on the Identification page of the object dialog for the
 file or directory. Look at the table to see what the file's or directory's
 name  is in each of the available name spaces.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 404. Printer Forms definitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer Forms


 The "Printer Forms" page lists the different forms that can be used when
 printing to a Printer object in this container.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just
 individual pages. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need
 to the pages.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Create a New Printer Form
    Modify a Printer Form
    Delete a Printer Form

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Number/Form" lists the number and name of each printer forms that is
       defined for use  in this container object.

    "Create" opens the "Create Printer Form" dialog, where you can enter values
       for a  new printer form.

    "Modify" opens the "Modify Printer Form" dialog with the values of the
       selected  printer forms displayed. You can then change any of these
       values.

    "Delete" opens the "Delete Printer Form" dialog with the values of the
       selected  printer forms displayed. This allows you to see what you are
       deleting when you  choose "OK."

    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of this dialog and returns
       you  to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the object dialog. Changes to this page have already been
       saved;  changes to other pages will be lost.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 405. Add a Printer Form ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a New Printer Form


 1. Choose "Create."
    The "Create Printer Form" dialog appears.
 2. Enter a name in the "Name" field.
    The name must begin with a letter, and must be unique. It can be up to 8
    characters long; spaces are allowed, but will be converted to underscores
    (_).
 3. Enter a number from 0 to 255 in the "Number" field.
 4. Enter a number from 1 to 255 in the "Length" field.
    This is the length of the printer form you are defining, measured in lines
    of text.
 5. Enter a number from 1 to 999 in the "Width" field.
    This is the width of the printer form you are defining, measured in
    characters.
 6. Choose "OK."
 A printer form with the name that you entered is listed in the "Printer
 Forms:"  list box. Any time that printer form is used, the values that you
 entered with  that printer form name are used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 406. Modify a Printer Form ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify a Printer Form


 1. Select a printer form from the "Printer Forms" list box.
 2. Choose "Modify."
    The "Modify Printer Form" dialog appears. The values for the printer form
    that you selected appear in the fields of the dialog. You can change any of
    the  fields.
 3. (Optional) Enter a new name in the "Name" field.
    The name must begin with a letter, and must be unique. It can be up to 8
    characters long; spaces are allowed, but will be converted to underscores
    (_).
 4. (Optional) Enter a number from 0 to 255 in the "Number" field.
 5. (Optional) Enter a number from 1 to 255 in the "Length" field.
    This is the length of the printer form you are redefining, measured in
    lines  of text.
 6. (Optional) Enter a number from 1 to 999 in the "Width" field.
    This is the width of the printer form you are redefining, measured in
    characters.
 7. Choose "OK."
    The form is now modified. You do not have to choose "OK" in the object
    dialog to complete the action.
    You return to the Printer Forms list. The printer form that you selected in
    step 1 is still selected. It may appear with a different name if you
    changed  the "Name" field in step 3.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 407. Delete a Printer Form ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Printer Form


 1. Select a printer form from the "Printer Forms" list box.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The "Delete Printer Form" dialog appears. The values for the printer form
    that you selected appear in the fields, but are gray. You can see what
    values  you are deleting as part of this printer form, but you cannot
    change them here.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Printer Forms" list box.The printer form that you
    selected is deleted from the list of printer forms. You do not have to
    choose  "OK" in the object dialog to complete the action. The Delete
    operation cannot  be undone. You must "Add" a new printer form with the
    deleted values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 408. Printer Device definitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer Devices


 The "Printer Devices" page lists the names different types of printer devices
 that can be used as printers in this container. You can add new definitions
 for  printer devices, or modify the definitions of existing printer devices.
 Use  Import and Export to avoid reentering information for the same device in
 different containers.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just
 individual pages. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need
 to the pages.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Create a New Printer Device Definition
    View or Modify a Printer Device Definition
    Delete a Printer Device Definition
    Import a Printer Device Definition
    Export a Printer Device Definition

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Printer Devices" lists the names of the printer devices that are defined
       for use  in this container object.

    "Create" opens the "Create Printer Device" dialog, where you can enter the
       name  for a new printer device. Functions and modes are added using
       "Modify."

    "Modify" opens the "Modify Printer Device" dialog, where you can view or
       add  functions and modes for the selected printer device.

    "Delete" opens the "Delete Printer Device" dialog, where you can see the
       name of  the selected printer device definition before deleting it. You
       cannot examine  functions and modes from this dialog.

    "Import" opens the "Import Printer Device" dialog, where you can select the
       name  of a file that contains a printer device definition that was
       previously  exported (extension .pdf). A new printer device definition
       is created,  including functions and modes. Used with Export, Import
       allows you to reuse a  definition without re-entering the information.

    "Export" opens the "Export Printer Device" dialog, where you can enter the
       name of  a file that the selected printer device definition should be
       saved as. The  printer device definition can then be imported into
       another printer device list  without re-entering all of the function and
       mode information.

    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of this dialog and returns
       you  to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the object dialog. Changes to this page have already been
       saved;  changes to other pages will be lost.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 409. Create a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to create a new printer device that can be used by
 objects in this container. A definition consists of a name, functions, and
 modes, but you only enter a name in the "Create" dialog. Use "Modify" to enter
 functions and modes.
 To create a new printer device definition

 1. Enter a printer device name in the "Name" field.
    You can use up to 32 characters for the name. It must begin with a letter;
    spaces are allowed.
 2. Choose "OK."
    The name of the printer device that you entered is added to the list. You
    should use "Modify" to define functions and modes for this printer device
    before using it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 410. Delete a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to delete the definition of a printer device that was
 previously entered. The definition can then no longer be used by objects in
 this container. All functions and modes are deleted at the same time.
 To delete this printer device definition

 1. Select a printer device name from the "Printer Devices" list box.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The "Delete Printer Device" dialog appears with the "Name" field and the
    "Functions" and "Modes" buttons grayed. You cannot modify the definition
    here,  you can only see what you are deleting.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Printer Devices" dialog. The printer device that was
    listed in the "Name" field is deleted from the "Printer Devices" list box
    and  is no longer available to objects in this container..


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 411. Import a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Import a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to import a definition for a new printer device that
 can  be used by objects in this container. A definition consists of a name,
 functions, and modes.
 Import allows you to use a definition that was created for another container
 without re-entering all of the functions and modes. To import a printer device
 in this dialog, it must have been saved using the "Export" button in this
 dialog.
 To import a printer device definition

 1. Choose "Import" below the "Printer Devices" list box.
 2. Use the file selection dialog to locate the file for the printer device
    definition that you want to import.
    The file extension .PDF is used for printer device definition files.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The printer device is added to the "Printer Devices" list box, and the
    definition contained in the file can now be used by objects in this
    container.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 412. Export a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Export a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to export a definition for a printer device listed in
 this dialog. The printer device definition can then be imported for use in
 other containers without re-entering all functions and modes.
 To export a printer device definition

 1. Select a printer device from the "Printer Devices" list box.
 2. Choose "Export" below the "Printer Devices" list box.
 3. Browse to find the directory where you want to create a file containing
    this  printer device definition.
    The file extension .PDF is used for printer device definition files.
    The name of the printer device is used as the filename when you export a
    definition. All spaces are removed and the first eight characters of the
    printer device are used.
 4. Choose "OK."
    The printer device definition is saved with the same file name as the
    printer device is listed. All functions and modes are included in the
    definition. The definition can be imported by using this dialog on any
    container object. The printer device is unchanged in this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 413. Modify a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to modify the definition of a printer device that was
 previously entered by adding, changing, or deleting the functions and modes
 that are defined for this device. The definition can be used by objects in
 this  container.
 You can change a printer device name, or any of its functions or modes.
 A function is an action that the printer device can perform, such as bold
 text,  or proportional spacing. A mode is a combination of functions that you
 define  to prepare the printer device for specific printing needs. For
 example, you  might define a print mode called "Title" that includes functions
 for bold,  double wide, and letter quality.

 Procedures
    Change the Name of this Printer Device
    Add a Function to this Printer Device
    Modify a Function
    Delete a Function
    Add a Mode to this Printer Device
    Modify a Mode
    Delete a Mode

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name" field shows the name of this printer device.

    "Functions" list shows the functions that have been entered for this
       printer device.  These include all of the capabilities of this printer
       device, such as  compressed or letter quality text.

    "Modes" list shows the modes that have been entered for this printer
       device. A  mode is a combination of functions that you define to serve a
       specific printing  need.

    "Create Function" button allows you to add a function to the "Functions"
       list.

    "Create Mode" button allows you to define a new mode and add it to the
       "Modes"  list.

    "Modify" button allows you to change the selected mode or function by
       adding or  removing functions or control sequences, respectively, from
       its definition.

    "Delete" button deletes the selected mode or function. The functions that
       were a  part of a selected mode are not affected; they are still part of
       the printer  device definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 414. Change the Name of a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change the Name of this Printer Device


 1. Enter a new name in the "Name" field.
 2. Choose "OK."
    You return to the list of Printer Devices. The new name appears in the
    list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 415. Add a Function to a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Function to this Printer Device


 1. Choose "Create Function."
    The "Create Function" dialog appears. The name of the Printer Device is
    shown at the top of the dialog for your reference.
 2. Enter a name for the new function in the "Function Name" field.
 3. Enter the characters used by this printer as a control sequence to engage
    this function.
    You can type in characters with values from 32 to 126. This includes all
    numbers and letters. If you need to enter a value below 32 or above 126,
    you  must enter the value of the character as three digits between angle
    brackets.  For example, to enter the escape character, which has a value of
    27, followed  by a capital N, you would enter the following in the "Control
    Sequence" field.
    <027>N
 Note: Each function can have a control sequence of up to 255 bytes. One byte
 is  used by each letter or number that you enter in the "Control Sequence"
 field.  One byte is also used by each control character value, such as escape:
 <027>,  that you enter. So entering <027>N uses two bytes. Entering
 <027>UB<004><246>  uses 5 bytes.
 4. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog. The function that you
    entered is listed in the "Functions" list.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 416. Modify a Function of a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify a Function


 1. Select a function from the "Functions" list.
    You cannot select a function and a mode at the same time in this dialog.
 2. Choose "Modify."
    The "Modify Function" dialog appears. The name of the Printer Device is
    shown at the top of the dialog for your reference.
 3. (Optional) Enter a new name for the function in the "Function Name" field.
 4. Enter the characters used by this printer as a control sequence to engage
    this function.
    You can type in characters with values from 32 to 126. This includes all
    numbers and letters. If you need to enter a value below 32 or above 126,
    you  must enter the value of the character as three digits between angle
    brackets.  For example, to enter the escape character, which has a value of
    27, followed  by a capital N, you would enter the following in the "Control
    Sequence" field.
    <027>N
 Note: Each function can have a control sequence of up to 255 bytes. One byte
 is  used by each letter or number that you enter in the "Control Sequence"
 field.  One byte is also used by each control character value, such as escape:
 <027>,  that you enter. So entering <027>N uses two bytes. Entering
 <027>UB<004><246>  uses 5 bytes.
 5. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 417. Delete a Function of a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Function


 1. Select a function from the "Functions" list.
    You cannot select a function and a mode at the same time in this dialog.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The "Delete Function" dialog appears. The name of the Printer Device is
    shown at the top of the dialog for your reference. All fields are gray. You
    cannot change anything; you can only see what you are deleting.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 418. Add a Mode to a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Mode to this Printer Device


 To create a mode, you select some of functions that have been defined for this
 printer device. You can repeat a function in a mode definition. Functions are
 executed in the order listed.
 1. Choose "Create Mode."
    The "Create Mode" dialog appears. The name of the Printer Device is shown
    at  the top of the dialog for your reference.
    All of the functions defined for this printer are listed in the "Device
    Functions" list box.
 2. Enter a name for the new mode in the "Mode Name" field.
 3. Select the function that you want to be executed first from the "Device
    Functions" list.
 4. Choose "Add Below."
 5. Select the function that you want to be executed next from the "Device
    Functions" list.
    You can select the same function more than once if the mode requires it.
 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all of the functions that you want as part of
    this mode are list in the correct order in the "Mode Functions" list box.
    If you make a mistake, use "Delete" or "Add Above" to rearrange the
    functions listed in "Mode Functions."
 7. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 419. Modify a Mode of a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify a Mode


 1. Select a mode from the "Modes" list in the "Modify Printer Devices" dialog.
    You cannot select both a function and a mode in this dialog.
 2. Choose "Modify."
    The "Modify Mode" dialog appears. The name of the Printer Device is shown
    at  the top of the dialog for your reference.
    All of the functions defined for this printer are listed in the "Device
    Functions" list box.
 3. (Optional) Enter a new name for the mode in the "Mode Name" field.
 4. Select the function that you want to add to the mode from the "Device
    Functions" list.
 5. Select the function in the "Mode Functions" list next to where you want to
    insert the new function.
 6. Choose "Add Below" or "Add Above" to insert the selected device function in
    the correct place in the "Mode Functions" list.
 7. Select any mode function that you want to delete from the definition of
    this  mode.
 8. Choose "Delete."
    The selected function is no longer a part of this mode definition. The
    function is still a part of this device definition, but is not used for
    this  mode.
 9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 as needed.
 10.Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 420. Delete a Mode of a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Mode


 1. Select a mode from the "Modes" list.
    You cannot delete the [Reinitialization] mode from the list, even if it has
    no functions defined. You should add functions to the [Reinitialization]
    mode  to restart your printer and create the correct settings.
    You cannot select a function and a mode at the same time in this dialog.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The "Delete Mode" dialog appears. The name of the Printer Device is shown
    at  the top of the dialog for your reference. All fields are gray. You
    cannot  change anything; you can only see what you are deleting.
 3. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 421. Create a Function dialog for a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Function for a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to enter a name and the necessary control sequences to
 define a printer device function. The necessary control sequences (also called
 control codes, or escape codes) are described in the operator's manual of your
 printer device.
 A function is an action that the printer device can perform, such as bold
 text,  or proportional spacing. You cause the printer device to perform the
 function  by sending control codes to the printer device.
 To create a new function definition

 1. Enter a function name in the "Function" field.
    You can use any name that you want to, but you should choose names that
    represent the printer's actions.
    You can use up to 8 characters for the name. It must begin with a letter.
 2. Enter a control sequence in the "Control Sequence" field by typing the
    characters that the printer uses to set that function.
    See the operator's manual for your printer device to find the correct
    control sequences for printer device functions.
    You can type in characters with values from 32 to 126. This includes all
    numbers and letters. If you need to enter a value below 32 or above 126,
    you  must enter the value of the character as three digits between angle
    brackets.  For example, to enter the escape character, which has a value of
    27, followed  by a capital N, you would enter the following in the "Control
    Sequence" field.
    <027>N
 Note: Each function can have a control sequence of up to 255 bytes. One byte
 is  used by each letter or number that you enter in the "Control Sequence"
 field.  One byte is also used by each control character value, such as escape:
 <027>,  that you enter. So entering <027>N uses two bytes. Entering
 <027>UB<004><246>  uses 5 bytes.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The name of the function definition that you entered is added to the
    "Functions" list. The function can now be used by the printer device or by
    any  mode you define for this printer device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 422. Modify a Function dialog for a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify a Function for a Printer Device


 This dialog displays and allows you to modify the name and control sequence
 for  the function that you selected in the "Functions" dialog box. A function
 is an  action that the printer device can perform, such as bold text, or
 proportional  spacing. You cause the printer device to perform the function by
 sending  control codes to the printer device.
 To modify a function definition

 1. (Optional) Enter a new function name in the "Function" field.
    You can use any name that you want to, but you should choose names that
    represent the printer's actions.
    You can use up to 8 characters for the name. It must begin with a letter.
 2. (Optional) Enter or edit the control sequence in the "Control Sequence"
    field by typing the characters that the printer uses to set that function.
    See the operator's manual for your printer device to find the correct
    control sequences for printer device functions.
    You can type in characters with values from 32 to 126. This includes all
    numbers and letters. If you need to enter a value below 32 or above 126,
    you  must enter the value of the character as three digits between angle
    brackets.  For example, to enter the escape character, which has a value of
    27, followed  by a capital N, you would enter the following in the "Control
    Sequence" field.
    <027>N
 Note: Each function can have a control sequence of up to 255 bytes. One byte
 is  used by each letter or number that you enter in the "Control Sequence"
 field.  One byte is also used by each control character value, such as escape:
 <027>,  that you enter. So entering <027>N uses two bytes. Entering
 <027>UB<004><246>  uses 5 bytes.
 3. Choose "OK."
    Any changes that you made are retained in the printer device definition. If
    you changed the function name, the name changes in the "Functions" list
    box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 423. Delete a Function dialog for a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Function for a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to delete the function that you selected in the "Modify
 Printer Device" dialog box. All fields are gray; you can only see what you are
 deleting.
 To delete a function definition

 1. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog. The selected function is
    deleted from the list and cannot be used by the printer device definition
    or  any of its modes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 424. Create a Mode Definition dialog for a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Mode Definition for a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to enter a name and a list of functions to define a
 printer mode.
 A mode is a combination of functions that you define to prepare the printer
 device for specific printing needs. For example, you might define a print mode
 called "Title" that includes functions for bold, double wide, and letter
 quality.
 To create a new mode definition

 1. Enter a name for the new mode in the "Mode name" field.
    You can choose any 8 character name that begins with a letter. You should
    use names that reflect the purpose of the printer mode.
 Example: You might have modes for different types of documents like memos or
 reports, or for different people's preferred settings, or for the requirements
 of different papers or forms that you use.
 2. Select the function that you want to be executed first from the "Device
    Functions" list.
 3. Choose "Add Below."
 4. Select the function that you want to be executed next from the "Device
    Functions" list.
    You can select the same function more than once if the mode requires it.
 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all of the functions that you want as part of
    this mode are list in the correct order in the "Mode Functions" list box.
    If you make a mistake, use "Delete" or "Add Above" to rearrange the
    functions listed in "Mode Functions."
 6. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 425. Modify a Mode Definition dialog for a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify a Mode Definition for a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to modify a mode definition that you previously
 entered.
 From this dialog, you can change the name of the mode or which functions are
 executed to enter this mode.
 A mode is a combination of functions that you define to prepare the printer
 device for specific printing needs. For example, you might define a print mode
 called "Title" that includes functions for bold, double wide, and letter
 quality.
 To modify an existing mode definition

 1. (Optional) Enter a new name for the mode in the "Mode Name" field.
 2. Select the function that you want to add to the mode from the "Device
    Functions" list.
 3. Select the function in the "Mode Functions" list next to where you want to
    insert the new function.
 4. Choose "Add Below" or "Add Above" to insert the selected device function in
    the correct place in the "Mode Functions" list.
 5. Select any mode function that you want to delete from the definition of
    this  mode.
 6. Choose "Delete."
    The selected function is no longer a part of this mode definition. The
    function is still a part of this device definition, but is not used for
    this  mode.
 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 as needed.
 8. Choose "OK."
    You return to the "Modify Printer Device" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 426. Delete a Mode Definition dialog for a Printer Device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Mode Definition for a Printer Device


 This dialog allows you to delete a mode definition. All fields are gray; you
 can only see what you are deleting.
 To delete a mode definition

 1. Choose "OK."
    The mode name that you selected is removed from the "Modes" list box. That
    mode can no longer be used by this printer device. The functions that the
    deleted mode used are not affected by this operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 427. Print Job Configurations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Modify the Job Configurations


 The "Job Configuration" page lists the names different print job
 configurations  that can be used. You can add new job configurations or modify
 the parameters  of existing configurations.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just
 individual pages. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need
 to the pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page
 of  the dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Change Which Print Job Configuration is the Default
    Create a New Print Job Configuration
    View or Modify a Print Job Configuration
    Delete a Print Job Configuration

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Name/Owner" lists the names of the print job configurations that can be
       used, and at  which object the configuration was defined. Print job
       configurations that were  defined in any Organization or Organizational
       Unit above this object are  included in this list.

    "New" opens the "Create Print Job Configuration" dialog, where you can
       enter a  name and parameters for a new print job configuration.

    "Modify" opens the "Modify Print Job Configuration" dialog, where you can
       view and  modify the parameters of any of the print job configurations
       that are listed.

    "Delete" removes the selected print job configuration from the list. It can
       no  longer be used.

    "Default" marks the selected print job configuration as the default
       configuration,  as noted by the printer icon.

    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of this dialog and returns
       you  to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the object dialog. Changes to this page have already been
       saved;  changes to other pages will be lost.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 428. Change Which Print Job Configuration is the Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Which Print Job Configuration is the Default


 To change to a new default print job configuration

 1. Select the print job configuration that you want to make the default
    configuration from the "Print Job Configurations" list box.
 2. Choose "Default."
    The printer icon to the left of the configuration names moves to the
    selected configuration. That configuration is now the default.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 429. Create a Print Job Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create a Print Job Configuration


 To create a new print job configuration

 1. Complete each of the applicable fields in the dialog.
 2. Choose "OK."
    The name of the new print job configuration is added to the list.

 Screen regions and buttons
    Print Job Configuration fields



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 430. Modify a Print Job Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Modify a Print Job Configuration


 To view or modify a print job configuration

 1. Change any fields in the dialog.
    You cannot change the name of the print job configuration. You must create
    a  new print job configuration.
 2. Choose "OK."
    The print job configuration is saved with any new values that you entered.

 Screen regions and buttons
    Print Job Configuration fields


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 431. Delete a Print Job Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete a Print Job Configuration


 To delete a print job configuration

 1. Select a print job confguration from the "Name/Owner" list box.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The selected print job configuration is removed from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 432. Print Job Configuration Fields ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Job Configuration Fields


    "Print Job Name" field contains the name of this print job configuration,
       as it  is listed in the Job Configuration list box, and as a user can
       specify it to be  used for a printing job. This field is entered when
       you create a new job  configuration, but it cannot be changed when you
       modify other fields later.

    "Number of Copies" field indicates how many copies of the file should be
       printed.  The number of copies can range from 1 to 65,000.

    "File Contents" field can be a byte stream or text. If text is selected,
       then  tabs are recognized and "Tab Size" can be set.

    "Tab Size" is the width in characters that each tab character should be
       expanded to. This field is only available if you select text file
       contents  above.

    "Suppress Form Feed" checkbox determines whether a form feed is sent when
       each job  is completed.

    "Notify When Done" checkbox determines whether a message is sent to the
       workstation of the print job originator when the job has finished
       printing.

    "Local Printer" field allows you to specify which parallel port of your
       computer  the print jobs should be sent to. The values listed in the
       drop box are LPT1  through LPT9.

    "Auto end cap" checkbox determines if the CAPTURE command automatically
       ends  when each print job is completed.

    "Printer/Queue" field allows you to select the Printer or Queue object that
       the print job  configuration should use. The Select Object dialog
       appears when the Browser  button is selected.

    "Device" field allows you to select which printer device this print job
       configuration uses.

    "Mode" field allows you to select which mode this print job configuration
       uses.  The modes listed are defined by which Device you selected.

    "Form Name" field allows you to select which printer form this print job
       configuration uses.

    "Print Banner" checkbox determines if this print job configuration should
       include a banner page at the beginning of each print job. If this
       checkbox is  selected, the next two fields are available.

    "Name" field is part of the banner page that will be printed at the
       beginning of  a print job that uses this configuration. If this field is
       left blank, the name  of the user who originated the print job is used.
       This field can only be  entered if "Print Banner" is selected.

    "Banner Name" field is part of the banner page that will be printed at the
       beginning of a print job that uses this configuration. If this field is
       left  blank, the name of the file being printed is used. This field can
       only be  entered if "Print Banner" was selected.

    "Enable timeout" checkbox determines if each print job will time out after
       a  specified period of time. If this is selected, a Timeout Count can be
       entered.

    "Timeout Count" field is the number of seconds that each print job takes to
       time  out if the printer does not respond. You must select "Enable
       timeout" to enter  a value here. Timeout can range from 1 to 1000
       seconds.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 433. File and Directory Trustee Paths of a user or group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View or Change an Object's Rights to Files and Directories


 The "Rights to Files and Directories" page shows all trustee assignments that
 this object has to files and directories on a volume. For example, you can
 -  See trustee assignments that this object has to a directory
 -  Change this object's trustee assignment to any directory or file
 -  See the effective rights of this object to any directory or file
 You can view trustee assignments on volumes that are listed in the "Volumes"
 list. To see trustees on a volume other than those listed, you must add that
 volume to the list.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just
 individual pages. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need
 to the pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page
 of  the dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    View Trustee Assignments to a Directory or File
    Change Trustee Assignments To a Directory or File
    View Effective Rights to a Directory or File
    Add a Volume to the Volume List
    Remove a Volume from the Volume List

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Volumes" lists Volume objects. You can see this object's trustee
       assignments to  any directories or files on these volumes.

    "Show" lets you to add a Volume object to the "Volumes" list.

    "Hide" lets you remove a Volume object from the "Volumes" list.

    "Files and Directories" lists files and directories that this object has a
       trustee assignment to. If the icon for the file or directory appears
       with a  slash mark through it (EXAMPLE), you cannot change the trustee
       assignment to  that file or directory; you can only see which rights it
       includes.

    "Add" lets you create a new trustee assignment for this object to a
       directory  or file.

    "Delete" lets you delete this object's trustee assignment to the directory
       or file.

    "Rights" displays the rights that make up the trustee assignment to the
       directory  or file.

    "Effective rights" lets you see this object's effective rights to a
       directory or  file.

    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of the dialog and returns you
       to  the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog box without saving the changes entered in any
       page.


 Related topics

    Trustees and Trustee Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 434. See a user's trustee assignment to a file or directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View Trustee Assignments to a Directory or File


 1. From the "Volumes" list, select the volume that contains the directory or
    file.
 2. From the "Directories and files" list, select the directory or file.
    The directory or file's trustee assignment appears in the "Rights" area.
    Note: If you have multiple Browser windows open, the volume name shown for
    this file may not be the one that you selected it from. This has no affect
    on  operation, as the same physical file is simply being viewed from
    different  objects or views.
    Note: If you don't have rights to change this trustee assignment, the name
    of the file and all rights will be grayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 435. Change a user's trustee assignment to a file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Trustee Assignments to a Directory or File


 1. From the "Volumes" list, select the volume that contains the directory or
    file.
 2. From the "Directories and files" list, select the directory or file.
    Note: If you don't have rights to change this trustee assignment, the name
    of the file and all rights will be grayed.
    The rights that make up this object's trustee assignment to the file or
    directory appear in the rights area.
    Note: If you have multiple Browser windows open, the volume name shown for
    this file may not be the one that you selected it from. This has no affect
    on  operation, as the same physical file is simply being viewed from
    different  objects or views.
 3. Select the check boxes by rights that you want to change.
    Note: If the names of the rights are grayed, you don't have rights to
    change  this trustee assignment. You must have the Access Control right to
    the file or  directory.
 4. Choose "OK."
    The new trustee assignment is now effective for this object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 436. Add a Volume to the list of volumes in File Trustee Paths page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Volume to the Volume List


 Note: The "Rights to Files and Directories" dialog lists volumes on which this
 object is a trustee. Being on this list does not affect the volumes.
 1. Choose "Add."
 2. Select Volume objects that you want listed in the "Rights to Files and
    Directories" dialog.
    You can view or change trustee assignments only to files and directories
    located on volumes listed here.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The volumes you selected are added to the "Volumes" list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 437. Remove a volume from the list of volumes on the File Trustee Paths page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Remove a Volume from the Volume List


 Note: The "Rights to Files and Directories" dialog lists volumes on which this
 object is a trustee. Being on this list does not affect the volumes.
 1. Select a Volume from the list at the top of the dialog.
 2. Choose "Remove."
    The volume is removed from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 438. View Effective Rights to a Directory or File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

View This Object's Effective Rights to a Directory or File


 1. Select a file or directory in the "Files and Directories" list.
    Note: If you have multiple Browser windows open, the volume name shown for
    this file may not be the one that you selected it from. This has no affect
    on  operation, as the same physical file is simply being viewed from
    different  objects or views.
 2. Choose "Effective rights..."
    This object's effective rights to the object you selected are shown below
    the "Object name" field.
    Effective rights are bold; non-effective rights are grayed.
    Choose a property from the list to see effective rights to specific
    properties.
 3. Choose "Close."
    Note: If you have made changes to this dialog, they will not be reflected
    in  "Effective Rights" until you exit this dialog with "OK." When you
    return to  this dialog, any previous changes are reflected in "Effective
    Rights."
 Related topics

    More about Effective Rights


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 439. Add or Delete a Value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add or Delete Values


 To add a value

 1. Choose "Add."
 2. Enter a value.
    2a.If the property that you are adding a value to requires an object as a
       value, select an object.
    2b.If the property that you are adding a value to requires text or a number
       as a value, enter text .
 3. Choose "OK."
    The value is added to the list.
 To delete a value

 1. Select the value that you want to delete from the box above the buttons in
    this dialog
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The value is removed from the list.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Add" lets you add values.

    "Delete" lets you delete values.

    "OK" saves changes and closes this dialog box.

    "Cancel" closes this dialog box without saving changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 440. Select an Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select an Object


 To choose an object

 1. Select an objects from the right-side list box below "Directory Context"
    until the desired object is shown on the left side of the dialog.
    Use the right side to browse up and down the Directory tree.
 2. Select the object you want from the "Object" list box.
    Only certain classes of objects are listed here for you to select. For
    example. if you are entering the Profile object for a User, only Profiles
    will  be listed.
    The object appears in the field at the top of the dialog.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The object that you selected is shown in the previous dialog.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Current Context" shows your current context in the Directory tree.

    "Objects" shows the objects that you can select. The caption of this list
       box  changes depending on what you can select for the previous dialog.
       Only certain  classes of objects are listed here for you to select. For
       example. if you are  entering the Profile object for a User, only
       Profiles will be listed. A maximum  of over 4,600 objects can be listed
       here.

    "Directory Context" shows objects at the next level down the directory
       tree. A  maximum of 8,192 objects can be listed here.

    "Object Name" shows the name of the object that you have selected from the
       "Object" list.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 441. Select One or More Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select One or More Objects


 To choose an object

 1. Select objects from the right-side list box below "Directory Context" until
    the desired object is shown on the left side of the dialog.
    Use the right side to browse up and down the Directory tree.
 2. Select the object you want from the "Object" list box.
    Only certain classes of objects are listed here for you to select. For
    example. if you are entering the Profile object for a User, only Profiles
    will  be listed.
    To select multiple objects that are next to each other in the list, hold
    down the <Shift> key as you select objects. To select multiple objects that
    are  not next to each other in the list, hold down the <Ctrl> key as you
    select  objects.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The object that you selected is shown in the previous dialog.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Current Context" shows your current context in the Directory tree.

    "Objects" shows the objects that you can select. The caption of this list
       box  changes depending on what you can select for the previous dialog.
       Only certain  classes of objects are listed here for you to select. For
       example. if you are  entering the Profile object for a User, only
       Profiles will be listed. A maximum  of over 4,600 objects can be listed
       here.

    "Directory Context" shows objects at the next level down the directory
       tree. A  maximum of 8,192 objects can be listed here.

    "Object Name" shows the name of the object that you have selected from the
       "Object" list.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 442. Change Context within the Select Object Dialog Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change Context to Select an Object


 This dialog allows you to change the context that you are viewing in this
 dialog.
 By changing your context, you can view other parts of the Directory tree that
 you have rights to browse, without being blocked by upper areas of the
 Directory tree that you do not have rights to browse.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 443. Select a bindery object from a pre-4.0 server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select an Object from a Bindery


 Use this dialog to select an object that exists in the bindery of a v3.x
 server. This allows you to do limited management tasks on v3.x servers, such
 as  changing the owner of a file, or making trustee assignments to a file or
 directory.
 To select an object from a bindery
 1. Select the user or group from the list shown.
 2. Choose "OK."
    The object that you selected is shown in the field that you were in before
    entering this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 444. Add Text dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter a Property Value


 To enter a value for a property

 1. Type the value that you want to add to the property field.
    You can only enter one item in this dialog.
 2. Choose "OK."
    The value appears in the "Selected property" field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 445. Network Address dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set a Network Address


 The "Network Addresses" page shows the address of the object you selected in
 all network protocols. through which it can be accessed. These addresses tell
 Directory Services how to locate the physical object, depending on which
 protocol is being used. For example, you can
 -  See the address of the object (for different protocols)
 -  Add or delete addresses
 Because many different protocols can be active on the network at one time, an
 object can  have an address for each protocol.
 EXAMPLE of a server with addresses for IPX, AppleTalk, and Ethernet
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to the
 pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page of the
 dialog.

 Procedures
    How to use the Object Dialog
    Add a Network Address
    Delete an Network Address

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Network Protocol" lists the protocol for the new address. Complete the
       fields in  the dialog with values appropriate for the protocol you use.

    "Add..." lets you add another network address to the "Network Addresses"
       list.

    "Delete" removes the selected network address from the "Network Addresses"
       list.

    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of the Object dialog and
       returns  you to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog without saving the changes entered in any page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 446. Network Address dialog - Add ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a Network Address


 1. Choose the protocol of the address by choosing a protocol button.
 2. Choose "Add..."
 3. Fill in all fields for the new address.
 4. Choose "OK" on the dialog for the protocol that you selected.
    The new network address is added to the "Network addresses" list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 447. Network Address dialog-Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Deleting a Network Address


 1. Select a network address from the "Network Addresses" list.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The network address is deleted from the list. The object can no longer be
    found at that address. If that was the only address using a certain
    protocol,  then no one using that protocol can find the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 448. IPX SPX Protocol Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IPX SPX Protocol Dialog


 Enter a value for each field shown here to define a network address in this
 protocol. See your hardware documentation for more information on each field
 if  necessary.
    The "Network" number is assigned arbitrarily to a cable segment when the
       network is set up.

    The "Node" number is unique to each computer, and is determined by the
       network interface board in the computer. For Ethernet, the number is set
       at the  factory; for Token Ring and ArcNet cards, the number can be
       selected by jumpers  on the board.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 449. SDLC Protocol Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SDLC Protocol Dialog


 Enter a value for each field shown here to define a network address in this
 protocol. See your hardware documentation for more information on each field
 if  necessary.
 SDLC stands for synchronous data link control. It is a protocol used to
 receive  from or transmit data to SNA networks (systems network architecture).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 450. Token Ring and Ethernet Protocol Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Token Ring and Ethernet Protocol Dialog


 Enter a value for each field shown here to define a network address in this
 protocol. See your hardware documentation for more information on each field
 if  necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 451. TCP/IP Protocol Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TCP/IP Protocol Dialog


 Enter a value for each field shown here to define a network address in this
 protocol. See your hardware documentation for more information on each field
 if  necessary.
 TCP/IP stands for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. An address
 consists of 4 one-byte numbers. The left part tells which part of the network
 the computer is on. The right part tells which computer is referred to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 452. OSI Protocol Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

OSI Protocol Dialog


 Enter a value for each field shown here to define a network address in this
 protocol. See your hardware documentation for more information on each field
 if  necessary.
 OSI stands for Open Systems Interconnection. It is a higher-level protocol
 used  with TCP/IP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 453. AppleTalk Protocol Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AppleTalk Protocol Dialog


 Enter a value for each field shown here to define a network address in this
 protocol. See your hardware documentation for more information on each field
 if  necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 454. Clear Rights Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Clear Button


 Choose "Clear" to make all rights above the "Clear" button undefined. This
 means that none of these rights are explicitly granted to this trustee, but
 rights to this object can still be inherited.
 Note: You are deleting an entry from the ACL property.
 All check boxes in front of the rights become grayed.
 Example: You don't want this user to have explicit object rights anymore, so
 you choose "Clear" under the list of object rights. All boxes become grayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 455. Clear Filter Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Clear Filter Button


 Choose "Clear Filter" to clear all rights in the Inherited Rights Filter so
 that no rights are filtered. Any trustee with a trustee assignment above this
 object in the Directory tree can then inherit the same rights to this object.
 Note: You are deleting an entry from the Access Control List property.
 All check boxes by the rights become grayed.
 Example: You want to allow users without a trustee assignment to this object
 to  have the same access as they have to its parent container. Choose "Clear
 filter." The check boxes become grayed, and all rights can be inherited by any
 trustee of the container object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 456. See Also details page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using the See Also Page


 The "See Also" page gives you a place to list the names of objects that are
 related to the object you selected. A supervisor or manager can use it to
 record information about this object.
 Note: This list is for your reference only. NetWare does not access this
 information.
 You can list the complete name of related objects. You cannot enter text to
 describe the relationship of other objects to this object. For example, you
 can
 -  See which objects are listed as having information related to the selected
    object
 -  Add objects to or delete objects from the list
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to the
 pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page of the
 dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog Box
    Add a New Object to the "See Also" Page
    Delete an Existing from the "See Also" Page

 Screen regions and buttons
    "See Also" lists the names of related objects

    "Add" opens a dialog where you choose an object to add to this list.

    "Delete" removes the selected object from the list

    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of the Object dialog and
       returns  you to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog box without saving the changes entered in any
       page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No Title for this topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a New Object to the "See Also" Page


 1  Choose "Add..."
 2. Select objects that you want to add to the "See Also" page.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The objects you selected are added to the page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No Title for this topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete an Object from the "See Also" Page


 1. Select the object that you want to delete from the "See Also" list.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The object is deleted from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 457. Operators detail page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

How to Use the "Operators" Page


 Use the "Operators" page to record operators of an object. For example, you
 can
 -  See which objects are listed as operators
 -  Add objects to or delete objects from the list of operators
 Note: This list is for your reference only and doesn't affect who can use the
 object .Some utilities may use this list to validate who can access
 statistical  information about a NetWare server.
 A supervisor or manager can use it to record information about this object.
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to the
 pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page of the
 dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Add a New Operator
    Delete an Operator

 Screen regions and buttons
    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of the Object dialog and
       returns you to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog box without saving the changes entered in any
       page.




ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No Title for this topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add a New Operator


 1. Choose "Add..."
 2. Select select objects that you want to add as operators.
 3. Choose "OK."
    The objects you selected are listed as operators.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No Title for this topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete an Operator


 1. Select an operator from the "Operators" list.
 2. Choose "Delete."
    The operator is removed from the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 458. Enter a user's mailing address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set Address Information


 The "Address" page shows the postal address of the object you selected. For
 example, you can
 -  See the address of this object
 -  Set the mailing address to match the address in the object's container
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to the
 pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page of the
 dialog.
 You can search on individual fields in the top half of the page. The bottom
 half cannot be searched.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Copy to Label" applies the information entered at the top of the page to
       the  bottom part.

    "Street address" is for the number and street name.

    "Post office box" can be entered here.

    "City" is for the name of the town.

    "State or province" is where you enter the state or province

    "Postal (Zip) code" (for USA) is where you enter the zip code. For other
       countries enter the appropriate information.

    "Copy address" copies the information entered at the top into the fields in
       the  Postal Address area.

    "Postal Address" contains fields that can be edited (but not searched).
       This area  can be customized for mailing labels

    Note: If you enter Street address and Post office box information in the
    fields at the top of the page, only the Post office box information will
    appear  in the bottom section in Postal Address.
    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of the dialog box and returns
       you to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog box without saving the changes entered in any
       page.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 459. Create or Change a Login Script ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create or Change a Login Script


 Use the "Login Script" page to specify commands that automatically execute
 when  a user logs in. For example, you can
 -  Add a drive mapping to a login script
 -  Add a command to run a program automatically when the user logs in
 Important: "OK" and "Cancel" affect the entire Object dialog, not just this
 page. Do not choose "OK" until you've entered all changes you need to the
 pages. If you choose "Cancel" you will lose all changes in every page of the
 dialog.

 Procedures
    How to Use the Object Dialog
    Edit the Login Scipt
    Copy A Login Script From Another Location
    Determine what scripts will be executed during login

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Edit box" is where you view of change the login script.

    "OK" saves the changes specified in all pages of the dialog box and returns
       you to the Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog box without saving the changes entered in any
       page.

 Related Topics

    Login Script Commands



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 460. Determine the Order that Login Scripts are Executed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Determine What Scripts will be Executed at Login


 Use the following list to determine which scripts will be executed when a user
 logs in to Directory Services.
 Login scripts execute in this order:

 1. Is there a login script entered in the container immediately above the
    User's object?
    If so, it is executed first.
 2. Is there a Profile object listed for the User. (see the Login Script page
    of  the User's object dialog).
    If so, the script in the Profile object is executed next.
 3. Is there a login script entered for the User?
    If so, it is executed third.
 4. If none of these scripts exists, a default login script is used to map a
    drive to the \PUBLIC directory so that this user can use NetWare utilities.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 461. Login Script Syntax and Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Login Script Syntax and Commands


 Each login script command must be written on its own line. Blank lines are
 ignored. This list shows commonly used login script commands. There are other
 commands described in "Supervising the Network."
 Commands

 # Executes an external command and returns to the next line of the login
 script.
    Example: #DIR

 ATTACH Connects to a NetWare Server in a different Directory tree.
    Example: Attach Acctserver/John.

 BREAK [on l off] Allows the use of <Ctrl><Break> or <Ctrl><C> to stop the
 login  script.
    Example: BREAK ON

 CLS Clear the display screen.
    Example: CLS

 CONTEXT Change to a specified context.
    Example: CX acct.myserver

 DISPLAY filename Display a text file to the display screen.
    Example: IF day_of_week="Friday" THEN display map

 DRIVE Specifies the default drive.
    Example: Drive F:

 EXIT (filename) Terminate execution of a login script.
    Example: EXIT "Menu Account"

 FDISPLAY Filter out control characters and display only ASCII character values
 1 to 126.
    Example: If day_of_week="Friday" THEN fdisplay map

 FIRE PHASERS Make a sound to alert you to certain conditions.
    Example: If day_of_week="Friday" THEN fire phasers 3 times

 GOTO label Skip part of the script and jump to another label. Usually used
 with  an IF conditional.
    Example: Loop:

    Set X=<X>+ "1"

    Write <X>

    IF <X> is less than value "10"

    GOTO loop

 IF ... THEN Test conditions to execute or skip parts of a login script.
    Example: IF day_of_week="friday" THEN

    Write "It's the Weekend!"

 INCLUDE Execute another file of login script commands before continuing with
 this login script.
    Example: INCLUDE sys:public\script.fil

 MACHINE Set the machine name in the DOS environment.
    Example: MACHINE = "IBM_PC"

 MAP Set drive mappings during login using a Volume or Directory Map object.
    Example: MAP g:=.SALES_Vol.Novell:Apps\WP

 PAUSE Temporarily stop the login script.
    Example: IF hour24="23" then PAUSE

 REMARK Put comments in the login script or prevent commands from being
 executed.
    Example: REM temporary drive, delete 1/93

 SET name = "value" Set or change DOS or OS/2 environment variables.
    Example: SET prompt = "$p$g"

 SET TIME [ON l OFF] Synchronize a workstation with the servers (SET TIME ON).
 SET TIME ON is the default.
    Example: SET TIME OFF

 WRITE Print messages to the screen.
    Example: WRITE "Hello World"



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 462. Define Additional Properties Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Defining Additional Properties


 In the "Create" dialog, you enter only enough information to name the object.
 Choose "Define additional properties" to enter values for other properties
 associated with the object.
 To define additional properties

 1. In the "Create" dialog, select "Define additional properties."
 2. Choose "Create."
 3. Enter needed information in the various pages of the object dialog.
 4. Choose "OK."
    The new object appears in the Browser.
 Note: You can change an object's property values by opening the object's
 dialog  and making changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 463. Define additional properties checkbox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Opening an Object Dialog


 There are several ways to open an object's dialog.
 -  Double-click on the object (leaf objects only).
    Double-clicking on a container object displays the objects it holds.
 -  Right-click the mouse on the object and select "Details" from the menu that
    appears.
 -  Single-click the object and choose "Details" from the "Object" menu.
 -  Single-click the object and choose the Details icon (need the graphic) from
    the Speed Bar.
 -  When creating a new object in the "Create" dialog, select "Define
    additional  properties" and choose "Create."
 Related topics

    How to Use the Object Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 464. Effective Rights to an object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Effective Rights to an Object


 Effective rights are the rights that an object can use to access information
 about another object.
 In this diagram, if User ESMITH wants to access Profile MANAGERS, User
 ESMITH's  effective rights to do so can come from several places:

 -  Trustee assignments on Profile MANAGERS that list User ESMITH (explicit
    rights are granted)
 -  Trustee assignments on Profile MANAGERS that list Organizational Unit SALES
    PV (inherited from trustee's container)
    Trustee assignments on Org. Unit SALES LA  that list User ESMITH; rights
    must pass through Profile MANAGERS's Inherited Rights Filter before
    becoming  effective. (inherited from object's container.)
 -  Trustee assignments on Org. Unit SALES LA  that list Org. Unit SALES
    PV;rights must pass through Profile MANAGERS's Inherited Rights Filter
    before  becoming effective. (inherited from object's container and
    trustee's container.)
 -  Trustee assignments to any object listed in the Security equivalences list
    of User ESMITH, such as a Group object (only valid when the object
    requesting  rights is a User object).
 Note: Every object is security equivalent to all of the objects in its
 complete  name, that is, all of the objects directly above it to the root of
 the  Directory tree. This security equivalence cannot be changed, but none of
 those  objects are listed in the Security Equivalences list.
 If User ESMITH has a trustee assignment to Org. Unit SALES LA  and to Profile
 MANAGERS, the Trustee assignment on Profile MANAGERS overrides the trustee
 assignment on Org. Unit SALES LA. Trustee assignments to Group, however, are
 added to previous trustee assignment for user objects.
 You cannot change effective rights directly. You must locate the trustee
 assignments where the rights were granted and change it, or add an Inherited
 Rights Filter to block rights.
 If you selected one trustee before choosing the Effective Rights button, the
 effective rights of that trustee will be displayed. Otherwise, you can use the
 Browser button to the right of the name field  to choose whose effective
 rights you want to view.
 You must have the Write or Supervisor property right to an object's ACL
 property to view other object's effective rights to the object.
 Note: If you have made changes anywhere in the Trustees dialog, those changes
 will not be reflected in the "Effective Rights" dialog until you exit the
 "Trustees" dialog with "OK." When you return to the "Trustees" dialog, any
 previous changes are reflected in the effective rights of an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 465. Effective Rights Paths to an object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Effective Rights Paths to an Object


 Effective rights are the rights that an object can actually use to access
 information about another object. Effective rights are determined each time
 one  object tries to access another object.
 In this diagram, User ESMITH's effective rights to Profile MANAGERS can come
 from several places:

 -  Trustee assignments on Profile MANAGERS that list User ESMITH (explicit
    rights are granted)
 -  Trustee assignments on Profile MANAGERS that list Organizational Unit SALES
    PV (rights are inherited from trustee's container)
 -  Trustee assignments on Organizational Unit SALES LA  that list User ESMITH;
    rights must pass through Profile MANAGERS's Inherited Rights Filter before
    becoming effective (rights are inherited from object's container)
 -  Trustee assignments on Organzational Unit SALES LA  that list
    Organizational  Unit SALES PV; rights must pass through Profile MANAGERS's
    Inherited Rights  Filter before becoming effective (rights are inherited
    from object's container  and trustee's container)
 -  Trustee assignments to any object listed in the Security equivalences list
    of User ESMITH, such as a Group object (valid only when the object
    requesting  rights is a User object)
 Note: Every object is security equivalent to all of the objects in its
 complete  name, that is, all of the objects directly above it to the root of
 the  Directory tree. This security equivalence cannot be changed, but none of
 those  objects are listed in the Security Equivalences list.
 If User ESMITH has a trustee assignment to Organizational Unit SALES LA  and
 to  Profile MANAGERS, the Trustee assignment on Profile MANAGERS overrides the
 trustee assignment on Organizational Unit SALES LA. Trustee assignments to
 Groups, however, are added to previous trustee assignment for User objects.
 You cannot change effective rights directly. You must locate the trustee
 assignments where the right was granted and change it, or add an Inherited
 Rights Filter to block rights.
 If you select one trustee before choosing "Effective Rights," the effective
 rights of that trustee will be displayed. Otherwise, you can use the Browser
 button to the right of the "Name" field  to choose the object whose effective
 rights you want to view.
 You need the Write or Supervisor property right to an object's ACL property to
 view other object's effective rights to the object.
 Note: If you have made changes anywhere in the "Trustees" dialog, those
 changes  will not be reflected in the "Effective Rights" dialog until you exit
 the  "Trustees" dialog with "OK." When you return to the "Trustees" dialog,
 any  previous changes are reflected in the effective rights of an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 466. Inherited Rights Filter - objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Inherited Rights Filter


 An Inherited Rights Filter blocks rights that would otherwise be inherited by
 objects who had rights granted by a trustee assignment higher in the Directory
 tree.
 Note: The Inherited Rights Filter cannot give rights to anyone, it can only
 take rights away from a user or group that has more rights than you want it to
 have.

 If User ESMITH has a trustee assignment to Org. Unit SALES LA, User ESMITH
 also  inherits rights to Profile MANAGERS. Those rights can be blocked by an
 Inherited Rights Filter on Profile MANAGERS.
 If User ESMITH also has a trustee assignment to Profile MANAGERS, then that
 trustee assignment grants User ESMITH certain rights which are not affected by
 Profile MANAGERS's Inherited Rights Filter.
 If a check box in the Inherited Rights Filter dialog for Profile MANAGERS is
 selected, User ESMITH can inherit that right. If a check box is not selected,
 User ESMITH or Organizational Unit SALES PV must have a trustee assignment to
 Profile MANAGERS.
 An Inherited Rights Filter can block any of the trustee assignment rights,
 including rights for specific properties.
 Object rights and Property rights are inherited separately. An Inherited
 Rights  Filter can block certain property rights without affecting any object
 rights.
 Note: For objects in Directory Services, the Supervisor right can be blocked
 by  the Inherited Rights Filter. For directories and files, the Supervisor
 right  cannot be blocked by the Inherited Rights Filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 467. Effective Rights to a directory or file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Effective Rights in Files and Directories


 An  object's effective rights to a directory or file are the rights that they
 can actually use on the directory or file.
 Effective rights are determined each time someone tries to access a directory
 or file. They are determined by:
 -  Trustee assignments to the directory or file
 -  Inherited rights from trustee assignments to a parent directory
 -  Trustee assignments to objects listed in a User's security equivalences
    list, such as Group objects.
 Any rights granted by a trustee assignment to a directory above this directory
 or file must pass through the Inherited Rights Filter before becoming part of
 the effective rights.
 INote: If a user has a trustee assignment to a directory that is higher in the
 directory structure as well as an assignment to this directory or file, the
 current trustee assignment overrides the previous one. Group trustee
 assignments, however, can be added to a previous user trustee assignment.
 You cannot change effective rights directly. You must locate the trustee
 assignments where the rights were granted and change it, or add an Inherited
 Rights Filter to block some rights.
 If you select one trustee before choosing "Effective Rights", the effective
 rights of that trustee will be displayed. Otherwise, you can use the Browser
 button to the right of the "Name" field  to choose which user's effective
 rights to this directory or file you want to view.
 You must have the Access Control right to a directory or file to view other
 user's effective rights to it. However, If the directory or file is not on a
 v4.0 NetWare volume, you can only see your own effective rights.
 Note: If you have made changes anywhere in the "Trustees" dialog, those
 changes  will not be reflected in the "Effective Rights" dialog until you exit
 the  "Trustees" dialog with "OK." When you return to the "Trustees" dialog,
 any  previous changes are reflected in the effective rights of a user or
 group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 468. Inherited Rights Filter-files and directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Inherited Rights Filter for Files and Directories


 An Inherited Rights Filter blocks rights that would otherwise be inherited by
 users who had rights granted by a trustee assignment higher in the directory
 structure.
 If a User or Group has a trustee assignment to a directory or file, that
 assignment will override the Inherited Rights Filter on the same directory or
 file. But if a User or Group only has rights to a directory or file by
 inheriting rights from a directory higher in the directory structure, those
 rights can be blocked by the Inherited Rights Filter.
 An Inherited Rights Filter can block any of the rights that can be specified
 in  a trustee assignment.
 The Inherited Rights Filter cannot give rights to anyone, it can only take
 rights away from a user or group that has more rights than you want it to
 have.
 If a check box in the Inherited Rights Filter dialog is selected, users can
 inherit that right for this directory or file. If the check box is not
 selected, only users and groups with a trustee assignment on this directory or
 file are allowed to have that right.
 Note: For directories and files, the Supervisor right cannot be blocked by the
 Inherited Rights Filter. For other objects, the Supervisor right can be
 blocked  by the Inherited Rights Filter.
 Example: Users in Group SALES have Create and Erase rights for your PROJECTS
 directory; however, you don't want anyone to have rights to the JANUARY
 subdirectory under PROJECTS. Create an Inherited Rights Filter for JANUARY
 doesn't have any check boxes selected. Rights given for PROJECTS cannot be
 inherited by JANUARY (except the Supervisor right). The Inherited Rights
 Filter  blocks all rights that are not given to trustees of JANUARY  itself.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 469. Trustees and Trustee Paths ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trustees of this Object and Rights to Other Objects


 You can view both Directory Services objects and file system files and
 directories. This means that you sometimes view object and property rights,
 and  other times view file/directory rights, and the attributes of files or
 directories.
 You can use several access control and security features:
 -  Select an object and choose "Trustees of this Object" from the "Object"
    menu. You can see trustees of the object you selected, its object and
    property  rights, and view and change its Inherited Rights Filter.
 -  Select an object and choose "Rights to Other Objects" from the "Object"
    menu. You see where the object you selected has a trustee assignment. You
    see  object and property rights that this object has to other objects. You
    can't  change the Inherited Rights Filter here.
 -  Select a User object and choose "Details" from the "Object" menu. You see
    which files and directories the User has rights to (by a trustee
    assignment).  You see file and directory rights.
 -  Select a file or directory in a volume and choose "Trustees of this Object"
    from the "Object" menu.The Users and Groups that have rights granted to the
    file or directory through a trustee assignment are listed. You see file and
    directory rights. You can also view and change the file or directory's
    Inherited Rights Filter.
 -  Select a file or directory in a volume and choose "Details" from the
    "Object" menu. Choose the "Trustees" page. The "File or Directory" trustees
    dialog appears.
 -  Volume is a Directory Services object that allows you to work with the file
    system. If you select a Volume and choose "Trustees of this Object" from
    the  "Object" menu, you see a "Trustees" dialog showing who has rights to
    see or  change the Volume object. Object and Property rights are used. If
    you select a  volume and choose "Details" from the "Object" menu and then
    the "Trustees of  the Root Directory" page, you see the file and directory
    rights that apply to  the first level of directories on that volume. File
    and directory rights are  used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 470. Trustees of the Root Object in the Directory Tree ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trustees of the Root Object


 Certain rules control trustees of the root object in the Directory tree (the
 object above the highest Country or Organization object).
 -  When the Directory tree is created, User ADMIN is given the Supervisor
    object right to the root object. You can change the name of User ADMIN, and
    User ADMIN can grant other objects the Supervisor object right to the root
    object.
 -  At least one user must be a trustee of the root object with the Supervisor
    object right. If only one trustee of the root object has the Supervisor
    object  right, you cannot delete that trustee from the "Trustees" list, and
    you cannot  remove the Supervisor object right for that trustee.
    Because the Supervisor object right can be blocked by the Inherited Rights
    Filter on objects below the root object, if you could remove the Supervisor
    object right from the last trustee, you would cut yourself off from part of
    the  Directory tree.
    The NetWare Administrator prevent you from deleting the last trustee with
    Supervisor object right or changing the Inherited Rights Filter when there
    is  no Supervisor. But you could still delete the User that is listed as a
    trustee  with Supervisor object right. Then no one would have the
    Supervisor object  right to part of the Directory tree.
    Keep track of the users that have supervisor object right at the root of
    the  Directory tree or at container objects in the tree so that you do not
    cut  yourself off from any valuable information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 471. The Root Object in the Directory Tree ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Root Object in the Directory Tree


 The root object of the Directory tree contains no information. Its purpose is
 to
 -  Provide the highest point to access different Country and Organization
    objects
 -  Allow trustee assignments granting rights to the entire Directory tree


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 472. The User Object ADMIN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The User Object ADMIN


 The User ADMIN is created when you create the Directory tree. ADMIN is granted
 a trustee assignment to the root object of the Directory tree with the
 Supervisor object right. This allows a network administrator to log in to the
 network as ADMIN, and have sufficient rights to set up the rest of the
 network.
 Once the network has been set up and other objects (including users) have been
 created, ADMIN should grant a trustee assignment to the user chosen to
 supervise the entire Directory tree. After another user has the Supervisor
 object right to the root object, consider deleting the user object ADMIN.
 ADMIN only has rights granted by trustee assignments. Logging in as ADMIN does
 not grant access to everything, like user SUPERVISOR had in previous versions
 of NetWare.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 473. Root Directory of a Volume - Assigning rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Root Directory of a Volume  -  Assigning Rights


 The File and Directory rights for the root directory of each volume are
 recorded in each volume object. These are separate from the Object and
 Property  rights that control access to the volume object.
 When a NetWare server and its volumes are installed, the user installing the
 server and its volumes is assigned as a trustee of the root directory with
 Supervisor file and directory right. As in previous versions of NetWare, the
 supervisor right on files and directories cannot be blocked by an Inherited
 Rights FIlter.
 The trustee who installed the server and volumes must make other trustee
 assignments to the directories and files, using the FILER or NetWare
 Administrator utilities. If another trustee has been granted the Supervisor
 Directory right to the root directory of the volume, the original installer
 trustee can be deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 474. Public as  a Trustee ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Public as a Trustee


 PUBLIC can be listed in the Trustees list of any object to indicate the rights
 that any object requesting access receives if no other rights are effective.
 A person can use all of the rights granted to PUBLIC before logging in.
 Because  of this, no audit trail is created. Restrict the user of PUBLIC as a
 trustee to  non-secure areas.
 You can add PUBLIC as a trustee whenever you are defining an object's or
 file's  trustees. You can also delete PUBLIC as a trustee of any object or
 file.
 PUBLIC is granted the Browse object right to the root object when NetWare v4.0
 is installed. This allows all objects to see all other objects until other
 trustee assignments or Inherited Rights Filters are put in place by a network
 administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 475. Restrictions on granting and removing the supervisor object right ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor Object Right Restrictions


 The Supervisor object right allows unlimited access to an object. Because a
 Directory tree can span many divisions or organizations, the Supervisor object
 right can be blocked from part of the tree by the Inherited Rights Filter.
 If the Supervisor object right is blocked at a container object with an
 Inherited Rights Filter and no other object had the Supervisor object right to
 that object, you can lose access to part of the tree.
 The NETADMIN and NetWare Administrator utilities prevent this problem by
 restricting when you can grant or remove the Supervisor object right.
 -  You can't create an Inherited Rights Filter that blocks the Supervisor
    object right or adds the Supervisor object right to an existing Inherited
    Rights Filter if a trustee doesn't already exist on that object with the
    Supervisor object right.
 -  You can't delete the last trustee of an object with the Supervisor object
    right or remove the Supervisor object right for that trustee if the
    Inherited  Rights Filter of that object blocks the Supervisor object right.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 476. Inheriting Object and Property Rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Inheriting Object Rights  -  Inheriting Property Rights


 Object rights and All property rights are inherited separately. Specific
 property rights are not inherited (because different object classes have
 different properties).
 An object's effective object rights to a container object flow down to objects
 below. An object's effective All property rights to a container object flow
 down to objects below. Once the effective object rights and the effective All
 property rights are determined for a leaf object, they are combined to
 determine the total effective rights to the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> No Title for this topic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Multiple Objects/Trustees


 To select more than one object at the same time, hold down the <Shift> key (to
 select from a previous selection to the current position) or the <Ctrl> key,
 (to select only the additional object at the current position) while selecting
 objects.
 If you select more than one object at once, the changes you make affect this
 object's rights to all selected objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 477. Glossary index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Glossary


    access control
    Access Control file and directory right
    access rights
    ACL (access control list)
    Add or Delete Self property right
    AFP Server object
    Alias object
    all property rights
    archive
    Archive Needed file attribute
    attributes (file/directory)
    auditing
    Bindery object
    block
    block suballocation
    branch
    browse
    Browse object right
    Browser
    Can't Compress file attribute
    class
    Compare property right
    complete name
    Compressed file attribute
    Computer object
    container object
    context
    Copy Inhibit file attribute
    Country object
    Create file and directory right
    Create object right
    current context
    Delete Inhibit directory attribute
    Delete Inhibit file attribute
    Delete Object right
    Directory database
    directory entry
    Directory Map object
    Directory tree
    Don't Compress directory attribute
    Don't Compress file attribute
    Don't Migrate directory attribute
    Don't Migrate file attribute
    drag and drop
    effective rights
    Erase file and directory right
    Execute Only file attribute
    file compression
    File Scan file and directory right
    file specifications
    Group object
    Hidden directory attribute
    Hidden file attribute
    host server
    Immediate Compress directory attribute
    Immediate Compress file attribute
    Indexed file attribute
    inheritance
    Inherited Rights Filter (IRF)
    leaf object
    login script
    managers
    mandatory properties
    Migrated file attribute
    migration
    Modify file and directory right
    name space
    NetWare Server object
    network address
    NetWare Directory Services
    object
    object rights
    object name
    Organization object
    Organizational Role object
    Organizational Unit object
    owner
    page
    parent container
    parent directory
    parent object
    partition
    path
    physical volume name
    Print Queue object
    Print Server object
    Printer object
    Profile object
    property
    property rights
    protocols
    purge
    Purge directory attribute
    Purge file attribute
    queue
    Read Audit directory attribute
    Read Audit file attribute
    Read file and directory right
    Read Only file attribute
    Read property right
    Read Write file attribute
    remote console
    Rename Inhibit directory attribute
    Rename Inhibit file attribute
    Rename object right
    replica
    rights
    salvage
    security equivalence
    Shareable file attribute
    specific property rights
    storage management
    subordinate
    supervisor
    Supervisor file and directory right
    Supervisor object right
    Supervisor property right
    synchronize
    System directory attribute
    System file attribute
    Transactional file attribute
    trustee
    trustee assignment
    User object
    value
    Volume object
    Write Audit directory attribute
    Write Audit file attribute
    Write file and directory right
    Write property right


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 478. Glossary-Access Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

access control


 The process of restricting or controlling access to objects, files, and
 directories by granting rights, assigning passwords, setting attributes, and
 monitoring server security.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 479. Directory rights-Access Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Access Control file and directory right


 For a file

 Grants the right to change the file's trustee assignments and Inherited Rights
 Filter. With this right, users can grant all rights, except Supervisor, to
 other users, including rights that they themselves have not been granted.
 For a directory

 Grants the right to change the trustee assignments and Inherited Rights Filter
 of the directory and any files or subdirectories below it. With this right,
 users can grant all rights, except Supervisor, to other users, including
 rights  that they themselves have not been granted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 480. Glossary-Access RIghts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

access rights


 RIghts or privileges that control access to objects, files, or directories.
 Access rights are granted with trustee assignments. An object with access
 rights to another object is a trustee of that object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 481. Glossary-ACL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(Access Control List) ACL


 A list that contains information about an object describing which other
 objects  can access it. It is a property of every object in Directory
 Services. Trustees  and the Inherited Rights Filter are contained in the ACL.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 482. Property rights-Add Self ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Add or Delete Self property right


 Allows an object to add or remove itself as a value of a property. It doesn't
 affect other values in the property.
 This right is used only for properties that contain object names as values,
 such as lists of group members or mailing lists. This allows users to add or
 remove themselves from lists stored in an object.
 If the Write right is given, Add or Delete Self is disabled because Write
 includes its functionality.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 483. Glossary-AFP Server object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AFP Server object


 An object that represents an AppleTalk Filing Protocol (AFP) server that
 allows  workstations to share files and programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 484. Glossary-Alias ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Alias object


 An object that points to another object at a different location in the
 Directory tree. Use it to see an object that you need to use regularly but
 that  is not located in the context that you normally work in.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 485. Glossary-All Property Rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

all property rights


 A set of property rights, which any trustee can be granted for an object, that
 control access to all properties of the object for that trustee. All property
 rights are the only property rights that can be inherited. Specific property
 rights will override all property rights for any property for which specific
 property rights are granted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 486. Glossary-Archive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

archive


 To back up data files using a separate application, such as SBACKUP. This
 application sets flags on the files and directories that have been backed up,
 indicating that they have been archived.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 487. File Attributes-Archive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Archive Needed file attribute


 NetWare sets this attribute when a file is modified. It is cleared when the
 file is backed up. A backup program can tell if the file needs to be archived
 by looking at this attribute.
 This attribute functions the same as the DOS Archive attribute.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 488. Glossary-Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

attributes (file and directory)


 Attibutes (also called flags) describe the characteristics of a directory or
 file. They specify what actions are allowed, and in a few cases, what actions
 have been performed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 489. Glossary-Auditing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

auditing


 The process of examining network transactions to ensure that network records
 are accurate and secure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 490. Glossary-Bindery Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

bindery object


 An object that was upgraded from a bindery-based server, but that cannot be
 identified. Bindery-based clients must use older NetWare utilities to access
 these objects through bindery emulation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 491. Glossary-block ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

block


 Sections of information stored on the hard disk. The block size for a volume
 is  defined at installation. A block is usually between 4,000 and 64,000 bytes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 492. Glossary-block suballocation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

block suballocation


 A feature that allows several files to share one disk allocation block. This
 uses some server memory, but greatly reduces wasted disk space, especially
 when  you have many small files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 493. Glossary-Branch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

branch


 A container object and all the objects it contains (including other container
 objects).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 494. Glossary-Browse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

browse


 To find objects by moving up and down the directory structure and viewing
 different containers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 495. Object rights-Browse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Browse object right


 Allows a trustee to see the object in the Directory tree and find subordinates
 for which the Browse right is also given.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 496. Glossary-Browse SMS Right ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Browse SMS right


 Grants the right to see directories and files on the volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 497. Glossary-Browser ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Browser


 The window in the NetWare Administrator that displays objects in the Directory
 tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 498. File Attributes-Can't Compress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Can't Compress file attribute


 A status flag that indicates that the file can't be compressed because of
 limited space savings. This attribute is shown on attribute lists, but can't
 be  set by the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 499. Glossary-Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

class


 A type of object. Every object has a class. Object classes are: AFP Server,
 Alias, Bindery object, Computer, Country, Directory Map, Group, NetWare
 Server,  Organization, Organizational Role, Organizational Unit, Print Queue,
 Print  Server, Printer, Profile, User, and Volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 500. Property rights-Compare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Compare property right


 Allows a trustee to compare the value of a property with another value to see
 if they are equal, but not to see the value.
 If the Read right is given, Compare is disabled because Read includes Compare
 functionality.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 501. Glossary-Complete Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

complete name


 The object's path.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 502. File Attributes-Compressed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Compressed file attribute


 A status flag that Indicates that the file is compressed. This attribute is
 shown on attribute lists, but cannot be set by a user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 503. Glossary-Computer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Computer object


 An object that tracks network hardware. You can record information such as
 description, serial number, and person the computer is assigned to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 504. Glossary-Container ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

container object


 An object that can contain other objects. All objects are created in one of
 three containers: Country, Organization, and Organizational Unit.
 Objects you create in a container inherit the same rights granted to the
 container.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 505. Glossary-Context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

context


 The location of an object in the Directory tree. Your current context is your
 current point in the Directory tree.
 The context starts with the selected object in the Directory tree and goes
 back  to the root of the tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 506. File Attributes-Copy Inhibit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copy Inhibit file attribute


 Prevents Macintosh users from copying a file, even if they have Read and File
 Scan rights to the file. A user with the Modify right can change this
 attribute  and then copy the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 507. Glossary-Country ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Country object


 An object that represents where your network resides. You can organize other
 objects within the Country object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 508. Directory rights-Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create File and Directory right


 For a file

 Grants the right to salvage the file after it has been deleted.
 For a directory

 Grants the right to create files and subdirectories in the directory. If
 Create  is the only right granted at the directory level and no other rights
 are  granted below it, this right creates a Drop Box directory.
 A Drop Box directory allows users to open and write to a new file in the
 directory, but after the file has been closed, the user can't see or read from
 it. A user can copy files into the directory and retain ownership, but all
 trustee assignments are revoked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 509. Object rights-Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create object right


 Allows a trustee to create a new object below the current object in the
 directory tree. This right is only available on container objects and volumes;
 other objects cannot have subordinates.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 510. Glossary-Current context ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

current context


 Your current location in the Directory tree. Your current context is your
 starting point when you browse through the Directory tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 511. Directory Attributes-Delete Inhibit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete Inhibit directory attribute


 Prevents a trustee from deleting the directory, even if the Delete right is
 given.
 To delete a directory with this attribute set, a trustee must have both the
 Modify and Delete rights for this directory.
 This attribute is automatically set and removed when the Read Only attribute
 is  set or removed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 512. File Attributes-Delete Inhibit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete Inhibit file attribute


 Prevents a trustee from deleting the file, even if the Delete right is given.
 To delete a file with this attribute set, a trustee must have both the Modify
 and Delete rights for this file.
 This attribute is automatically set and removed when the Read Only attribute
 is  set or removed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 513. Object rights-Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete object right


 Allows a trustee to delete the object. Property-level rights do not apply (if
 you have no property rights but have the Delete object right, you can still
 delete the object).
 Objects that have subordinates cannot be deleted until the subordinates are
 deleted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 514. Glossary-Directory database ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory database


 A database containing all objects and their properties. This database can be
 distributed over many servers as partitions, and accessed using many
 utilities.
 When you view the Directory tree, you are actually viewing the hierarchical
 structure of names of objects in the Directory database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 515. Glossary-Directory entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

directory entry


 Basic information for network server directories and files. This includes
 name,  owner, date and time of last update, the first six trustee assignments,
 and  location of the first block of data on the network hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 516. Glossary-Directory map ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory Map object


 An object that specifies a path on a volume. It allows you to map a drive to
 an  application without knowing the actual volume and path on which the
 application  is found.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 517. Glossary-Directory tree ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory tree


 A hierarchical structure that represents how objects are related to each other
 in the Directory database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 518. Directory Attributes-Don't Compress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Don't Compress directory attribute


 Indicates that unless individual files are marked with the Immediate Compress
 attribute, files in this directory and its subdirectories will not be
 compressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 519. File Attributes-DCompress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Don't Compress file attribute


 Inidicates that this file will not be compressed, even when server-defined
 thresholds are reached.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 520. Directory Attributes-Don't Migrate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Don't Migrate directory attribute


 Indicates that files in this directory and its subdirectories won't be
 migrated  to a secondary storage device (such as a tape drive or optical
 disk).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 521. File Attributes-DMigrate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Don't Migrate file attribute


 Indicates that this file won't be migrated to a secondary storage device (such
 as a tape drive or optical disk), even if a server-defined threshold is
 reached.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 522. Drag and drop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

drag and drop


 An operation performed with the mouse by clicking and holding down the mouse
 button, then moving the mouse to another object and releasing the mouse
 button.  This can be done in the Browser to quickly make an object a trustee
 of another  object or move a file or directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 523. Glossary-Effective rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

effective rights


 The rights a user has in a directory or file. Effective rights are composed of
 inherited rights, trustee assignments, and security equivalences.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 524. Directory rights-Erase ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Erase File and Directory Right


 For a File

 Grants the right to erase (delete) the file.
 For a Directory

 Grants the right to erase (delete) the directory and everything in it,
 including subdirectories and their files, unless other rights are assigned
 below it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 525. File Attributes-Execute Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Execute Only File Attribute


 Prevents files from being copied. Only the Supervisor can set this attribute.
 Once set, this attribute can't be removed, so you should have a backup copy of
 the file.
 Some programs will not execute properly with this attribute set.
 Backup programs will not back up Execute Only files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 526. Glossary-File compression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file compression


 A method of allowing more data to be stored on server hard disks by
 compressing  (or packing) files that aren't being used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 527. Directory rights-File Scan ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Scan file and directory right


 For a file

 Grants the right to see the file when viewing the directory, including the
 directory structure back to the root of the volume.
 For a directory

 Grants the right to see files in the directory, unless other rights are in
 effect below the directory level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 528. Glossary-File specifications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

file specification


 A description of a set of filenames. A file specification can include a
 wildcard character, such as * (asterisk), indicating all files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 529. Glossary-Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group object


 An object used to assign rights to a group as a whole; the rights transfer to
 individual users in the group.
 Group is not a container object but a list of users.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 530. Directory Attributes-Hidden ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Hidden directory attribute


 Hides the directory from the DOS DIR command. However, the NetWare NDIR
 command  will list the directory if the trustee has the File Scan right.
 The directory cannot be deleted or copied.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 531. File Attributes-Hidden ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Hidden file attribute


 Hides the file from the DOS DIR command. However, the NetWare NDIR command
 will  list the file if the trustee has the File Scan right.
 The file cannot be deleted or copied.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 532. Glossary-host server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host server


 The server to which a device is physically connected or to which it is
 logically associated.
 For example, a volume is physically connected to a certain NetWare server.
 That  NetWare server is the "host server" of the volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 533. Directory Attributes-Immediate Compress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Immediate Compress directory attribute


 Indicates that unless individual files are marked with the Don't Compress
 attribute, files in this directory and its subdirectories will be compressed
 as  soon as possible, without waiting for the threshold set by the server to
 be  reached.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 534. File Attributes-ICompress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Immediate Compress file Attribute


 Indicates that this file will be compressed as soon as possible, without
 waiting for the threshold set by the server to be reached.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 535. File Attributes-Indexed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Indexed file attribute


 Inidicates that a file is indexed for quick access. NetWare begins keeping an
 index to a file when it reaches a certain size (determined by the block size
 used on the volume).
 This attribute is shown on attribute lists, but it cannot be set by the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 536. Glossary-Inheritance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

inheritance


 By inheritance, a trustee assignment applies to everything below the point
 where it is made, unless another trustee assignment is made further down the
 tree, or the rights are blocked by an Inherited Rights Filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 537. Glossary-Inherited Rights Filter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Inherited Rights Filter (IRF)


 Controls which rights a user can inherit for a file or directory. A
 directory's  IRF controls which parent directory rights the user can exercise
 in the current  directory. A file's IRF controls which of the current
 directory's rights can be  exercised in the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 538. Glossary-Leaf objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

leaf object


 The objects located at the end of a branch in the Directory tree. They can't
 contain other objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 539. Glossary-login script ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

login script


 A list of commands that are executed when a user logs in to the network. These
 commands organize the network environment. Three different login scripts can
 be  executed when a user logs in: One from its immediate container object, one
 from  a profile object (if specified in for user), and one from the user
 itself.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 540. Glossary-Managers, group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

manager

 A user object who has rights to manage several other user objects. A user
 manages any other object to which it has the Write property right to its
 Object  Trustees (ACL) property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 541. Glossary-Mandatory properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

mandatory properties


 Property values, other than the name, for which a value is required when an
 object is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 542. File Attributes-Migrated ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Migrated File attribute


 A status flag set by NetWare. Indicates that the file is migrated. This
 attribute is shown on attribute lists, but cannot be set by the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 543. Glossary-Migration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

migration


 The moving of data from a NetWare volume to an online media such as disk or
 tape, to let you optimize disk space
 When data is migrated, the NetWare file system continues to perceive it as
 residing on a NetWare volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 544. Directory rights-Modify ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Modify file and directory right


 For a file

 Grants the right to rename the file or change its attributes, but not to see
 or  modify the file's contents.
 For a directory

 Grants the right to rename or change the attributes of the directory and all
 subdirectories and files below it. It does not give the right to see or modify
 any directory or file's contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 545. Glossary-Name space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

name space


 A loadable module that allows you to store non-DOS files on a NetWare server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 546. Glossary-NetWare Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetWare Server object


 An object that represents a NetWare server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 547. Glossary-network address ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

network address


 The internal network number that specifies where a device (such as a server or
 workstation) can be located on the network cabling system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 548. Glossary-Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object


 An entity defined on the network and given access to the NetWare server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 549. Glossary-Object rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object rights


 Rights, granted to one object, to access another object. The object that is
 granted rights is called a trustee. Object rights don't affect properties or
 property rights, with the exception of the Supervisor object right, which
 grants access to all property values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 550. Glossary-Object name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object name


 A property of every object that provides a name for that object. Different
 objects use different properties as their name. Most leaf objects use the
 Common Name property (CN). Container objects use Organizational Units (OU),
 Organizations (O), or Country (C).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 551. Glossary-Organization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Organization object


 An object that helps organize other objects in Directory Services. It
 represents large network entities such as a corporation, university, or
 operating division.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 552. Glossary-Organizational role ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Organizational Role object


 An object that specifies a position that can be filled by a succession of
 people, such as Team Leader or Vice President.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 553. Glossary-Organizational unit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Organizational Unit object


 An object that helps organize other objects in Directory Services. It
 represents smaller entities within an organization, such as a department or
 business unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 554. Glossary-Owner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

owner


 The user that first created a file or directory. This information is listed in
 the dialog for that file or directory, but can be changed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 555. Glossary-Page of details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

page


 A group of information in an object dialog, accessed by choosing a page button
 (found on the far right side of an object dialog). The several pages of
 information are all part of the same dialog box. Th "OK" and "Cancel" buttons
 affect all pages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 556. Glossary-Parent container ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parent container


 The container in which an object is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 557. Glossary-Parent directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parent directory


 The directory in which a subdirectory is located.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 558. Glossary-Parent object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parent object


 Another term for container object (an object that can contain other objects).
 All objects are created within one of three containers: Country, Organization,
 and Organizational Unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 559. Glossary-Partition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

partition


 NetWare partition
 A logical division of the Directory database. Each partition consists of a
 container object, its subordinate objects, and data about those objects.
 Partitions do not contain information about files and directories.
 Disk partition
 A logical unit on a NetWare server hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 560. Glossary-Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

path


 A specific location in the Directory tree. The path can include the NetWare
 server, volume, directory, subdirectory, and file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 561. Glossary-Physical volume name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

physical volume name


 The name given to a volume when it is installed. The first volume on every new
 server is SYS:. A volume's physical name is followed by a colon (:).
 A Volume object refers to a physical volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 562. Glossary-Print Queue object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Queue object


 An object that represents a print queue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 563. Glossary-Print server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Server object


 An object that represents a network print server. A print server takes print
 jobs out of a print queue and sends them to the appropriate network printer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 564. Glossary-Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer object


 An object that represents a physical print device on the network. This can be
 a  printer, a plotter, etc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 565. Glossary-Profile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Profile object


 An object that contains a login script that is shared by users that are not
 under the same container object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 566. Glossary-Property ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

property


 A characteristic of an object. Each object class has certain properties that
 hold information about the object. Properties hold data (values) about
 objects.
 A descriptive feature of a bindery object such as a password, account
 restriction, account balance, internetwork address, or list of authorized
 clients.
 Some object properties can contain multiple values. For example, the Telephone
 Number property, found in many objects, can contain several telephone numbers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 567. Glossary-Property rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

property rights


 Property rights control access to information stored within the object (the
 information stored in the object's properties).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 568. Glossary-Protocols ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protocols


 Procedures that a NetWare server's operating system follows to accept and
 respond to workstation requests.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 569. Glossary-Purge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

purge


 To delete files permanently from a NetWare server. Files that have been purged
 cannot be retrieved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 570. Directory Attributes-Purge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purge directory attribute


 Indicates that all files in a directory with this attribute will be purged
 when  deleted, even if a file does not have the Purge attribute set. A purged
 file  can't be recovered with the Salvage option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 571. File Attributes-Purge ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Purge file attribute


 Indicates that a file with this attribute will be purged when deleted. A
 purged  file can't be recovered with the Salvage option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 572. Glossary-Queue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Queue object


 An object that represents a print queue (a place to hold print jobs). A print
 server looks in a queue to see what print jobs are waiting and then sends the
 next print job to a printer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 573. Directory Attributes-Read Audit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Read Audit directory attribute


 This attribute is not used in NetWare v4.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 574. File Attributes-Read Audit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Read Audit file attribute


 This attribute is not used in NetWare v4.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 575. Directory rights-Read ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Read file and directory right


 For a file

 Grants the right to open and read the file.
 For a directory

 Grants the right to open, read, and execute programs in the directory, unless
 other rights are set at the file level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 576. File Attributes-Read Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Read Only/Read Write file attribute


 Indicates that a file with the Read Only attribute can't be erased, renamed,
 or  written to.
 When the Read Only attribute is not set, the file is Read Write.
 When the Read Only attribute is set, the Rename Inhibit and Delete Inhibit
 attributes are automatically set. If a trustee with the Modify right removes
 the Rename Inhibit and Delete Inhibit attributes after the Read Only attribute
 has been set, the file can be renamed or deleted, but not written to or
 updated.
 When the Read Write attribute is set, the Rename Inhibit and Delete Inhibit
 attributes are not set.
 Ro is used to show this attribute. When this attribute is not turned on, it is
 represented with Rw.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 577. Property rights-Read ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Read property right


 Allows a trustee to read and compare the values of a property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 578. Glossary-Remote console ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Remote Console


 A product that allows network supervisors to execute console commands from a
 workstation over either SPX or asynchronous connections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 579. Directory Attributes-Rename Inhibit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rename Inhibit directory attribute


 Prevents a trustee from renaming the directory, even if the Modify right is
 given. This attribute is automatically set and removed when the Read Only
 attribute is set or removed.
 To rename a directory with this attribute set, a trustee must have the Modify
 right and turn off the Rename Inhibit attribute, then rename the directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 580. File Attributes-Rename Inhibit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rename Inhibit file attribute


 Prevents a trustee from renaming the file, even if the Modify right is given.
 This attribute is automatically set and removed when the Read Only attribute
 is  set or removed.
 To rename a file with this attribute set, a trustee must have the modify right
 and turn off the Rename Inhibit attribute, then rename the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 581. Object rights-Rename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rename object right


 Allows you to change the name of the object. This changes the value of the
 naming property.
 Only the last part of the complete name can be changed with this right.
 Changing other parts of the name implies a move operation.
 For example, if you have the Rename object right on a Printer object, you can
 rename that printer object so that its complete name changes from
 CN=HR_Printer.OU=Personnel.O=Novell.C=US  to
 CN=Personnel_Printer.OU=Personnel.O=Novell.C=US
 But you cannot change other parts of the complete name. If you did change
 other  parts of the complete name, such as the OU in the example above, you
 would  actually be moving the printer object to a different container. And
 that is not  allowed by the Rename object right.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 582. Glossary-Replica ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

replica


 A copy of a NetWare partition. A replica can be the Master copy, a Read/Write
 copy, or a Read Only copy. Replicas are managed with the Partition Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 583. Glossary-Restore SMS right ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restore SMS right


 Grants the right to perform restore operations to the volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 584. Glossary-Rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rights


 Determine the type of access that a trustee has to a directory, file, or
 object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 585. Glossary-Salvage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

salvage


 To retrieve files that were deleted, but have not yet been purged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 586. Glossary-Security equivalence ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

security equivalence


 Having all access rights that are assigned to another object. Only a user can
 be security equivalent to another object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 587. File Attributes-Shareable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Shareable file attribute


 Allows a file to be used by more than one user at a time. It is usually used
 only on files with the Read Only attribute.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 588. Glossary-Specific property rights ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

specific property rights


 Rights granted to a trustee for a single property of an object. Specific
 property rights do not affect the trustee's rights to any other property of
 the  object. Specific properties can also have an Inherited Rights Filter on
 any  object. A trustee cannot inherit specific property rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 589. Glossary-Storage management ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

storage management


 The process of archiving and restoring data with backup applications to
 provide  data redundancy and security in the event of problems with online
 information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 590. Glossary-Subordinate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

subordinate


 An object that is below another object hierarchically in the Directory tree. A
 container can be subordinate to a higher container. A leaf object is
 subordinate to its container object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 591. Glossary-Supervisor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor right


 Grants all rights to a file, directory, object, or property. You cannot block
 the Supervisor right for files or directories with an Inherited Rights Filter.
 You can block the Supervisor right for objects and properties. There is no
 automatic Supervisor user in NetWare v4.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 592. Directory rights-Supervisor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor file and directory right


 For a file

 Grants all rights to the file. The trustee can grant any right to another user
 and modify all rights in the file's Inherited Rights Filter. The Supervisor
 right cannot be blocked by an Inherited Rights Filter.
 For a directory

 Grants all rights to the directory, all subdirectories, and their files.
 Overrides any Inherited Rights Filter restrictions in subdirectories or files.
 Trustees can grant others any rights in this directory or its subdirectories,
 or in their files. The Supervisor right can only be revoked from the directory
 in which it was originally granted, because filters below that point are
 ignored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 593. Object rights-Supervisor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor object right


 Grants all access privileges. A trustee who has the Supervisor right
 automatically has access to all properties.
 The Supervisor right can be blocked by the Inherited Rights Filter, both for
 objects below the object where Supervisor is assigned, and for individual
 properties of an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 594. Property rights-Supervisor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor property right


 Grants all access privileges. A trustee who has the Supervisor right
 automatically has all other rights to the property.
 The Supervisor right can be blocked by the Inherited Rights Filter, both for
 objects below the object where Supervisor is assigned, and for individual
 properties of an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 595. Glossary-Synchronize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

synchronize


 To ensure that copies of an NetWare partition contain the same information as
 other replicas of that partition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 596. Directory Attributes-System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

System directory attribute


 Marks directories that are only used by the operating system. Hides the
 directory from the DOS DIR command. However, the NetWare NDIR command will
 list  the directory if the trustee has the File Scan access right.
 The directory cannot be deleted or copied.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 597. File Attributes-System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

System file attribute


 Marks files that are used only by the operating system. Hides the file from
 the  DOS DIR command. However, the NetWare NDIR command will list the file if
 the  trustee has File Scan rights.
 The file cannot be deleted or copied.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 598. File Attributes-Transactional ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Transactional file attribute


 Shows that the file is protected with the Transactional Tracking System, which
 allows interrupted operations to be backed out of the file, restoring it to an
 uncorrupted state. All database files that need TTS protection should be
 marked  with this attribute.
 A file that is flagged Transactional cannot be deleted or renamed. A file
 cannot be flagged Transactional while it is open. A user must have the Modify
 right to a file to flag it as Transactional.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 599. Glossary-Trustee ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

trustee


 A user or group that has access to a directory, file, or object is a trustee
 of  that directory, file, or object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 600. Glossary-trustee assignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

trustee assignment


 Grants rights to an object to perform actions on anther object or its
 properties, a file, or a directory. Trustee assignments granting rights to an
 object can be viewed by selecting the object and choosing "Trustees" from the
 "Object menu. Trustee assignments are stored in the Access Control List (ACL)
 property of every object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 601. Glossary-User ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

User object


 An object that represents a person who works on the network. Each person must
 be assigned a user identity, or username.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 602. Glossary-Values ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

value


 The contents of a property of an object. Many properties can have multiple
 values, such as a telephone number property containing three different
 telephone numbers. Each telephone number is a value of the property. Access
 rights control access to a property, but not to individual values of a
 property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 603. Glossary-Volume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Volume object


 An object that represents a physical volume within a NetWare server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 604. Directory Attributes-Write Audit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Write Audit directory attribute


 This attribute is not used in NetWare v4.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 605. FIle Attributes-Write Audit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Write Audit file attribute


 This attribute is not used in NetWare v4.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 606. Directory rights-Write ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Write file and directory right


 For a file

 Grants the right to open and write to the file.
 For a directory

 Grants the right to open and modify files in the directory, unless other
 rights  are given at the file level.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 607. Property rights-Write ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Write property right


 Allows a trustee to add, change, or remove any value of a property .
 If the Write right is given, Add Self is disabled because Write includes its
 functionality.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 608. Error Message Explanations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Error Message Explanations


 This lists all error messages originating in the OS/2 NetWare Administrator
 that are prefixed by NWDxxx.
 Many of these errors are caused by insufficient workstation memory.
 Select the error number below to see an explanation of the error and action
 you  can take to correct the error.
 If you know the error number, you can also choose the "Search" button in the
 Help window to search for that error.
    3
    92
    97
    98
    100
    101
    102
    105
    106
    107
    108
    109
    110
    111
    112
    113
    119
    120
    122
    124
    511
    512
    513
    514
    515
    516
    517
    518
    519
    520
    521
    522
    523
    524
    525
    526
    527
    528
    539
    540
    541
    551
    552
    553
    554
    555
    556
    560
    561
    772
    773
    778
    789
    783
    784
    785
    786
    787
    788
    1006
    1007
    1008
    1009
    1010
    1011
    1012
    1013
    1014
    1015
    1018
    1019
    1021
    1022
    1023
    1024
    1049
    1050
    1051
    1052
    1053
    1054
    1055
    1056
    1057
    1058
    1059
    1060
    1061
    1062
    1063
    1064
    1065
    1066
    1067
    1068
    1069
    1070
    1071
    1072
    1073
    1074
    1075
    1076
    1077
    1078
    1079
    1080
    1081
    1082
    1083
    1084
    1085
    1086
    1087
    1088
    1089
    1090
    1091
    1092
    1093
    1094
    1095
    1096
    1097
    1098
    1099
    1150
    1151
    1152
    1153
    1154
    1155
    1156
    1157
    1158
    1159
    1160
    1161
    1162
    1163
    1164
    1165
    1166
    1167
    1168
    1169
    1170
    1171
    1172
    1173
    1174
    1175
    1176
    1177
    1178
    1250
    1251
    1320
    1321
    1322
    1323
    1324
    1325
    1326
    1327
    1328
    1329
    1350
    1351
    1352
    1353
    1354
    1355
    1356
    1357
    1358
    1359
    1360
    1361
    1362
    1363
    1429
    1430
    1431
    1432
    1433
    1434
    1435
    1436
    1437
    1438
    1439
    1440
    1441
    1442
    1443
    1444
    1445
    1446
    1447
    1448
    1449
    1450
    1451
    1452
    1458
    1459
    1460
    1461
    1463
    1464
    1469
    1470
    1471
    1472
    1473
    1479
    1480
    1481
    1482
    1483
    1484
    1485
    1489
    1490
    1491
    1492
    1493
    1494
    1495
    1496
    1499
    1500
    1501
    1675
    1676
    1677
    1678
    1679
    1685
    1686
    1687
    1688
    1689
    1690
    1691
    1692
    1694
    1695
    1696
    1697
    1705
    1706
    1707
    1708
    1710
    1711
    1712
    1713
    1714
    1715
    1716
    1720
    1721
    1732
    1733
    1734
    1735
    1736
    1737
    1741
    1742
    1743
    1752
    1850
    1851
    1852
    1853
    1854
    1855
    1856
    1857
    1858
    1859
    1860
    1963
    1965
    1967
    1968
    1970
    1980
    1981
    1982
    1983
    1984
    1985
    1986
    1987
    1988
    1989
    1990
    1991
    1992
    1993
    1994
    1995


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 609. Error Messages for No Memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Insufficient Workstation Memory


 To resolve an insufficient workstation memory error, you should add more
 memory  by installing a larger memory board. To temporarily free memory, do
 one or more  of the following:
 -  Close some Browser windows and other open OS/2 applications.
 -  Unload any unneeded TSR (terminate-and-stay-resident) programs.
 -  Modify CONFIG.SYS to reduce the number of files that can be open at the
    same  time, the number of buffers allocated for disk drives, and the memory
    size  allocated by the shell for your DOS environment (the /E option). The
    following  settings are sufficient for normal workstation operation, but
    the values can be  reduced further until problems occur:
    FILES=20
    BUFFERS=20
    SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /E:640 /P
    You must reboot your machine after modifying the CONFIG.SYS file.
 You may need to close the NetWare Administrator and reopen it to continue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 610. Error Message 3 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

3: The base resource file could not be initialized.


 Explanation

 Part of the NetWare Administrator is not available.
 Action

 Make sure all necessary files are in directories that you have search drives
 mapped to. Then reopen the NetWare Administrator.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 611. Error Message 92 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

92: The Bitmap menu style requested for <string> is not supported by the
NetWare Administrator menuing system.


 Explanation

 One of the menus for this utility cannot be prepared because the utility does
 not support it.
 Action

 Make sure you are not using a third party add-on to this utility that is not
 compatible. Contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 612. Error Message 97 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

97: The menu being duplicated has become corrupt. Exit this application and
start over.


 Explanation

 While preparing menus for display, part of the screen data was corrupted. Your
 data is probably intact, but you may not be able to see it.
 Action

 Exit the utility as soon as possible and restart it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 613. Error Message 98 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

98: The system does not have enough memory to duplicate a menu.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory while preparing menus for display. Although
 data may display improperly, it is not corrupted.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 614. Error Message 100 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

100: A fatal error # <number> occurred at <location> in <string>.


 Explanation

 An error occurred which made the current operation impossible to complete.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact your Novell
 Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 615. Error Message 101 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

101: An error occurred during an attempt to lock memory for handle <handle>.


 Explanation

 A conflict occurred while requesting memory or an identification code to
 complete the current operation.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If the problem persists, contact your Novell
 Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 616. Error Message 102 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

102: The NetWare Administrator and its views are out of memory.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory and may not be able to continue.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem. You may need to close the utility and reopen it to
 continue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 617. Error Message 105 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

105: The procedure name <name> for a Class Add Procedure is invalid. The DLL
<filename> may be invalid or corrupted.


 Explanation

 A procedure that is needed to complete a requested action is not available to
 the utility. The utility attempted to load the procedure from another file,
 and  that file is not available. Some of the NetWare Administrator's files are
 missing or corrupted.
 Action

 Check your search drives to see if all utility files are available. Recopy the
 NetWare Administrator and its associated files to your work area (usually the
 \PUBLIC directory) from the NetWare program diskettes or CD-ROM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 618. Error Message 106 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

106: The new procedure <name> cannot be located in the <filename> file. Your
Path variable is invalid or your DLLs are corrupted.


 Explanation

 A procedure that is needed to complete a requested action is not available to
 the utility. The utility attempted to load the procedure from another file,
 and  that file is not available. Some of the NetWare Administrator's files are
 missing or corrupted.
 Action

 Check your search drives to see if all utility files are available. Recopy the
 NetWare Administrator and its associated files to your work area (usually the
 PUBLIC directory) from the NetWare program diskettes or CD-ROM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 619. Error Message 107 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

107: The initialization file is invalid. Load the initialization file from a
backup or reinstall the NetWare Administrator.


 Explanation

 A file that is needed to complete a requested action is not available. One of
 the NetWare Administrator's files is missing or corrupted.
 Action

 Check your search drives to see if all utility files are available. Recopy the
 NetWare Administrator and its associated files to your work area (usually the
 PUBLIC directory) from the NetWare program diskettes or CD-ROM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 620. Error Message 108 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

108: An invalid library handle was detected (<handle>).


 Explanation

 A code identifying a section of the program was invalid.
 Action

 Try the action again. If necessary, close the NetWare Administrator and then
 reopen it before trying the action again. If the problem persists, contact
 your  Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 621. Error Message 109 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

109: The menu handle <handle> is invalid.


 Explanation

 A code identifying a section of the program is invalid.
 Action

 Try the action again. If necessary, close the NetWare Administrator and then
 reopen it before trying the action again. If the problem persists, contact
 your  Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 622. Error Message 110 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

110: An invalid object handle was detected (<handle>).


 Explanation

 A code identifying a section of the program is not acceptable.
 Action

 Try the action again. If necessary, close the NetWare Administrator and then
 reopen it before trying the action again. If the problem persists, contact
 your  Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 623. Error Message 111 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

111: The contents of popup menu <name> are invalid.


 Explanation

 A code identifying a section of the program was invalid.
 Action

 Try the action again. If necessary, close the NetWare Administrator and then
 reopen it before trying the action again. If the problem persists, contact
 your  Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 624. Error Message 112 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

112: The dynamic link library <filename> cannot be located. Your Path variable
is invalid or your DLLs were not installed correctly.


 Explanation

 A file that is needed to complete a requested action is not available to the
 utility. One of the NetWare Administrator's files is missing or corrupted.
 Action

 Check your search drives to see if all utility files are available. Recopy the
 NetWare Administrator and its associated files to your work area (usually the
 PUBLIC directory) from the NetWare program diskettes or CD-ROM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 625. Error Message 113 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

113: A message could not be found, or a bad resource DLL was detected.


 Explanation

 A message that the utility needs to display is not available. One of the
 NetWare Administrator's files may be missing or corrupted.
 Action

 Check your search drives to see if all utility files are available. Try the
 action again. If the error recurs, recopy the NetWare Administrator and its
 associated files to your work area (usually the PUBLIC directory) from the
 NetWare program diskettes or CD-ROM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 626. Error Message 119 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

119: The NetWare Administrator has run out of memory. Terminate some
applications, free some space on your swap disk, or run NetWare Administrator
on a computer with more memory.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory and may not be able to continue.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem.You may need to close the utility and reopen it to
 continue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 627. Error Message 120 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

120: The Ownerdraw menu style requested for <string> is not supported by the
NetWare Administrator menuing system.


 Explanation

 A section of the utility (perhaps a third-party product) has requested a menu
 style that the NetWare Administrator cannot display properly.
 Action

 Remove the third-party product, then try again. If the error persists, contact
 your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 628. Error Message 122 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

122: The command <string> was unclaimed by an object. Either the object is in
the wrong list, or the command is unknown to the object.


 Explanation

 An instruction that was directed to a section of the utility did not execute
 as  expected. The utility may have sent the wrong message, or the object
 receiving  the message was unexpectedly removed by another process.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current set of dialogs in the NetWare Administrator and
 try repeating the operation. If that does not succeed, restart OS/2, reload
 the utility, and try again. If the problem persists, contact  your Novell
 Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 629. Error Message 124 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

124: A class is loaded into the NetWare Administrator that does not handle the
Update message.


 Explanation

 An instruction that was directed to a section of the utility did not execute
 as  expected. The object receiving the message may have been unexpectedly
 removed  by another process.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current set of dialogs in the NetWare Administrator and
 try repeating the operation. If that does not succeed, restart OS/2, reload
 the utility and try again. If the problem persists, contact  your Novell
 Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 630. Error Message 511 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

511: An error occurred during an attempt to initialize the Trustees dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Trustee List" dialog cannot be opened. There may not be enough memory.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the current dialog. You may need to free memory.. If
 the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 631. Error Message 512 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

512: An error occurred during an attempt to write changes to the trustee list.


 Explanation

 Changes to the trustee list or to trustee's rights could not be saved to the
 Directory Database. Directory Services may not allow access at the moment, or
 the new data may be corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the dialog before reentering the information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 632. Error Message 513 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

513: An error occurred during an attempt to delete the trustees.


 Explanation

 The selected trustee cannot be deleted. One of the following may have
 occurred:
 -  Directory Services received a command it did not understand.
 -  The object has subordinates.
 -  The name of the object is invalid for Directory Services.
 -  The request was corrupted.
 Action

 Check each of the above possible problems; then try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 633. Error Message 514 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

514: An error occurred during an attempt to delete a trustee's rights.


 Explanation

 The rights granted to the selected trustee cannot be deleted. Either Directory
 Services did not understand the request because it was corrupted, or the
 trustee information is stored incorrectly.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the dialog. Try the operation from another
 workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 634. Error Message 515 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

515: An error occurred during an attempt to add trustees.


 Explanation

 New trustee or trustees cannot be added to the trustees list. One of the
 following may have occurred:
 -  The trustees list may be corrupted.
 -  You may not have enough available memory to add to the list.
 -  The names of the new trustees returned by Directory Services may not be
    accurate.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem. Try the operation again. If the problem persists,
 notify your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 635. Error Message 516 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

516: An error occurred during an attempt to get trustee rights data.


 Explanation

 The rights granted to the selected trustee cannot be found. Directory Services
 may have returned incorrect information, or the name of the trustee may be
 corrupted in memory.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 636. Error Message 517 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

517: An error occurred during an attempt to set trustee rights data.


 Explanation

 New rights for the trustee cannot be set. OS/2 may be unable to allocate
 sufficient memory to save the information, or the trustee or request to change
 rights may be corrupted and unreadable.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem. Try the operation again. If the problem persists,
 notify your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 637. Error Message 518 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

518: An error occurred during an attempt to read the object's effective rights.


 Explanation

 The effective rights of the requested object cannot be found. Directory
 Services may not have responded to a request, or the name of the object may be
 corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 638. Error Message 519 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

519: You must be logged in to Directory Services to use the Trustees dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Trustees" dialog is only available to authenticated Directory Services
 users. You must have rights to read the trustees to open the dialog.
 Action

 Log in to Directory Services using a valid username and password (if
 required).  Then open the "Trustees" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 639. Error Message 520 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

520: An error occurred during an attempt to open the Effective Rights dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Effective Rights" dialog cannot be opened. There may not be enough
 memory.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog. Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 640. Error Message 521 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

521: An error occurred during an attempt to build the list of properties for an
object.


 Explanation

 The list of properties cannot be assembled. Either Directory Services did not
 respond to the request, or the object name or property data was corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 641. Error Message 522 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

522: An error occurred during an attempt to free the trustee rights data.


 Explanation

 The rights granted to the selected trustee cannot be freed.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 642. Error Message 523 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

523: An error occurred during an attempt to build the list of an object's
trustees.


 Explanation

 The list of trustees cannot be assembled. Either Directory Services did not
 respond to the request, or the object name or trustee data was corrupted.
 OS/2 may not have sufficient memory to build the list.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog. Correct the memory problem. If the
 problem  persists, notify your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 643. Error Message 524 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

524: A string resource (message) could not be read from OS/2.


 Explanation

 A message that should be displayed cannot be found in OS/2.
 Action

 Repeat this action. If this does not work, exit and reenter the current
 dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 644. Error Message 525 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

525: An error occurred during an attempt to get the Inherited Rights Filter
data.


 Explanation

 The rights that make up the Inherited Rights Filter for this object cannot be
 found. Directory Services may have returned incorrect information, or the
 request may be corrupted in memory.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 645. Error Message 526 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

526: An error occurred during an attempt to set the Inherited Rights Filter
data.


 Explanation

 New rights for the Inherited Rights Filter cannot be set. OS/2 may be unable
 to allocate sufficient resources to save the information, or the request to
 change rights may be corrupted and unreadable.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog. Correct the memory problem. If the
 problem  persists, notify your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 646. Error Message 527 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

527: An error occurred during an attempt to restore the original check box
value.


 Explanation

 When you tried to reset a gray check box to its original (gray) setting, the
 utility could not determine the original setting. A gray check box affects all
 selected objects or properties. The information from those objects or
 properties is not available or is corrupted.
 Action

 Close the dialog and reopen it. Check the information that was selected to be
 sure that it is not corrupted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 647. Error Message 528 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

528: An error occurred during an attempt to get the selected object's effective
rights.


 Explanation

 The effective rights of the requested object cannot be found. Directory
 Services may not have responded to a request, or the name of the object may be
 corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 648. Error Message 539 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

539: An error occurred during an attempt to build the list of this object's
trustee assignments.


 Explanation

 The list of trustees cannot be assembled. Either Directory Services did not
 respond to the request, or the object name or property data was corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 649. Error Message 540 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

540: An error occurred during an attempt to initialize the Rights to Other
Objects dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Rights to Other Objects" dialog cannot be opened. Directory Services may
 not have responded to the request for trustees, or there may not be enough
 memory.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog. This dialog may take a long time to open
 if you have a large tree and this object has many trustee assignments. Correct
 the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 650. Error Message 541 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

541: An error occurred during an attempt to write changes to the trustee list
of object <name>.


 Explanation

 Changes to the trustee list or to trustee's rights cannot be saved to the
 Directory database. Directory Services may not allow access at the moment, or
 the new data may be corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen the dialog; then reenter the information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 651. Error Message 551 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

551: An error has occurred in Directory Services.


 Explanation

 A problem has occurred which prevented Directory Services from responding to a
 request from the utility.
 Action

 Check your connection to the network and make sure a server containing a
 replica of the partition you are working in is available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 652. Error Message 552 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

552: Out of memory.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory and may not be able to continue.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem.You may need to close the utility and reopen it to
 continue.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 653. Error Message 553 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

553: An error occurred during an attempt to build the list of subordinate
objects.


 Explanation

 The subordinates of an object cannot be found for the object that you
 selected.  There may not be enough memory, or Directory Services may not have
 responded to  the request for information.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Check your network connection to a valid Directory
 Services server. Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 654. Error Message 554 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

554: An error occurred during an attempt to return the selected items.


 Explanation

 Information on the items that you selected cannot be received from Directory
 Services. Directory Services may not be available at the moment, or the object
 name or returned information have been corrupted on the network or in memory.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Exit the utility first and check your network
 connection if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 655. Error Message 555 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

555: No object could be found for the context entered.


 Explanation

 The context entered appears to contain no objects.
 Action

 Make sure you have entered the context that contains the object you want to
 refer to. Try the operation again. Directory Services may have received a
 corrupted request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 656. Error Message 556 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

556: An error occurred during an attempt to get a connection ID to <string>.


 Explanation

 In order to complete the current operation, a connection must be established,
 but this connection cannot be established. Directory Services may not be
 available, or the request may have been corrupted during transmission.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Make sure you have allowed sufficient connections to
 the network.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 657. Error Message 560 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

560: An error occurred during an attempt to move a Directory Services object.


 Explanation

 The request to move a Directory Services object cannot be completed. Another
 move or delete operation may be in progress and another is not allowed yet, or
 the name of the object that you want to move may have been corrupted when sent
 to Directory Services.
 Action

 Wait a moment for Directory Services to complete any operations in progress.
 Try the operation again, and close and reopen the current dialog if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 658. Error Message 561 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

561: An error occurred during an attempt to get the logged-in object's
effective rights to the selected object.


 Explanation

 The effective rights of the requested object cannot be found. Directory
 Services may not have responded to a request, or the name of the object may be
 corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 659. Error Message 772 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

772: Objects could not be created in this context.


 Explanation

 The utility cannot create the requested object in this context. You may not
 have rights, or the object may not be allowed within this container object.
 Directory Services may also be processing partition updates and is not
 allowing  updates to the Directory Database at the moment.
 Action

 Make sure your effective rights in the container include the Create object
 right. Check to see if the object you want to create can be created in this
 container. If these actions do not help, wait for Directory Services to
 resynchronize the database and attempt the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 660. Error Message 773 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

773: An internal error has occurred. Snapin Error: NModel in NBrowser::New/Add


 Explanation

 A part of the utility cannot be made functional. The rest of the utility may
 run properly.
 Action

 Exit OS/2 and try to run the utility again. Make sure all needed files are
 available. If parts of the utility are still not working, contact your Novell
 Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 661. Error Message 778 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

778: An unknown error has occurred. The selected object could not be deleted.


 Explanation

 For some unknown reason, the delete operation cannot be completed. Here are
 some possible explanations:
 -  A break in your connection with the Directory Services database may have
    occurred.
 -  You may not have sufficient rights to delete.
 -  You may be trying to delete a container that is not empty.
 -  You may be trying to delete the User Template object.
 -  If Directory Services has not completed the clean-up tasks from a previous
    delete or move operation, it may not allow another delete operation in the
    same  area until it has finished.
 Action

 Check each of the possible causes listed above. If you have rights and no
 other  problems are visible, wait for Directory Services to complete any
 operations  that may be in progress and try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 662. Error Message 789 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

789: Subordinate objects still exist. The selected object could not be deleted.


 Explanation

 You cannot delete containers that contain other objects. You tried to delete a
 container that contains other objects.
 Action

 Delete any objects that are in the container (except the User Template object)
 and try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 663. Error Message 783 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

783: You cannot open a new Browser window with only a leaf object.


 Explanation

 The top or root object of a new Browser window must be a container object or a
 Volume object.
 Action

 Select a Country, Organization, Organizational Unit, or Volume object and try
 the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 664. Error Message 784 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

784: The program was not able to obtain the vis object.


 Explanation

 A record for the display of an object in a Browser was not available when
 needed.
 Action

 Close the Browser windows and reopen them. If the problem persists, exit and
 restart the utility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 665. Error Message 785 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

785: The program was not able to obtain the model object.


 Explanation

 The record of the object cannot be found in order to display it. A problem may
 exist getting information from Directory Services.
 Action

 Close the Browser windows and reopen them. If the problem persists, exit and
 restart the utility. Also check your connection to Directory Services, and log
 in again if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 666. Error Message 786 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

786: The program was not able to obtain the list node.


 Explanation

 The position of an object within the current Browser is not available or is
 corrupted. The objects may not display correctly.
 Action

 Close the Browser windows and reopen them. If the problem persists, exit and
 restart the utility. Also check your connection to Directory Services, and log
 in again if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 667. Error Message 787 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

787: No object is selected, or too many objects are selected.


 Explanation

 The operation requested requires a certain number of selected objects in order
 to be completed. The number of objects selected was not within the acceptable
 range.
 Action

 Attempt the operation again, selecting the correct number of objects. Because
 the problem may be no objects selected or too many objects selected, start by
 selecting one object if you are unsure how many the operation requires.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 668. Error Message 788 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

788: The program was not able to obtain the list.


 Explanation

 The list of objects within the current Browser is not available or is
 corrupted. The objects may not display correctly.
 Action

 Close the Browser windows and reopen them. If the problem persists, exit and
 restart the utility. Also check your connection to Directory Services, and log
 in again if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 669. Error Message 1006 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1006: The NetWare Administrator is out of memory.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory and may not be able to continue.
 Action

 Close Browser windows or other applications to free memory. You may need to
 close the utility and reopen it to continue. Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 670. Error Message 1007 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1007: An error occurred during an attempt to save this object's rights to the
file system.


 Explanation

 A trustee assignment to a file or directory cannot be saved to the file or
 directory's trustee list. The object that you selected as a trustee may be
 invalid. The connection to the volume containing the file or directory may be
 unavailable now, even if it was available moments ago. This made it impossible
 to write the new trustee assignment to the file or directory.
 Action

 Wait a while, check your network connection, and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 671. Error Message 1008 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1008: An error occurred during an attempt to add a new file or directory to the
list of trustee assignments.


 Explanation

 A trustee assignment to a file or directory cannot be saved to the file or
 directory's trustee list. The object that you selected as a trustee may be
 invalid. The connection to the volume containing the file or directory may be
 unavailable now, even if it was available moments ago. This made it impossible
 to write the new trustee assignment to the file or directory.
 Action

 Wait a while, check your network connection, and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 672. Error Message 1009 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1009: An error occurred during an attempt to delete a file or directory from
the list of trustee assignments.


 Explanation

 A trustee assignment to a file or directory cannot be deleted from the file or
 directory's trustee list. The object that you selected as a trustee may be
 invalid. The connection to the volume containing the file or directory may be
 unavailable now, even if it was available moments ago. This made it impossible
 to write the new trustee assignment to the file or directory.
 Action

 Wait a while, check your network connection, and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 673. Error Message 1010 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1010: An error occurred during an attempt to get the Volumes list.


 Explanation

 The list of volumes associated with this dialog for listing trustee
 assignments  is not available because Directory Services cannot return it or
 it has become  corrupted.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again. If necessary, close OS/2 and
 check your network connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 674. Error Message 1011 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1011: An error occurred during an attempt to add an item to the list.


 Explanation

 The list of objects within the current dialog or Browser is not available or
 is  corrupted. Objects cannot be added to the list, and may not display
 correctly.
 Action

 Close the Browser windows and reopen them. If the problem persists, exit and
 restart the utility. Also check your connection to Directory Services, and log
 in again if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 675. Error Message 1012 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1012: An error occurred during an attempt to remove a volume from the Volumes
list.


 Explanation

 The list of volumes associated with this dialog for listing trustee
 assignments  is not available. The most likely explanation is that Directory
 Services cannot  return it or it has become corrupted. Because the list is not
 accessible, a  volume cannot be removed from it. Another possible explanation
 is that the  request to remove a volume from the list may be corrupted.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again. If necessary, close OS/2 and
 check your network connection first.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 676. Error Message 1013 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1013: An error occurred during an attempt to gray the dialog buttons.


 Explanation

 The utility needed to shade parts of this dialog because access is not allowed
 or is inappropriate, but the dialog cannot be changed.
 Action

 Close the dialog and reopen it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 677. Error Message 1014 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1014: An error occurred during an attempt to display this object's trustee
rights to a file or directory.


 Explanation

 A trustee assignment to a file or directory cannot be displayed because the
 file or directory is not accessible at the moment. The address of the volume
 may be unavailable, or Directory Services may not have found another piece of
 needed information. The object you selected as a trustee may be invalid.
 Action

 Wait a while, check your network connection, and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 678. Error Message 1015 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1015: An error occurred during an attempt to set this object's trustee rights
to a file or directory.


 Explanation

 A trustee assignment to a file or directory cannot be set because the file or
 directory is not accessible at the moment. The address of the volume may be
 unavailable, or Directory Services may not have found another piece of needed
 information. The object you selected as a trustee may be invalid.
 Action

 Wait a while, check your network connection, and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 679. Error Message 1018 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1018: An error occurred during an attempt to get this trustee's effective
rights.


 Explanation

 The effective rights of the requested object cannot be found. Directory
 Services may not have responded to a request, or the name of the object may be
 corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 680. Error Message 1019 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1019: An error occurred during an attempt to get a server connection ID.


 Explanation

 The utility needed to identify the server that it is receiving information
 from, but it was not able to identify the server's connection ID.
 Action

 Make sure that you are connected to the network and that the needed Directory
 Services server is functioning properly. Try the operation again; exit and
 restart the utility if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 681. Error Message 1021 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1021: An error occurred during an attempt to open the Effective Rights dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Effective Rights" dialog cannot be opened. OS/2 may have insufficient
 available memory.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog. Free system memory if possible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 682. Error Message 1022 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1022: An error occurred during an attempt to get the Directory Services
context.


 Explanation

 The context of an object is needed to complete an operation, but the context
 cannot be determined. An incorrect context may have been entered, or rights
 may  not be sufficient to work in the context that was entered.
 Action

 Try the operation again, and close and reopen the current dialog if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 683. Error Message 1023 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1023: An error occurred during an attempt to get the trustee list of the
selected object.


 Explanation

 The trustee list cannot be assembled. Either Directory Services did not
 respond  to the request, or the object name or trustee data was corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 684. Error Message 1024 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1024: An error occurred during an attempt to get the trustee's object ID.


 Explanation

 A code that identifies a trustee of this object is needed to complete this
 operation, but it cannot be determined. Either Directory Services did not
 respond to the request, or the object name or trustee data was corrupted.
 Action

 Close and reopen this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 685. Error Message 1049 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1049: An error occurred during an attempt to get a connection ID.


 Explanation

 A connection to the requested server cannot be established because a
 connection  ID number is not available for this user.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If the operation still fails, check your network
 connections and rights to the requested server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 686. Error Message 1050 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1050: An error occurred during an attempt to get a volume number.


 Explanation

 The request cannot get a volume number from the server.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If the operation still fails, check your network
 connections and rights to the requested server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 687. Error Message 1051 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1051: An error occurred during an attempt to retrieve entry information.


 Explanation

 The entry information was not returned as requested. You may not have
 sufficient rights to the server, or the server cannot be located on the
 network, either because the server object is in a different context, or the
 physical volume's host server address is not available or is invalid.
 Action

 Make sure that you have rights to the server and that the server is up and
 running on the network. Check the context of the server object and the
 volume's  host server network address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 688. Error Message 1052 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1052: An error occurred during an attempt to read name space information.


 Explanation

 The name space information about a volume was not returned as requested. Name
 space information cannot be shown. You may not have sufficient rights to the
 volume, or the volume cannot be located on the network, because
 -  The Volume object is in a different context, or
 -  The physical volume's host server address is not available or is invalid.
 Action

 Make sure that you have rights to the server and that the server is up and
 running on the network. Check the context of the server object and the
 volume's  host server network address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 689. Error Message 1053 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1053: An error occurred during an attempt to allocate a temporary directory
handle.


 Explanation

 This operation required a resource that is not available because of
 insufficient memory or an incorrect request.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If necessary, exit the utility or OS/2 and try to
 free memory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 690. Error Message 1054 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1054: An error occurred during an attempt to deallocate a temporary directory
handle.


 Explanation

 This operation is required to release resources, but is unable to do so
 because  of an incorrect request or problem with the application or OS/2.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If necessary, exit the utility or OS/2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 691. Error Message 1055 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1055: An error occurred during an attempt to read restriction information.


 Explanation

 This operation requires that the restriction information be read, but that
 information is not available because Directory Services did not respond to the
 request, or you did not have sufficient rights to read the information.
 Action

 If you have sufficient rights, try the operation again. Make sure Directory
 Services is responding to requests.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 692. Error Message 1056 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1056: An error occurred during an attempt to delete a directory. Make sure the
directory is empty and not currently in use.


 Explanation

 The request to delete a directory could not be completed. You may not have
 sufficient rights to delete a directory; the directory may still have files or
 subdirectories. or someone may be using the current directory.
 Action

 If the directory still has files or subdirectories, delete them before you
 attempt to delete this directory. Make sure the directory is not currently
 being used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 693. Error Message 1057 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1057: An error occurred during an attempt to create a new directory.


 Explanation

 The request to create a directory cannot be completed. You may not have
 sufficient rights to create a directory.
 Action

 Check that you have sufficient rights to create a directory. If you have
 sufficient rights, check your network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 694. Error Message 1058 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1058: An error occurred during an attempt to get the contents of the directory.


 Explanation

 The request to get the contents of a directory cannot be completed. You may
 not  have sufficient rights to create a directory.
 Action

 Check that you have sufficient rights to create a directory. If you have
 sufficient rights, check your network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 695. Error Message 1059 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1059: An error occurred during an attempt to get the files that have been
deleted from this directory.


 Explanation

 The request to get the files deleted from this directory cannot be completed.
 You may not have sufficient rights to retrieve deleted files into this
 directory.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 696. Error Message 1060 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1060: An error occurred during an attempt to get the files that have been
deleted from deleted directories.


 Explanation

 The request to get the files deleted from deleted directories cannot be
 completed. You may not have sufficient rights to retrieve deleted files from
 the deleted directories.
 Action

 Make sure that you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights,
 check  your network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 697. Error Message 1061 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1061: An error occurred during an attempt to update the directory.


 Explanation

 The request to update the directory cannot be completed. You may not have
 sufficient rights to update the directory.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 698. Error Message 1062 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1062: The file was not copied. Source and destination cannot be the same file.


 Explanation

 The request to copy the file cannot be completed. The file cannot be copied to
 itself.
 Action

 Specify a path to copy the file to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 699. Error Message 1063 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1063: An error occurred during an attempt to get effective rights to the source
directory.


 Explanation

 The request to get effective rights to the source directory cannot be
 completed. You may not have sufficient rights to get effective rights to the
 source directory.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 700. Error Message 1064 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1064: The file was not copied. An error occurred during an attempt to copy the
file.


 Explanation

 The request to copy the file cannot be completed. You may not have sufficient
 rights in the source or destination directory to copy the file.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights in the
 source and destination directory, check your network connections and server
 status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 701. Error Message 1065 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1065: The file was not copied. You have insufficient rights to the source or
destination directory.


 Explanation

 The request to copy the file could not be completed. You probably do not have
 sufficient rights in the source or destination directory to copy the file.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights in the
 source and destination directory, check your network connections and server
 status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 702. Error Message 1066 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1066: This file already exists in the destination directory; you cannot
overwrite it.


 Explanation

 The file already exists in the directory where you are trying to copy it.
 Action

 Change the flags on the file in the destination directory so it can be
 deleted,  and delete it. Then try the operation again. If it still fails,
 check your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 703. Error Message 1067 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1067: An error occurred during an attempt to get volume information.


 Explanation

 The request cannot get volume information from the server. You may not have
 sufficient rights to the server, or the server cannot be located on the
 network, either because
 -  The server object is in a different context, or
 -  The physical volume's host server address is not available or is invalid.
 Action

 Make sure that you have rights to the server and that the server is up and
 running on the network. Check the context of the server object and the
 volume's  host server network address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 704. Error Message 1068 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1068: An error occurred during an attempt to get extended volume information.


 Explanation

 The request cannot get extended volume information from the server. You may
 not  have sufficient rights to the server, or the server cannot be located on
 the  network, either because the server object is in a different context, or
 the  physical volume's host server address is not available or is invalid.
 Action

 Make sure that you have rights to the server and that the server is up and
 running on the network. Check the context of the server object and the
 volume's  host server network address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 705. Error Message 1069 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1069: An error occurred during an attempt to get object restriction data.


 Explanation

 The request cannot get object restriction data.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Check your network connections and server status if
 the operation still fails.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 706. Error Message 1070 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1070: An error occurred during an attempt to scan for trustee assignments.


 Explanation

 The request to find trustee assignments cannot be returned. You may not have
 sufficient rights to the server.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 707. Error Message 1071 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1071: An error occurred during an attempt to read disk restrictions.


 Explanation

 The request to read disk restrictions cannot be returned. You may not have
 sufficient rights to the server, or the server cannot be located on the
 network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 708. Error Message 1072 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1072: An error occurred during an attempt to obtain the volume utilization.


 Explanation

 The request to obtain the volume utilization cannot be returned. You may not
 have sufficient rights to the server, or the server cannot be located on the
 network, either because the server object is in a different context, or the
 physical volume's host server address is not available or is invalid.
 Action

 Make sure that you have rights to the server and that the server is up and
 running on the network. Check the context of the server object and the
 volume's  host server network address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 709. Error Message 1073 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1073: An error occurred during an attempt to update the volume restrictions.


 Explanation

 The request to update the volume restrictions cannot be completed. You may not
 have sufficient rights to the server, or the server cannot be located on the
 network, either because the server object is in a different context, or the
 physical volume's host server address is not available or is invalid.
 Action

 Make sure that you have rights to the server and that the server is up and
 running on the network. Check the context of the server object and the
 volume's  host server network address.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 710. Error Message 1074 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1074: An error occurred during an attempt to delete the file.


 Explanation

 The request to delete the file cannot be completed. You may not have
 sufficient  rights to the server, directory or file, or the server cannot be
 located on the  network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 711. Error Message 1075 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1075: An error occurred during an attempt to update the file information.


 Explanation

 The request to update the file information cannot be completed. You may not
 have sufficient rights to the server, directory, or file, or the server cannot
 be located on the network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 712. Error Message 1076 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1076: An error occurred during an attempt to read the deleted file information.


 Explanation

 The request to read deleted file information cannot be completed. You may not
 have sufficient rights to the server, directory, or file, or the server cannot
 be located on the network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 713. Error Message 1077 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1077: An error occurred during an attempt to recover the deleted file.


 Explanation

 The request to recover the deleted file cannot be completed. You may not have
 sufficient rights to the server, directory or file, or the server cannot be
 located on the network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 714. Error Message 1078 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1078: An error occurred during an attempt to purge the deleted file.


 Explanation

 The request to purge the deleted file cannot be completed. You may not have
 sufficient rights to the server, directory or file, or the server cannot be
 located on the network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, check
 your  network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 715. Error Message 1079 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1079: A network error has occurred. Please note the following numbers.


 Explanation

 An unexplained error with your network connection has caused this operation to
 fail.
 Action

 Record the numbers displayed and contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 716. Error Message 1080 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1080: The copy operation failed on file <name>.


 Explanation

 The request to copy the file cannot be completed. You may not have sufficient
 rights to the server, directory or file, or the server cannot be located on
 the  network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights in both
 the  source and destination directories, check your network connections and
 server  status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 717. Error Message 1081 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1081: The move operation failed on file <name>. It is possible that the file
was successfully copied to the new location, but could not be deleted from its
original location.


 Explanation

 The request to move the file cannot be completed. You may not have sufficient
 rights to the server, directory or file, or the server cannot be located on
 the  network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights in both
 the  source and destination directories, check your network connections and
 server  status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 718. Error Message 1082 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1082: An invalid file or directory name was given as the destination.


 Explanation

 One of the following causes may account for this error:
 -  The file or directory where you wanted to copy the file is invalid.
 -  You do not have sufficient rights to the server, directory, or file.
 -  The server cannot be located on the network.
 Action

 Make sure that the file and directory names are valid and that you have
 sufficient rights in both the source and destination directories. Also check
 your network connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 719. Error Message 1083 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1083: No files were selected to move or copy.


 Explanation

 You did not select files to be moved or copied.
 Action

 Select the files to be moved or copied, and then try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 720. Error Message 1084 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1084: <Object name> could not be found. Please check that it still exists and
that you still have rights to see it.


 Explanation

 You may not have sufficient rights to the server, directory, or file, or the
 server cannot be located on the network.
 Action

 If you have sufficient rights, check your network connections and server
 status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 721. Error Message 1085 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1085: <Object> is of an object class that cannot be contained by the
destination object.


 Explanation

 The object you selected cannot be contained by the destination object.
 Action

 Make sure that you select an object class that can contain the type of object
 you are attempting to use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 722. Error Message 1086 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1086: No more server connection slots are available. Log out of a server that
you are not using, or increase the maximum number of connections.


 Explanation

 To complete this operation, you must attach to a server, but no slots are
 available for the new connection.
 Action

 Detach from a server that you are not using, or increase the maximum number of
 slots that can be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 723. Error Message 1087 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1087: Authentication to this server has failed. You have only [Public] rights.


 Explanation

 The request to log in to this server has failed. You are attached with
 [Public]  rights only. You may not have sufficient rights to the server, or
 the server  cannot be located on the network.
 Action

 Make sure you have sufficient rights. If you have sufficient rights, try the
 operation again, using the proper login name and password.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 724. Error Message 1088 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1088: Login has failed. You have no account balance.


 Explanation

 You cannot log in because accounting has been set and you do not have a
 balance.
 Action

 Contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 725. Error Message 1089 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1089 Login has failed. You have no credit in your account balance.


 Explanation

 You cannot log in because accounting has been set and you do not have a
 balance.
 Action

 Contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 726. Error Message 1090 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1090: Login has failed. Your account has been locked because an intruder was
detected.


 Explanation

 Your account has been locked because an intruder was detected. Either you
 typed  in the wrong name or password, or someone tried to log in as you.
 Action

 Contact your network supervisor to have your account unlocked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 727. Error Message 1091 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1091: Login has failed. You do not have a valid connection to this server.


 Explanation

 Your request to log in has failed because you do not have a valid connection
 to  the server.
 Action

 Try again, using the correct login name and password. If the request still
 fails, contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 728. Error Message 1092 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1092: Login has failed. You have exceeded your maximum concurrent logins.


 Explanation

 Your account has a limit on the number of logins you can have at one time.
 Action

 Contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 729. Error Message 1093 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1093: Login has failed. You are not authorized to log in on this day at this
time.


 Explanation

 Your account has specific times set when you can log in. You are not allowed
 to  log in at this time.
 Action

 Contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 730. Error Message 1094 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1094: Login has failed. You are not authorized to log in from this workstation.


 Explanation

 Your account has specific workstation addresses set that you can use to log
 in.  You cannot log in from this workstation.
 Action

 Contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 731. Error Message 1095 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1095: Login has failed. Your account has been disabled.


 Explanation

 Your account has a date set when it will be disabled. That date arrived, and
 you are not allowed to log in.
 Action

 Contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 732. Error Message 1096 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1096: Login has failed. Your password has expired and your grace logins have
been used.


 Explanation

 Your account has been set so that you must change your password regularly.
 Your  password expired and the grace logins allowed have also been used.
 Action

 Contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 733. Error Message 1097 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1097: Your password has expired. Please change your password immediately.


 Explanation

 Your account has been set so that you must change your password regularly.
 Your  password has expired
 Action

 Choose a new password.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 734. Error Message 1098 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1098: Login has failed. Please make sure you have correctly entered your name
and password and that the server is functional.


 Explanation

 Either the login name or the password was typed incorrectly, or the server is
 not functioning properly.
 Action

 You may not have sufficient rights to the server, or the server cannot be
 located on the network. If you have sufficient rights, make sure you type the
 login name and password correctly. If that doesn't work, check network
 connections and server status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 735. Error Message 1099 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1099: The selected server cannot be found.


 Explanation

 The request for the selected server could not be completed.
 Action

 You may not have sufficient rights to the server, or the server cannot be
 located on the network, either because the server object is in a different
 context, or the physical volume's host server address is not available or is
 invalid. If you have sufficient rights, check network connections and server
 status.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 736. Error Message 1250 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1250: The selected directory's existence cannot be confirmed.


 Explanation

 This directory was located when first displayed, but can no longer be found.
 It  may still exist, but not be available to this dialog because of partition
 or  network connections that have changed since you first saw the directory
 listed  in the dialog.
 Action

 Close and reopen this dialog to see if the directory is still visible to
 Directory Services. If it is not, check with your network supervisor to find
 out if partitions or network connections have been changed recently.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 737. Error Message 1251 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1251: The selected file's existence cannot be confirmed.


 Explanation

 This file was located when first displayed, but can no longer be found. It may
 still exist, but not be available to this dialog because of partition or
 network connections that have changed since you first saw the file listed in
 the dialog.
 Action

 Close and reopen this dialog to see if the file is still visible to Directory
 Services. If it is not, check with your network supervisor to find out if
 partitions or network connections have been changed recently.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 738. Error Message 1963 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1963: The Device Name must be unique.


 Explanation

 You specified a device name that is already assigned to another device. Each
 printer device must have a unique name to avoid ambiguous requests for
 service.
 Action

 Use a different name that is not already listed as a printer device.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 739. Error Message 1965 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1965: The Form Name must be unique and must start with an alphabetic character.
The Form Number must be unique (0-255), Length (1-255), Width (1-999).


 Explanation

 The form name cannot already exist in the list. It must also start with a
 character from A to Z.
 Action

 Enter a new form name that is unique and begins with a letter from A to Z.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 740. Error Message 1967 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1967 The Function Name must be unique.


 Explanation

 You specified a form name that is already on the list. The function name
 cannot  already exist in the list.
 Action

 Enter a new form name that is unique.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 741. Error Message 1968 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1968: Memory was unavailable for function sequence information. Please close
unneeded applications. Check OS/2 information on how to increase available
memory.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory and may not be able to continue.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 742. Error Message 1970 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1970: The Mode Name must be unique. Cannot modify name nor delete
(Re-initialize) mode.


 Explanation

 The mode name cannot already exist in the list. The Re-Initialize mode is
 always listed, even if you have not added it or defined functions for it.
 Action

 Enter a new mode name that is unique. Define functions for the Re-Initialize
 mode, if desired; otherwise, ignore it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 743. Error Message 1980 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1980: NWDSSetContext problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 744. Error Message 1981 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1981: NWDSFreeContext problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 745. Error Message 1982 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1982: NWPSPdfAddForm problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 746. Error Message 1983 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1983: NWPSPdfUpdateForm problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 747. Error Message 1984 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1984: NWPSPdfDeleteForm problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 748. Error Message 1985 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1985: NWPSPdfAddDevice problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 749. Error Message 1986 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1986: NWPSPdfUpdateDevice problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 750. Error Message 1987 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1987: NWPSPdfDeleteDevice problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 751. Error Message 1988 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1988: NWPSPdfAddFunction problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 752. Error Message 1989 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1989: NWPSPdfUpdateFunction problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 753. Error Message 1990 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1990: NWPSPdfDeleteFunction problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 754. Error Message 1991 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1991: NWPSPdfAddModeFunction problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 755. Error Message 1992 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1992: NWPSPdfDeleteMode problem.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 756. Error Message 1993 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1993: The filename used for export may already exist; a problem occurred in
NWPSPdfExportDevice.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the problem persists, contact your
 Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 757. Error Message 1994 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1994: The device imported may already exist; a problem occurred in
NWPSPdfImportDevice.


 Explanation

 The function named could not complete its execution properly. Each printer
 device must have a unique name.
 Action

 Close the dialog and try the operation again, taking care that you are working
 with the correct object and context. If the same error occurs, try renaming
 printer devices that may conflict with the printer device that you are trying
 to import. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 758. Error Message 1995 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1995: A problem has occurred with an internal action flag.


 Explanation

 An internal flag was set unexpectedly. The reason for the flag cannot be
 determined.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and try the operation again. Exit and restart the
 utility if necessary. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized
 Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 759. Error Message 1150 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1150: The NetWare Administrator has run out of memory.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory and may not be able to continue.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 760. Error Message 1151 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1151: An error occurred during an attempt to add new trustees.


 Explanation

 New trustee or trustees could not be added to the trustees list. The trustees
 list may be corrupted, OS/2 may not be able to access sufficient memory to
 add to the list, or the names of the new trustees returned by Directory
 Services may not be accurate.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem. Then retry the operation. If the problem persists,
 contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 761. Error Message 1152 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1152: A string resource (message) could not be loaded.


 Explanation

 A message that would have been displayed cannot be found within OS/2.
 Action

 Try repeating this action. If this fails, exiting and enter the current dialog
 again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 762. Error Message 1153 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1153 An error occurred during an attempt to build the list of trustees.


 Explanation

 The list of trustees could not be assembled. Either Directory Services did not
 respond to the request, or the object name or trustee data was corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing and opening this dialog again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 763. Error Message 1154 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1154: An error occurred during an attempt to get trustee rights.


 Explanation

 The rights granted to the selected trustee cannot be found. Directory Services
 may have returned incorrect information, or the name of the trustee may be
 corrupted in memory.
 Action

 Try closing and opening the current dialog again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 764. Error Message 1155 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1155: An error occurred during an attempt to open the Effective Rights dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Effective Rights" dialog cannot be opened. There may not be enough
 memory.
 Action

 Try closing and opening the current dialog again. Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 765. Error Message 1156 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1156: An error occurred during an attempt to get the effective rights.


 Explanation

 The effective rights of the requested object cannot be found. Directory
 Services may not have responded to a request, or the name of the object may be
 corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing and opening the current dialog again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 766. Error Message 1157 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1157: An error occurred during an attempt to save Directory Facts changes.


 Explanation

 Changes that you made in the "Directory Facts" page could not be saved. The
 directory may be unavailable, or the new information may be corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing the dialog and opening it again. Enter the information again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 767. Error Message 1158 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1158: An error occurred during an attempt to save Directory Identification
changes.


 Explanation

 Changes that you made in the "Directory Identification" page could not be
 saved. The directory may be unavailable, or the new information may be
 corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing the dialog and reopening it to enter the information again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 768. Error Message 1159 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1159: An error occurred during an attempt to save Trustee changes.


 Explanation

 Changes to the trustee list or to trustee's rights could not be saved to the
 Directory Database. Directory Services may not allow access at the moment, or
 the new data may be corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the dialog before reentering the information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 769. Error Message 1160 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1160: An error occurred during an attempt to initialize the Directory Facts
dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Directory Facts" information cannot be opened. There may not be enough
 memory.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the current dialog. Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 770. Error Message 1161 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1161: An error occurred during an attempt to get the object's effective rights.


 Explanation

 The effective rights of the requested object cannot be found. Directory
 Services may not have responded to a request, or the name of the object may be
 corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 771. Error Message 1162 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1162: An error occurred during an attempt to initialize the Directory
Identification dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Directory Identification" dialog cannot be opened. There may not be
 enough  memory.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the current dialog. Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 772. Error Message 1163 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1163: An error occurred during an attempt to return the list of bindery users
and groups.


 Explanation

 When you were using Bindery Emulation or a NetWare v3.11 server, the list of
 Users and Groups from the bindery could not be completed. The request may be
 corrupted.
 Explanation

 Close and reopen the current dialog before attempting this again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 773. Error Message 1164 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1164: An error occurred during an attempt to rename the file or directory.


 Explanation

 The object could not be renamed. The old name may be corrupted and so cannot
 be  found, or the new name may be unacceptable. Directory Services may not be
 accepting the request to update the Directory Database.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog before attempting this again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 774. Error Message 1165 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1165: An error occurred during an attempt to delete a trustee.


 Explanation

 The selected trustee could not be deleted. One of the following happened:
 -  Either Directory Services received a command it did not understand
 -  The object has subordinates
 -  The name of the object is not acceptable to Directory Services
 -  The request was corrupted
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog before attempting this again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 775. Error Message 1166 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1166: An error occurred during an attempt to set the trustee rights.


 Explanation

 New rights for the trustee could not be set. OS/2 may be unable to allocate
 sufficient memory to save the information, or the trustee or request to change
 rights may be corrupted and unreadable.
 Action

 Correct the memory problems.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 776. Error Message 1167 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1167: An error occurred during an attempt to save changes to the directory
attributes.


 Explanation

 Changes that you made in the Directory Attributes could not be saved. The
 directory may be unavailable, or the new information may be corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing the dialog and reopening it to enter the information again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 777. Error Message 1168 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1168: An error occurred during an attempt to get the trustee rights.


 Explanation

 The rights granted to the selected trustee cannot be found. Directory Services
 may have returned incorrect information, or the name of the trustee may be
 corrupted in memory.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog before attempting this again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 778. Error Message 1169 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1169: An error occurred during an attempt to save File Facts changes.


 Explanation

 Changes that you made in the File Facts page could not be saved. The file may
 be unavailable, or the new information may be corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing the dialog and reopening it to enter the information again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 779. Error Message 1170 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1170: An error occurred during an attempt to initialize the File Facts dialog.


 Explanation

 The "File Facts" dialog cannot be opened. There may not be enough memory.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog before attempting this again. Correct the
 memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 780. Error Message 1171 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1171: An error occurred during an attempt to save changes to the file
attributes.


 Explanation

 Changes that you made in the File Attributes could not be saved. The file may
 be unavailable, or the new information may be corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing the dialog and reopening it to enter the information again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 781. Error Message 1172 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1172: An error occurred during an attempt to initialize the Bindery User and
Group Selector dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Bindery User and Group" information cannot be opened. There may not be
 enough memory.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog before attempting this again. If the
 attempt fails again, correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 782. Error Message 1173 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1173: An error occurred while sorting the salvageable file list.


 Explanation

 The list of salvageable files could not be sorted by the sort option that you
 have selected. There may not be enough memory available to complete the sort.
 The files should still be displayed in a non-sorted list.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 783. Error Message 1174 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1174: An error occurred during an attempt to initialize the Salvage dialog.


 Explanation

 The "Salvage" dialog cannot be opened. There may not be enough memory.
 Action

 Try opening the dialog again. Then try exiting and reentering the utility.
 Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 784. Error Message 1175 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1175: An error occurred during an attempt to retrieve the salvageable file
list.


 Explanation

 The list of files from the selected directory that can be salvaged could not
 be  compiled. The volume may not be responding, or the request was corrupted.
 Action

 Close the "Salvage" dialog and reopen it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 785. Error Message 1176 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1176: An error occurred during an attempt to display the salvageable file list.


 Explanation

 The list of salvageable files was retrieved from the directory that you
 requested, but it cannot be displayed. Either the list was corrupted and
 contains bad information, or OS/2 cannot allocate sufficient memory to
 display the list.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog. If the attempt fails again, check memory.
 Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 786. Error Message 1177 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1177: An error occurred during an attempt to salvage files.


 Explanation

 The file or files that you tried to salvage could not be salvaged. The file
 names may have been corrupted sending them to the volume, or the volume may be
 unable to complete the operation.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog before attempting this again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 787. Error Message 1178 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1178: An error occurred during an attempt to purge files.


 Explanation

 The file or files that you tried to purge could not be salvaged. The file
 names  may have been corrupted sending them to the volume, or the volume may
 be unable  to complete the operation.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog before attempting this again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 788. Error Message 1320 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1320: The object name is invalid.


 Explanation

 One of the following may explain this error
 -  The name entered for an object contains characters that are invalid.
 -  The name entered for an object refers to an object that does not exist or
    cannot be accessed at the moment.
 -  You may have lost your connection to Directory Services. Requests may have
    been delayed or access to the database interrupted.
 Action

 Try entering a different name or correcting characters in the name. If the
 name  is correct, check your connection to Directory Services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 789. Error Message 1321 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1321: The Country name is too long. Only two characters are allowed.


 Explanation

 The name of a Country object can only be two characters long. It is intended
 to  be used for the international code for the country, with a complete name
 stored  in the Description property.
 Action

 Reenter the Country name, using the correct two-character code. Commonly used
 codes are found in the help topic for the Country "Create" dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 790. Error Message 1322 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1322: A system error has occurred.


 Explanation

 An error has occurred with the system.
 Action

 Check your network connection, exit OS/2, and restart the utility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 791. Error Message 1323 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1323: No server can be found.


 Explanation

 In order to complete most tasks, a server containing a partition of the
 Directory Services database must be available. If a server cannot be located
 because of a broken network connection or other problem, most functions cannot
 be completed.
 Action

 Check your connection to the network and your configuration files to see that
 your login is correct. Restart your system or log in again to search for a
 server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 792. Error Message 1324 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1324: No connection can be established.


 Explanation

 The utility needed to identify a server to receive information from but was
 not  able to identify a valid connection.
 Action

 Make sure that you still have a connection to the network and that a Directory
 Services server is functioning properly. Try the operation again. If the
 attempt fails again, exit and restart the utility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 793. Error Message 1325 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1325: The name entered is too long.


 Explanation

 You have entered a name that is too long for the value requested. Your entry
 will not fit.
 Action

 Enter a shorter name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 794. Error Message 1326 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1326: A duplicate type is not allowed.


 Explanation

 Duplicates are not allowed here.
 Action

 Locate the duplicate and then try the operation again, being careful not to
 duplicate an existing type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 795. Error Message 1327 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1327: You are not logged in.


 Explanation

 You must be logged in as an authenticated Directory Services object to
 complete  this task.
 Action

 Log in to Directory Services with a valid username and password (if required).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 796. Error Message 1328 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1328: Invalid password characters were entered.


 Explanation

 You have entered invalid characters as part of a password.
 Action

 Reenter the password using valid characters


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 797. Error Message 1329 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1329: An invalid name was entered.


 Explanation

 One of the following may explain this error
 -  The name entered for an object contains characters that are invalid.
 -  The name entered for an object refers to an object that does not exist or
    cannot be accessed at the moment.
 -  You may have lost your connection to Directory Services. Requests may have
    been delayed or access to the database interrupted.
 Action

 Try entering a different name or correcting characters in the name. If the
 name  is correct, check your connection to Directory Services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 798. Error Message 1350 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1350: The object cannot be read. It may have been deleted from another
workstation, or you may not have sufficient rights to read it.


 Explanation

 The object specified cannot be located in the database. It may have been
 deleted at another workstation since the time that it appeared on your screen.
 Another possibility is that you can see the object but have insufficient
 rights  to read its properties.
 Action

 Close and reopen this dialog. If the object no longer appears, it was deleted
 at another station. If it still appears, check your effective rights to the
 object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 799. Error Message 1351 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1351: There is no such value.


 Explanation

 The requested value does not exist or cannot be found at the moment.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If it fails repeatedly, try a different value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 800. Error Message 1352 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1352: An object with that name already exists. Please try a different name.


 Explanation

 Objects within the same container must have unique names so that their
 complete  names are unique.
 Action

 Use a different name for this object, one that is not used yet in this
 container.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 801. Error Message 1353 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1353: A name was entered that is invalid in Directory Services. The maximum
length is 256 characters.


 Explanation

 The name entered for this object was too long or used invalid characters.
 Action

 Reenter the name, being careful not to use invalid characters or to exceed the
 maximum length.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 802. Error Message 1354 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1354: This object class cannot be created in this container.


 Explanation

 Only certain classes can be created in each type of container object. You have
 tried to create an object that this container object cannot accept.
 Action

 Select a different container to create the new object in, or create a
 different  class of object in this container.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 803. Error Message 1355 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1355: Syntax has been violated.


 Explanation

 The request could not be understood because its form or syntax was incorrect.
 Action

 Try the command again. If the error recurs, check the documentation or ask
 your  network supervisor for assistance with the correct form for this command
 or  request.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 804. Error Message 1356 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1356: A duplicate value has been entered.


 Explanation

 Duplicates are not allowed here.
 Action

 Enter a unique value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 805. Error Message 1357 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1357: The naming value cannot be removed.


 Explanation

 For any object to exist, it must have a name. The name is actually one of the
 values of one of the properties of the object. You have tried to remove the
 value of the property that names the object. This is not allowed.
 Action

 Remove all other values as needed. Use the "Rename" option to change the
 object's name, or the "Delete" option to delete the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 806. Error Message 1358 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1358: An invalid request has been made.


 Explanation

 The requested operation is invalid or was not understood. You may have
 requested an operation that cannot be performed on the selected object (like
 creating an object under a leaf object).
 Action

 Check your request for appropriateness, then try your request again. If the
 error persists, contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 807. Error Message 1359 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1359: Ambiguous containment cannot be resolved.


 Explanation

 The containment of objects cannot be determined. Either the immediate
 container  of the selected object cannot be determined, or the appropriate
 rules governing  objects of the selected class cannot be determined.
 Action

 Close and reopen the current dialog and try the operation again. Review the
 rules for containment if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 808. Error Message 1360 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1360: Ambiguous naming cannot be resolved.


 Explanation

 The name of the object cannot be clearly understood. Either different values
 are set as the naming value, or the naming value cannot be found.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Also check for corruption in your database. If the
 problem persists, you may need to delete and recreate this object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 809. Error Message 1361 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1361: A duplicate value has been entered.


 Explanation

 Duplicate values are not allowed here.
 Action

 Enter a unique value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 810. Error Message 1362 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1362: A duplicate value has been entered.


 Explanation

 Duplicate values are not allowed here.
 Action

 Enter a unique value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 811. Error Message 1363 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1363: Access is not allowed.


 Explanation

 Access to this object or property is not allowed at this time. You may have
 insufficient rights, or Directory Services may be currently processing a
 command (such as a delete or move) that requires locking out certain other
 actions until it is completed.
 Action

 Wait until Directory Services has finished; then try the operation again. If
 the error persists, ask your network supervisor to grant you more rights to
 the  area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 812. Error Message 1429 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1429: An error occurred during an attempt to load mvebb.dll.


 Explanation

 A file that was needed to complete a requested action is not available to the
 utility. One of the NetWare Administrator's files is missing or corrupted.
 Action

 Recopy the NetWare Administrator and its associated files to your work area
 (probably the PUBLIC directory) from the NetWare program disks or CD-ROM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 813. Error Message 1430 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1430: An error occurred during an attempt to load muscroll.dll.


 Explanation

 A file that was needed to complete a requested action is not available to the
 utility. One of the NetWare Administrator's files is missing or corrupted.
 Action

 Recopy the NetWare Administrator and its associated files to your work area
 (probably the PUBLIC directory) from the NetWare program disks or CDROM.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 814. Error Message 1431 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1431: An error occurred during an attempt to call `CN can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occur again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor.  If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 815. Error Message 1432 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1432: An error occurred during an attempt to call `Server can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the errors
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 816. Error Mssage 1433 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1433: An error occurred during an attempt to call `Description can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 817. Error Message 1434 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1434: An error occurred during an attempt to call `Locality can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 818. Error Message 1435 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1435: An error occurred during an attempt to call `OU can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 819. Error Message 1436 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1436: An error occurred during an attempt to call `O can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 820. Error Message 1437 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1437: An error occurred during an attempt to call `Owner can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 821. Error Message 1438 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1438: An error occurred during an attempt to call `Serial Number can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 822. Error Message 1439 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1439: An error occurred during an attempt to load the flat browser dll.


 Explanation

 A file needed to complete the operation is not available or is corrupted.
 Action

 Make sure all necessary files are available to the utility. If any are missing
 or corrupted, recopy them to your work area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 823. Error Message 1440 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1440: An error occurred during an attempt to reference the transfer buffer.


 Explanation

 An internal memory area that was needed to complete an operation cannot be
 accessed.
 Action

 There may be a memory conflict or an error in the requested operation. Close
 and reopen the dialog and try the operation again. You may need to exit OS/2
 if the problem persists.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 824. Error Message 1441 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1441: An error occurred during an attempt to create a new object.


 Explanation

 The new object cannot be created because of a problem with the utility or with
 the Directory Services database.You may also have insufficient rights to
 create  an object here, or the object you want to create may not be allowed
 within this  container class.
 Action

 Try again to create the object. You may need to exit the utility first, and
 then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection is invalid, you cannot create a new object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 825. Error Message 1442 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1442: An error occurred because the view pointer is invalid.


 Explanation

 A pointer needed to reference an area of the screen is invalid or cannot be
 found. The display may be incorrect, even though the data has not been
 altered.
 Action

 Close all Browsers and reopen them. You may need to close the utility and
 reopen it. If the problem persists, check your network connection and consider
 using replicas of this partition to correct any corrupted object data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 826. Error Message 1443 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1443: An error occurred because the OS/2 object is invalid.


 Explanation

 The structure used to display information has become corrupted or cannot be
 found.
 Action

 Close the utility, and perhaps OS/2, and reopen them. If the problem
 persists, contact your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 827. Error Message 1444 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1444: An error occurred because the model object is invalid.


 Explanation

 The needed information from the database about the selected object could not
 be  found or understood.
 Action

 Close the dialog or Browser and reopen it. If the problem persists, check your
 network connection and consider using replicas of this partition to correct
 any  corrupted object data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 828. Error Message 1445 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1445: An error occurred because the program was not able to get the Browser
handle.


 Explanation

 The information needed to correctly display the Browser could not be found or
 understood. Although the information on the screen may appear garbled, the
 data  has not been altered.
 Action

 Close the Browser window, or perhaps the utility, and try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 829. Error Message 1446 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1446: An error occurred during an attempt to call `fax can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 830. Error Message 1447 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1447: An error occurred during an attempt to call `email can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 831. Error Message 1448 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1448: An error occurred during an attempt to call `role occupant can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 832. Error Message 1449 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1449: An error occurred during an attempt to call `telephone number can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 833. Error Message 1450 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1450: An error occurred during an attempt to call `host server can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 834. Error Message 1451 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1451: An error occurred during an attempt to call `aliased object name can
close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 835. Error Message 1452 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1452: An error occurred during an attempt to call `version can close.'


 Explanation

 The specified function call could not be completed. Data may have become
 corrupted during processing, or Directory Services did not provide or request
 sufficient information to complete the task. The value entered may not have
 been saved.
 Action

 Close the current dialog and reopen it. Repeat the operation. If the error
 occurs again, check your network connection and contact your network
 supervisor. If the problem persists, contact your Novell Authorized Reseller.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 836. Error Message 1458 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1458: Due to an unknown error, the current operation may fail.


 Explanation

 Some information needed to complete this operation is unavailable or cannot be
 understood.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If repeated attempts fail, exit the utility and check
 your network connection. Also try the operation on other workstations to see
 if  the problem is in the database or with your workstation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 837. Error Message 1459 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1459: An error occurred during an attempt to add an object. The operation may
fail.


 Explanation

 The new object could not be created. One of the following may account for this
 error:
 -  A problem occurred with the utility or with the Directory Services
    database.
 -  You have insufficient rights to create an object here.
 -  The object you want to create may not be allowed within this container
    class.
 Action

 Try again to create the object. You may need to exit the utility first, and
 then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection is invalid, you cannot create a new object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 838. Error Message 1460 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1460: An error occurred during an attempt to read an object. The operation may
fail.


 Explanation

 A problem may have occurred with the utility or with the Directory Services
 database, or you may have insufficient rights to complete this operation.
 Action

 Try again to read the object. You may need to exit the utility first, and then
 reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection  is invalid, you cannot read an object. Make sure you have
 sufficient rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 839. Error Message 1461 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1461: An error occurred during an attempt to save changes. The operation may
fail.


 Explanation

 The changes to the object cannot be saved because of a problem with the
 utility  or with the Directory Services database. Another possibility is that
 you have  insufficient rights to modify this object.
 Action

 Try again to modify the object and save the changes. You may need to exit the
 utility first, and then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory
 Services. If your connection is invalid, you cannot modify objects. Make sure
 you have sufficient rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 840. Error Message 1463 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1463: An error occurred during an attempt to rename an object. The operation
may fail.


 Explanation

 A problem may have occurred with the utility or with the Directory Services
 database. Another possibility is that you have insufficient rights to complete
 this operation.
 Action

 Try again to rename the object. You may need to exit the utility first, and
 then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection is invalid, you cannot rename an object. Make sure you have
 sufficient rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 841. Error Message 1464 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1464: An error occurred. The current operation may fail.


 Explanation

 A problem may have occurred with the utility or with the Directory Services
 database. Another possibility is that you have insufficient rights to complete
 this operation.
 Action

 Try the operation again. You may need to exit the utility first, and then
 reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. Make sure you
 have  sufficient rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 842. Error Message 1469 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1469: The new object could not be created.


 Explanation

 The new object could not be created. One of the following may account for this
 error:
 -  A problem occurred with the utility or with the Directory Services
    database.
 -  You have insufficient rights to create an object here.
 -  The object you want to create may not be allowed within this container
    class.
 Action

 Try again to create the object. You may need to exit the utility first, and
 then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection is invalid, you cannot create a new object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 843. Error Message 1470 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1470: The object could not be read.


 Explanation

 The object could not be read because of a problem with the utility or with the
 Directory Services database. Another possibility is that you have insufficient
 rights to read this object.
 Action

 Try again to read the object. You may need to exit the utility first, and then
 reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection  is invalid, you cannot read an object. Make sure you have
 sufficient rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 844. Error Message 1471 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1471: The object could not be modified.


 Explanation

 The changes to the object cannot be saved because of a problem with the
 utility  or with the Directory Services database. Another possibility is that
 you have  insufficient rights to modify this object.
 Action

 Try again to modify the object and save the changes. You may need to exit the
 utility first, and then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory
 Services. If your connection is invalid, you cannot modify objects. Make sure
 you have sufficient rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 845. Error Message 1472 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1472: The object could not be renamed.


 Explanation

 The object cannot be renamed because of a problem with the utility or with the
 Directory Services database. Another possibility is that you have insufficient
 rights to rename this object.
 Action

 Try again to rename the object. You may need to exit the utility first, and
 then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection is invalid, you cannot rename an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 846. Error Message 1473 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1473: An object key pair could not be generated.


 Explanation

 A property used during login cannot be created properly. You may not be able
 to  log in successfully or complete other operations requiring authentication.
 Action

 See your network supervisor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 847. Error Message 1479 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1479: A buffer could not be allocated. The current operation may fail.


 Explanation

 Space needed to complete this operation was not available. The operation may
 or  may not be completed without that extra space.
 Action

 Try the operation again, closing dialogs or Browser windows if necessary to
 free memory. Correct the memory problem. If more memory does not solve the
 problem, a problem may exist in OS/2. Check your OS/2 settings. Try  exiting
 OS/2 before repeating the operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 848. Error Message 1480 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1480: The user's login name could not be determined.


 Explanation

 The login name entered is unreadable, or the name of the user already logged
 in  cannot be found but is needed for the current operation.
 Action

 Try the operation again. The database may have been unavailable for a moment.
 Make sure the required username is a valid object name and exists in the
 database where expected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 849. Error Message 1481 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1481: Effective rights could not be determined.


 Explanation

 The effective rights of the requested object cannot be found. Directory
 Services may not have responded to a request, or the name of the object may be
 corrupted.
 Action

 Try closing and reopening the current dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 850. Error Message 1482 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1482: The name could not be mapped to an ID. The current operation may fail.


 Explanation

 The name entered was understood, but cannot be converted to an internal code
 needed for this operation. Without that code, the operation is likely to fail.
 Action

 Try the operation again. The database may have been unavailable for a moment.
 Make sure the entered username is a valid object name and exists in the
 database where expected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 851. Error Message 1483 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1483 The model object could not be found. The current operation may fail.


 Explanation

 The needed information from the database about the selected object cannot be
 found or understood.
 Action

 Close the dialog or Browser and reopen it. If the problem persists, check your
 network connection and consider using replicas of this partition to correct
 any  corrupted object data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 852. Error Message 1484 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1484: The object could not be renamed.


 Explanation

 The object could not be renamed because of a problem with the utility or with
 the Directory Services database. Another possibility is that you have
 insufficient rights to rename this object.
 Action

 Try again to rename the object. You may need to exit the utility first, and
 then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection is invalid, you cannot rename an object. Make sure you have
 sufficient rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 853. Error Message 1485 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1485: The password could not be changed.


 Explanation

 The password cannot be changed because of a problem with the utility or with
 the Directory Services database. Another possibility is that you have
 insufficient rights to change the password.
 Action

 Try again to change the password. You may need to exit the utility first, and
 then reopen it. Also check your connection to Directory Services. If your
 connection has become invalid, you are no longer authenticated as a user and
 cannot change the password. Make sure you have sufficient rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 854. Error Message 1489 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1489: The login script file could not be opened.


 Explanation

 The file containing the login script property cannot be successfully opened.
 The correct volume may be unavailable, or you may not have rights to the
 property.
 Action

 If you have rights to the login script property, check your connection to your
 default server on the network. If you still cannot open the login script, it
 may be corrupted. If this is the case, you will have to reenter the login
 script.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 855. Error Message 1490 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1490: The login script file could not be read.


 Explanation

 The file containing the login script property cannot be read successfully. The
 correct volume may be unavailable, or you may not have rights to the property.
 Action

 If you have rights to the login script property, check your connection to your
 default server on the network. If you still cannot read the login script, it
 may be corrupted. If this is the case, exit the utility and reenter the
 changes  to the login script.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 856. Error Message 1491 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1491: The login script file could not be written.


 Explanation

 The file containing the login script property cannot be successfully written.
 The correct volume may be unavailable, even if it was available when you read
 the login script. Another possibility is that you do not have rights to the
 property.
 Action

 Try to write the changes again. If you have rights to the login script
 property, check your connection to your default server on the network. If you
 still cannot write the login script, it may be corrupted. Exit the utility and
 reenter the changes to the login script.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 857. Error Message 1492 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1492: The login script file could not be closed.


 Explanation

 The file containing the login script property cannot be successfully closed.
 The correct volume may be unavailable, or you may not have rights to the
 property. If the file cannot be closed, any changes that you made may be lost.
 If you have not changed the login script, no damage should occur.
 Action

 If you have rights to the login script property, check your connection to your
 default server on the network. If you still cannot close the login script, it
 may be corrupted. Exit and reenter the utility and look at the login script.
 Reenter any changes that were lost.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 858. Error Message 1493 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1493: The login script was not completely saved due to an unknown error.


 Explanation

 The file containing the login script property could not be successfully saved.
 The correct volume may be unavailable, even if it was available when you read
 the login script. Another possibility is that you do not have rights to the
 property.
 Action

 Try to save the changes again. If you have rights to the login script
 property,  check your connection to your default server on the network. If you
 still  cannot save the login script, it may be corrupted. Exit the utility and
 reenter  the changes to the login script.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 859. Error Message 1494 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1494: The login script file could not be changed. The previous login script may
not be deleted completely.


 Explanation

 The file containing the login script property cannot be successfully updated.
 The correct volume may be unavailable, even if it was available when you read
 the login script. Another possibility is that you do not have rights to the
 property.
 Action

 Try to write the changes again. If you have rights to the login script
 property, check your connection to your default server on the network. If you
 still cannot update the login script, it may be corrupted. Exit the utility
 and  reenter the changes to the login script. Check the login script again
 after  making changes to be sure that the login script is complete and has not
 been  corrupted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 860. Error Message 1495 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1495: The login script could not be read because of insufficient memory.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory and may not be able to continue.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 861. Error Message 1496 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1496: The login script could not be saved because of insufficient memory.


 Explanation

 The utility has run out of memory and may not be able to continue.
 Action

 Correct the memory problem.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 862. Error Message 1499 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1499: This property requires valid Directory Services objects.


 Explanation

 The property requested must be associated with a Directory Services object,
 but  none is specified or available.
 Action

 Specify a different property. Many Directory Services properties are similar
 to  other properties, so be careful how you specify it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 863. Error Message 1500 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1500 The following entries are invalid


 Explanation

 Entries have been selected that the utility cannot process. The entry may be
 unavailable at the moment or the operation may be invalid on certain classes
 of  objects.
 Action

 Examine each invalid item to determine what caused it be invalid. Remove
 invalid selections from the list of selections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 864. Error Message 1501 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1501: You do not have sufficient rights to complete this operation.


 Explanation

 Your effective rights to this object, file, or directory, which are computed
 from trustee assignments, inheritance, and security equivalence, are not
 sufficient to complete this operation.
 Action

 Ask the network supervisor to grant you more rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 865. Error Message 1675 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1675: A previous password cannot be used; enter a unique password.


 Explanation

 To increase network security, your network supervisor has required that
 passwords be unique. You cannot use a password that has been used previously.
 Action

 Enter a new password that you have not used previously.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 866. Error Message 1676 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1676 The password is too short.


 Explanation

 A minimum password length was set by the network supervisor for this user. The
 password selected must be at least that long.
 Action

 Try a different password that is at least as long as the minimum required
 length. Ask your network supervisor if you do not know how long to make your
 password.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 867. Error Message 1677 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1677: The password is invalid.


 Explanation

 The password entered is not the correct one for the username entered. If
 intruder detection has been set and you enter an incorrect password too many
 times, your account may be locked.
 Action

 Enter the correct password.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 868. Error Message 1678 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1678: The password has expired.


 Explanation

 Either your account or your password for this user account has expired and is
 no longer valid.
 Action

 If you have grace logins, you can use one of them to log in and then change
 your password. If you do not have grace logins, or if the account has expired,
 contact your network supervisor to allow access to the account.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 869. Error Message 1679 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1679: Retype the new password.


 Explanation

 A new password must be entered twice to guard against typing errors. This
 ensures that your password has been changed to what you think it has been
 changed to.
 Action

 Reenter the same new password that you just typed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 870. Error Message 1685 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1685: Accounting could not be removed. (Delete property operation failed.)


 Explanation

 Accounting cannot be removed from this server for one of the following
 reasons:
 -  The server was unavailable to receive the command.
 -  Other processes cannot be interrupted right now.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If the error persists, check the server and your
 network connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 871. Error Message 1686 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1686: Accounting could not be installed. (Create property operation failed.)


 Explanation

 Accounting cannot be removed from this server for one of the following
 reasons:
 -  The server was unavailable to receive the command.
 -  Other processes cannot be interrupted right now.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If the error persists, check the server and your
 network connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 872. Error Message 1687 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1687: An error occurred during an attempt to install accounting.


 Explanation

 Accounting cannot be installed on this server for one of the following
 reasons:
 -  The server was unavailable to receive the command.
 -  Other processes cannot be interrupted right now.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If the error persists, check the server and your
 network connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 873. Error Message 1688 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1688: An error occurred during an attempt to remove accounting.


 Explanation

 Accounting annot be removed from this server for one of the following reasons:
 -  The server was unavailable to receive the command.
 -  Other processes cannot be interrupted right now.
 Action

 Try the operation again. If the error persists, check the server and your
 network connection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 874. Error Message 1689 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1689: An error occurred during an attempt to read a property value.


 Explanation

 A property value was requested to complete this operation, but none was
 returned. Directory Services may not have responded, or the request may have
 been invalid because of the object or property name used.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Close the utility and check your network connection
 if  necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 875. Error Message 1690 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1690: An error occurred during an attempt to write a property value.


 Explanation

 The utility attempted to update a property value to complete this operation,
 but the new value was not accepted. Directory Services may not have responded,
 or the request may have been invalid because of the object or property name
 used.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Close the utility and check your network connection
 if  necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 876. Error Message 1691 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1691: That is an invalid charge rate.


 Explanation

 The values that you entered for the multiplier and divisor form an invalid
 charge rate.
 Action

 See the help screens for instructions on deciding on what charge rates to use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 877. Error Message 1692 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1692: A maximum of 20 different charge rates are allowed among all services.


 Explanation

 Only 20 different charge rates are allowed among all five resources that
 accounting tracks. For example, if you have 10 charge rates for disk storage
 and 10 for service requests, you cannot enter a charge rate for blocks read
 until you delete one of the other charge rates.
 Action

 Delete a charge rate from this or another resource to free one of the 20
 charge  rates available. Then reenter the new charge rate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 878. Error Message 1694 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1694: No Charge cannot be deleted.


 Explanation

 The "No Charge" designation cannot be removed from the list.
 Action

 Do not try to delete "No Charge."


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 879. Error Message 1695 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1695: The selected charge rate cannot be deleted because it is still in use.


 Explanation

 You cannot delete a charge rate that is still in use in the day/time grid.
 Action

 Find all days and times when this charge rate is in use, and change those days
 and times to another charge rate. Then select the charge rate that you want to
 delete and choose "Delete" again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 880. Error Message 1696 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1696: A charge rate must be selected to delete.


 Explanation

 You chose "Delete," but you did not select a charge rate to delete from the
 list.
 Action

 First select a charge rate from the list, then choose "Delete" again. You can
 only delete a charge rate that is not in use.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 881. Error Message 1697 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1697: The charge rate could not be added.


 Explanation

 The charge rate you entered cannot be added. It may be caused by one of the
 following:
 -  You entered an invalid charge rate.
 -  The maximum number of charge rates has been exceeded. Only 20 different
    charge rates are allowed among all five resources that accounting tracks.
 -  The server has not accepted the new information.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Make sure that the server is functioning, that the
 charge rate is valid, and that it is not the 21st charge rate.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 882. Error Message 1705 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1705: All fields must be filled in.


 Explanation

 To complete the requested operation, all of the fields displayed must be
 completed. This may be because they are mandatory properties for this object
 class, or because information that is incomplete cannot be given to Directory
 Services.
 Action

 Fill in all the of the fields shown. See the help topic for information on
 each  field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 883. Error Message 1706 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1706: The entry contains invalid characters, or the value is too large.


 Explanation

 Either the value that you entered for this field is too large, or you have
 entered invalid characters that do not allow the field to be understood and
 sent to Directory Services.
 Action

 Reenter a smaller value or an entry that does not include invalid characters.
 See the help topic for information about what constitutes a valid entry in
 this  dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 884. Error Message 1707 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1707: You do not have sufficient rights to the current property or its pair.
The following value cannot be added to the list:


 Explanation

 Your effective rights to this object, file, or directory, which are computed
 from trustee assignments, inheritance, and security equivalence, are not
 sufficient to complete this operation.
 Action

 Ask the network supervisor grant you more rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 885. Error Message 1708 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1708: You do not have sufficient rights to the current property or its pair.
The following value cannot be deleted from the list:


 Explanation

 Your effective rights to this object, file, or directory, which are computed
 from trustee assignments, inheritance, and security equivalence, are not
 sufficient to complete this operation.
 Action

 Ask the network supervisor grant you more rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 886. Error Message 1710 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1710: The server error log file could not be opened.


 Explanation

 The file containing the server error log cannot be opened successfully. The
 correct volume may be unavailable, or you may not have rights to the server.
 Action

 If you have rights to the server, check your connection to your default server
 on the network. If you still cannot open the error log, it may be corrupted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 887. Error Message 1711 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1711: An error occurred during an attempt to close the server error log file.


 Explanation

 The file containing the server error log could not be successfully closed. The
 correct volume may be unavailable, or you may not have rights to the server.
 Because you cannot change the error log, only view it, no damage should occur.
 This problem may indicate another problem, however, and you may want to check
 the server.
 Action

 Exit and reenter the utility and look at the error log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 888. Error Message 1712 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1712: The server error log file could not be read.


 Explanation

 The file containing the server error log could not be successfully read. The
 correct volume may be unavailable, or you may not have rights to the server.
 Action

 If you have rights to the server, check your connection to your default server
 on the network. If you still cannot read the error log, it may be corrupted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 889. Error Message 1713 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1713: The server error log file could not be cleared.


 Explanation

 The file containing the server error log could not be successfully erased. The
 correct volume may be unavailable, even if it was available when you read the
 error log; or you may not have rights to the server.
 Action

 Try to clear the error log again. If you have rights to the server, check your
 connection to your default server on the network. If you still cannot clear
 the  error log, it may be corrupted. Exit the utility and reenter it to view
 the  error log.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 890. Error Message 1714 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1714: The Alias of a country can only be named by two characters.


 Explanation

 Because the name of a Country object can only be two characters, an Alias to a
 Country can also only be named by two characters.
 Action

 Enter a new name for the Alias to a Country object using only two characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 891. Error Message 1715 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1715: A Country object must be named by two characters.


 Explanation

 The name of a Country object must be only two characters. This name is
 intended  to be used as the international two-character code for each country.
 Action

 Enter a new name for the Country object that uses only two characters. See the
 help topic for a list of codes for many countries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 892. Error Message 1716 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1716: The home directory could not be created.


 Explanation

 A home directory for a user was specified, but cannot be created because of
 insufficient rights, because access to the volume was not possible, or because
 a problem (such as too many directory entries) exists on the volume that you
 specified.
 Action

 Try the operation again. Make sure you have sufficient rights to create a
 directory in the area you have selected. Check with the network supervisor if
 there seems to be a problem on the volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 893. Error Message 1720 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1720: The TCP/IP address is invalid. All fields must be between 0 and 255.


 Explanation

 The TCP/IP address that you have entered is invalid because the values entered
 are not within ranges specified by the TCP/IP protocol.
 Action

 Enter correct values for each field. All values must be between 0 and 255.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 894. Error Message 1721 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1721 The Volume field must be filled in.


 Explanation

 In order to complete this operation, a volume must be specified. The volume
 provides an address to access the file system and the server to which it is
 attached. You can use the "Select Object" dialog to select an object from the
 Browser if you are not certain what volumes are available.
 Action

 Complete the volume field by entering a volume object's name (or complete
 name,  if in another context), or by selecting a volume from the "Select
 Object"  dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 895. Error Message 1732 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1732: You cannot delete a Server object using the NetWare Administrator. Use
the Partition Manger.


 Explanation

 Server objects can be deleted only by using the Partition Manager. Deleting
 NetWare server objects using the Browser in the NetWare Administrator could
 make portions of the Directory database inaccessible because partition
 replicas  could be on the deleted server. Partition Manager will not allow you
 to delete  a server unless all parts of the Directory database are available
 from other  servers.
 Action

 Use to the Partition Manager option to delete NetWare Server objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 896. Error Message 1733 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1733: The server cannot be added. A server connection cannot be established.


 Explanation

 The utility needed to identify the server which it is receiving information
 from but was not able to identify its connection ID to add it to the current
 list of server connections.
 Action

 Make sure that you are connected to the network and that the needed Directory
 Services server is functioning properly. Try the operation again; exit and
 restart the utility, if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 897. Error Message 1734 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1734: The server cannot be added. The name of the Directory tree used by this
server cannot be determined.


 Explanation

 The Directory tree used by this server cannot be determined. Without that
 information, it cannot be added here.
 Action

 Make sure that you are connected to the network and that the needed Directory
 Services server is functioning properly. Try the operation again; exit and
 restart the utility, if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 898. Error Message 1735 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1735: The server cannot be added. The server already exists in this part of the
Directory tree.


 Explanation

 Two NetWare Server objects that refer to the same physical server cannot be in
 the same container.
 Action

 Create the second NetWare Server object within a different container.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 899. Error Message 1736 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1736: The server cannot be added. The server's network address cannot be
determined.


 Explanation

 In order to create a NetWare Server object, Directory Services must be able to
 locate the appropriate network address for the physical server.
 Action

 Make sure you are specifying the correct network address for this server.
 Check  your network connection to see that the server is accessible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 900. Error Message 1737 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1737: The server cannot be added. The server's version cannot be determined.


 Explanation

 In order to create a NetWare Server object, Directory Services must be able to
 determine which version of NetWare is being used on the server.
 Action

 Check your network connection to make sure that the server is accessible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 901. Error Message 1741 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1741: The name of the Directory tree used by this server cannot be determined.


 Explanation

 The Directory tree used by this server cannot be determined.
 Action

 Make sure that you are connected to the network and that the needed Directory
 Services server is functioning properly. Try the operation again; exit and
 restart the utility, if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 902. Error Message 1742 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1742: A preferred server connection cannot be established.


 Explanation

 The utility needed to identify the server specified as the preferred server,
 but was not able to identify its connection ID.
 Action

 Make sure that you are connected to the network and that the needed Directory
 Services server is functioning properly. Try the operation again; exit and
 restart the utility, if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 903. Error Message 1743 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1743: The Error Log file is too big to display. Only the most recent portion is
shown.


 Explanation

 The server error log file is too large to load into memory in its entirety for
 display. Only the most recently logged errors are displayed.
 Action

 After examining the server error log, clear the error log so that, in the
 future, the file will not be too large to display.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 904. Error Message 1752 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1752: You cannot delete a mandatory property.


 Explanation

 Certain properties must have values for this object to exist in Directory
 Services. You cannot remove all values from these mandatory properties.
 Action

 You can remove all but the last value of a mandatory property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 905. Error Message 1850 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1850 Form numbers must be in the range 0 to 255.


 Explanation

 The number of a form that you enter must be between 0 and 255.
 Action

 Reenter a form number with a value from 0 to 255.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 906. Error Message 1851 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1851: The print server is not responding. Printer status failed.


 Explanation

 An attempt to get the status of the printer by reading properties of the print
 server failed because the print server did not respond to a request. Directory
 Services or your connection to a valid server may be broken.
 Action

 Check your network connection and try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 907. Error Message 1852 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1852: No attachment has been made to the print server. Printer status failed.


 Explanation

 An attempt to get the status of the printer by reading properties of the print
 server failed. The print server did not respond to a request or could not be
 found. Directory Services or your connection to a valid server may be broken.
 Action

 Check your network connection and try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 908. Error Message 1853 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1853: The user is not a print server operator. Printer status failed.


 Explanation

 In attempt to get the status of the printer by reading properties of the print
 server failed. The user requesting status is not authorized to receive
 information from the print server.
 Action

 You must have more rights to the print server to get the requested status
 information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 909. Error Message 1854 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1854: A printer status error has occurred.


 Explanation

 An attempt to get the status of the printer by reading properties of the print
 server failed for an unknown reason. Directory Services or your connection to
 a  valid server may be broken.
 Action

 Check your network connection and try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 910. Error Message 1855 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1855: The system timer cannot be read. The printer status will not be updated.


 Explanation

 An internal error has caused the system time to be unavailable. Because an
 incorrect system time can cause many problems, the printer status is left
 unchanged.
 Action

 Make sure that you have a valid connection to a server and that server is
 functioning as a time server. Try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 911. Error Message 1856 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1856: The system timer cannot be read. The queue job list will not be updated.


 Explanation

 An internal error has caused the system time to be unavailable. Because an
 incorrect system time can cause many problems, the queue job list is left
 unchanged.
 Action

 Make sure that you have a valid connection to a server and that server is
 functioning as a time server. Try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 912. Error Message 1857 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1857: You do not have sufficient rights to examine the queue job.


 Explanation

 You do not have sufficient rights to the printing-related objects of this part
 of the Directory tree to examine the print queue job.
 Action

 Ask the network supervisor to grant you more rights.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 913. Error Message 1858 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1858: An error occurred during an attempt to read the queue job information.


 Explanation

 The print queue job information cannot be read successfully. The correct
 object  may be unavailable, or you may not have rights to the correct object.
 Action

 If you have rights to the object, check your connection to your default server
 on the network. If you still cannot read the queue job information, it may be
 corrupted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 914. Error Message 1859 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1859: The system timer cannot be read. The print queue job details will not be
updated.


 Explanation

 An internal error has caused the system time to be unavailable. Because an
 incorrect system time can cause many problems, the print job details are left
 unchanged.
 Action

 Make sure that you have a valid connection to a server and that server is
 functioning as a time server. Try the operation again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 915. Error Message 1860 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

1860: An error occurred in the print queue list. The print queue ID cannot be
read.


 Explanation

 The file containing the print queue job list could not be successfully read.
 The correct volume may be unavailable, or you may not have rights to the
 server.
 Action

 If you have rights to the server, check your connection to your default server
 on the network. If you still cannot read the print queue ID, it may be
 corrupted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 916. Browser Sort Objects Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sorting Objects in the Browser


 Use the "Sort" dialog to select the order you want objects to display in the
 Browser.
 Example: To see User objects listed first in the Browser, Group objects
 secon, Volume objects third, and Printer objects fourth, user the arrow
 buttons  to move the objects in the list.

 Screen regions and buttons
    "Class Types" lists the classes  you can select to set the order object
       classes will appear in the Browser.

    "Save as Default" allows you to save the options you have set for the  next
       time you use NWADMIN.

    "Restore Default" allows you to return to the previous default settings and
       use them as your current default settings..

    "OK" closes the dialog box and sets the Browser to display objects sorted
       in the  order you set the next time you expand a container in the
       Browser.

    "Cancel" closes the dialog box without saving the changes.



ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Replica Types


 Master

 There can only be one master replica per partition.  If the master replica is
 lost or destroyed, you need to change one of the existing replicas to make it
 the master.
 The master replica is accessed when a replica is added or deleted, or when a
 partition is merged, or a new partition is created.
 Note:  If a valid Master replica exists, you cannot change the type of the
 Master replica. To specify a new Master replica, change the type of an
 existing  Read Write partition to Master, and the Master replica will
 automatically be  changed to Read Write.
 Read Write

 Read Write replicas can be written to.  They send out information for
 synchronization when any change is made to an object or its properties. The
 first replica created when you create a new partition is a Master replica. By
 default, new replicas that you create after that are Read Write replicas.
 Read Only

 Read Only replicas cannot be written to.  They provide information to users,
 and are updated with changes from Read Write and Master replicas when the
 replicas synchronize, but they do not accept changes. A user who was reading
 information from a Read Only replica and tried to make a change would have to
 wait while a Read Write replica was located on another server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Access Control file and directory right


 For a file

 Grants the right to change the file's trustee assignments and Inherited Rights
 Filter. With this right, users can grant all rights, except Supervisor, to
 other users, including rights that they themselves have not been granted.
 For a directory

 Grants the right to change the trustee assignments and Inherited Rights Filter
 of the directory and any files or subdirectories below it. With this right,
 users can grant all rights, except Supervisor, to other users, including
 rights  that they themselves have not been granted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

(Access Control List) ACL


 A list that contains information about an object describing which other
 objects  can access it. It is a property of every object in Directory
 Services. Trustees  and the Inherited Rights Filter are contained in the ACL.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

block


 Sections of information stored on the hard disk. The block size for a volume
 is  defined at installation. A block is usually between 4,000 and 64,000 bytes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Browser


 The window in the NetWare Administrator that displays objects in the Directory
 tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

class


 A type of object. Every object has a class. Object classes are: AFP Server,
 Alias, Bindery object, Computer, Country, Directory Map, Group, NetWare
 Server,  Organization, Organizational Role, Organizational Unit, Print Queue,
 Print  Server, Printer, Profile, User, and Volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Computer object


 An object that tracks network hardware. You can record information such as
 description, serial number, and person the computer is assigned to.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

container object


 An object that can contain other objects. All objects are created in one of
 three containers: Country, Organization, and Organizational Unit.
 Objects you create in a container inherit the same rights granted to the
 container.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

context


 The location of an object in the Directory tree. Your current context is your
 current point in the Directory tree.
 The context starts with the selected object in the Directory tree and goes
 back  to the root of the tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create File and Directory right


 For a file

 Grants the right to salvage the file after it has been deleted.
 For a directory

 Grants the right to create files and subdirectories in the directory. If
 Create  is the only right granted at the directory level and no other rights
 are  granted below it, this right creates a Drop Box directory.
 A Drop Box directory allows users to open and write to a new file in the
 directory, but after the file has been closed, the user can't see or read from
 it. A user can copy files into the directory and retain ownership, but all
 trustee assignments are revoked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create object right


 Allows a trustee to create a new object below the current object in the
 directory tree. This right is only available on container objects and volumes;
 other objects cannot have subordinates.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory database


 A database containing all objects and their properties. This database can be
 distributed over many servers as partitions, and accessed using many
 utilities.
 When you view the Directory tree, you are actually viewing the hierarchical
 structure of names of objects in the Directory database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory tree


 A hierarchical structure that represents how objects are related to each other
 in the Directory database.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

effective rights


 The rights a user has in a directory or file. Effective rights are composed of
 inherited rights, trustee assignments, and security equivalences.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group object


 An object used to assign rights to a group as a whole; the rights transfer to
 individual users in the group.
 Group is not a container object but a list of users.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

host server


 The server to which a device is physically connected or to which it is
 logically associated.
 For example, a volume is physically connected to a certain NetWare server.
 That  NetWare server is the "host server" of the volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

inheritance


 By inheritance, a trustee assignment applies to everything below the point
 where it is made, unless another trustee assignment is made further down the
 tree, or the rights are blocked by an Inherited Rights Filter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Inherited Rights Filter (IRF)


 Controls which rights a user can inherit for a file or directory. A
 directory's  IRF controls which parent directory rights the user can exercise
 in the current  directory. A file's IRF controls which of the current
 directory's rights can be  exercised in the file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

leaf object


 The objects located at the end of a branch in the Directory tree. They can't
 contain other objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

manager

 A user object who has rights to manage several other user objects. A user
 manages any other object to which it has the Write property right to its
 Object  Trustees (ACL) property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

name space


 A loadable module that allows you to store non-DOS files on a NetWare server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NetWare Server object


 An object that represents a NetWare server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object


 An entity defined on the network and given access to the NetWare server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object rights


 Rights, granted to one object, to access another object. The object that is
 granted rights is called a trustee. Object rights don't affect properties or
 property rights, with the exception of the Supervisor object right, which
 grants access to all property values.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

object name


 A property of every object that provides a name for that object. Different
 objects use different properties as their name. Most leaf objects use the
 Common Name property (CN). Container objects use Organizational Units (OU),
 Organizations (O), or Country (C).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

page


 A group of information in an object dialog, accessed by choosing a page button
 (found on the far right side of an object dialog). The several pages of
 information are all part of the same dialog box. Th "OK" and "Cancel" buttons
 affect all pages.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parent container


 The container in which an object is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

parent directory


 The directory in which a subdirectory is located.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

partition


 NetWare partition
 A logical division of the Directory database. Each partition consists of a
 container object, its subordinate objects, and data about those objects.
 Partitions do not contain information about files and directories.
 Disk partition
 A logical unit on a NetWare server hard disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

path


 A specific location in the Directory tree. The path can include the NetWare
 server, volume, directory, subdirectory, and file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

physical volume name


 The name given to a volume when it is installed. The first volume on every new
 server is SYS:. A volume's physical name is followed by a colon (:).
 A Volume object refers to a physical volume.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Server object


 An object that represents a network print server. A print server takes print
 jobs out of a print queue and sends them to the appropriate network printer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

property


 A characteristic of an object. Each object class has certain properties that
 hold information about the object. Properties hold data (values) about
 objects.
 A descriptive feature of a bindery object such as a password, account
 restriction, account balance, internetwork address, or list of authorized
 clients.
 Some object properties can contain multiple values. For example, the Telephone
 Number property, found in many objects, can contain several telephone numbers.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

property rights


 Property rights control access to information stored within the object (the
 information stored in the object's properties).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

protocols


 Procedures that a NetWare server's operating system follows to accept and
 respond to workstation requests.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

purge


 To delete files permanently from a NetWare server. Files that have been purged
 cannot be retrieved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Remote Console


 A product that allows network supervisors to execute console commands from a
 workstation over either SPX or asynchronous connections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

replica


 A copy of a NetWare partition. A replica can be the Master copy, a Read/Write
 copy, or a Read Only copy. Replicas are managed with the Partition Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rights


 Determine the type of access that a trustee has to a directory, file, or
 object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

salvage


 To retrieve files that were deleted, but have not yet been purged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

security equivalence


 Having all access rights that are assigned to another object. Only a user can
 be security equivalent to another object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor right


 Grants all rights to a file, directory, object, or property. You cannot block
 the Supervisor right for files or directories with an Inherited Rights Filter.
 You can block the Supervisor right for objects and properties. There is no
 automatic Supervisor user in NetWare v4.0.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor file and directory right


 For a file

 Grants all rights to the file. The trustee can grant any right to another user
 and modify all rights in the file's Inherited Rights Filter. The Supervisor
 right cannot be blocked by an Inherited Rights Filter.
 For a directory

 Grants all rights to the directory, all subdirectories, and their files.
 Overrides any Inherited Rights Filter restrictions in subdirectories or files.
 Trustees can grant others any rights in this directory or its subdirectories,
 or in their files. The Supervisor right can only be revoked from the directory
 in which it was originally granted, because filters below that point are
 ignored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor object right


 Grants all access privileges. A trustee who has the Supervisor right
 automatically has access to all properties.
 The Supervisor right can be blocked by the Inherited Rights Filter, both for
 objects below the object where Supervisor is assigned, and for individual
 properties of an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Supervisor property right


 Grants all access privileges. A trustee who has the Supervisor right
 automatically has all other rights to the property.
 The Supervisor right can be blocked by the Inherited Rights Filter, both for
 objects below the object where Supervisor is assigned, and for individual
 properties of an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

trustee


 A user or group that has access to a directory, file, or object is a trustee
 of  that directory, file, or object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

value


 The contents of a property of an object. Many properties can have multiple
 values, such as a telephone number property containing three different
 telephone numbers. Each telephone number is a value of the property. Access
 rights control access to a property, but not to individual values of a
 property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Volume object


 An object that represents a physical volume within a NetWare server.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Write property right


 Allows a trustee to add, change, or remove any value of a property .
 If the Write right is given, Add Self is disabled because Write includes its
 functionality.